Qss-35 Service Manual
Qss-35 Service Manual
Qss-35 Service Manual
com
QSS-35 series
Service Manual
CHAPTER DESCRIPTION
3.Mode
4.Troubleshooting
5.Operation sequence
6.Electrical parts
8.Appendix
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
SCREW
System program:
• QSS-3501i series: Ver. 2
• QSS-3501/3502 series: Ver. 2
! It is prohibited to show, provide, lend or transfer this manual to the others except the service personnel.
! The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
! Illustrations in this manual may vary depending on the model or manufacturing lot.
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
Explanation of manual
Description for each specification
This manual contains the maintenance procedure for all the specifications.
The procedure for each specification may differ.
For the different procedures depending on the specifications
The specification mark is mentioned for the procedure.
Specification Mark
Normal specification [N]
SM specification [SM]
J specification [J]
F specification [F]
There is no specification mark for the procedure which is same for all the specifications.
Definitions of the marks and symbols used in this manual are as follows:
The Important symbol indicates operations or procedures requiring caution, instructions and supplementary explanations
that need to be followed.
The pointing finger symbol indicates the manual or section where you can find additional information.
ii
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
The Note symbol indicates functions or instructions which are convenient if you know.
The names of the processing solutions in this manual are indicated as shown below. Some types of processing solutions may
have other names.
Processing solutions Abbreviations
Color Developer CD
Bleach Fixer BF
Stabilizer STB
iii
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
iv
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notes to service personnel
Explanation of manual ............................................................................................................................ii
Description for each specification ...................................................................................................ii
About the chapters ..........................................................................................................................ii
Symbols used in this manual ..........................................................................................................ii
Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual ........................................................... iii
v
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
vi
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
3. Mode
Passwords .............................................................................................................................. 30500
Passwords .............................................................................................................................................................30500
Mode structure chart .............................................................................................................. 31000
Mode structure chart .............................................................................................................................................31000
Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 32510
Paper Specification Registration/Setup ................................................................................................................32510
iBeam Tuning [35i] ...............................................................................................................................................32511
iBeam Engine Check [35i] ....................................................................................................................................32512
Magazine Registration/Setup ................................................................................................................................32520
Monitor setup ........................................................................................................................................................32530
Data Initialization .................................................................................................................................................32550
Processor Settings ................................................................................................................. 33001
Print Sensor Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................33001
Counter [J] ............................................................................................................................................................33010
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM] ..............................................................................................................33030
Pump Output Amount Setting[F] ..........................................................................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ...........................................................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] ........................................................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] .......................................................................................................................................33060
Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................... 33500
Thermosensor Calibration ....................................................................................................................................33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] ....................................................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] .................................................................................................................33510
Basic Kit Setting [J] ..............................................................................................................................................33520
Kit Correction [J] ..................................................................................................................................................33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting [J] ......................................................................................................................33540
Pump Output Amount Setting [J] .........................................................................................................................33550
Operation Check [J] ..............................................................................................................................................33560
Manual Kit Change [J] ..........................................................................................................................................33570
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM] [J] .....................................................................................................33580
Cleaning Water Amount Setting[F] ......................................................................................................................33580
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting[F] .................................................................................................33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ................................................................................................................33600
Display Processor Working Information[F] .........................................................................................................33620
Processor Set Up Mode[F] ....................................................................................................................................33630
vii
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4. Troubleshooting
Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................... 4001
Classification of errors and attention messages ......................................................................................................4001
Suffix number display .............................................................................................................................................4002
viii
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring ............ 4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) [35, 35i] .........................................................4200
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) [35, 35i] ................................................................4203
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse .................................................... 4252
Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse (printer section/processor section) [35, 35i] ........................................4252
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart ................................................................................. 4302
The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear from the Net Order display. [35] ........4302
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35] ....................................... 4390
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35] .......................................................................................................4390
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i] ...................................... 4470
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i] .....................................................................................................4470
White line and black line appear on a print. (vertical) [35i] ...................................................................................4470
Mistake in setting of focal plane regulating guide [35i] .........................................................................................4470
Appearing the paper width line [35i] ......................................................................................................................4470
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner ............................................................................................. 4500
List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type) ...........................................................................................4500
Diagnosis appendix: F replenishment ...................................................................................... 4600
Replenishment cartridge installation section troubleshooting flow ........................................................................4600
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error ..............................................................................................4610
Recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error ..............................................................................................4620
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................... 40500
No. 0500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. ........................................................................................40500
No. 0501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ..............................................................................................40500
No. 0502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. ................................................................40500
No. 0503[N] [SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. .....................................................................................................40500
No. 0505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. ....................................................................................40500
No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. ..........................................................................................................40500
No. 0508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ...................................40500
No. 0518 Set the Dryer Cover. ...........................................................................................................................40500
No. 0519 Remove the prints from the Print Conveyor Unit. ..............................................................................40500
No. 0520 Sensors may be dirty. ..........................................................................................................................40500
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment ............................................................................ 40600
No. 0600[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. CD ................................................................................................40600
No. 0601[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. BF .................................................................................................40600
No. 0602[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty.STB ................................................................................................40600
No. 0603[J] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ............................................................................................40600
No. 0604[J] Add water to the SW/DW Tank. ....................................................................................................40600
No. 0605[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. CD .....................................................................................................40600
No. 0606[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. BF .....................................................................................................40600
No. 0607[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge.STB ....................................................................................................40600
No. 0609[J] The Tablet kit is empty. ..................................................................................................................40600
No. 0610[J] Empty the Effluent Tank.### .........................................................................................................40600
ix
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
x
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
xi
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
xii
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
xiii
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
xiv
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
xv
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
xvi
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
5. Operation sequence
Start up/Closing down sequence ........................................................................................... 50500
Startup sequence [35, 35i] ....................................................................................................................................50500
ARCNET communication ....................................................................................................... 50520
ARCNET communication flow [35, 35i] .............................................................................................................50520
Data flow chart ....................................................................................................................... 50700
Data flow in printing [35, 35i] ..............................................................................................................................50700
Data flow in data saving [35, 35i] ........................................................................................................................50710
Data flow to the CAU [35, 35i] ............................................................................................................................50730
Paper path diagram ................................................................................................................ 55000
Paper path diagram [35, 35i] ................................................................................................................................55000
xvii
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
6. Electrical parts
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts ............................................................................. 60100
Compatibility of QSS-35 series PCBs and electrical parts [35, 35i] ....................................................................60100
Position of electrical parts (printer section) ............................................................................ 61000
Printer section (positions of PCBs) [35, 35i] ........................................................................................................61000
Printer section (position and description of electrical parts) [35, 35i] .................................................................61050
Paper supply section (positions of electrical parts) [35, 35i] ................................................................................61200
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35] ......................................................61300
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35i] .....................................................61310
Paper advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35, 35i] .....................................................61400
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) [35] ................................................................................61450
PCB position (Processor section) [35, 35i] ............................................................................. 63200
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [N] [SM] [J] [F] .......................................................................................63200
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i] ............................................................ 63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] [SM] [J] ..............................................................................63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM] ..........................................................................................63300
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [J] ..............................................................................................63310
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [F] ..............................................................................................63311
Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) [F] ......................................................63312
xviii
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
8. Appendix
Service personnel tool list ...................................................................................................... 80310
Service personnel tool list [N] [SM] [J] [F] ..........................................................................................................80310
Operation keyboard correspondence list ............................................................................... 81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list ..............................................................................................................81010
Table of wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................ 89000
Wiring diagram table [35, 35i] .............................................................................................................................89000
xix
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
xx
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
1000
1000 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
10010
Description of warning (signal words)
Description of warning (signal words)
• Signal words identify the level of injuries that can potentially occur.
• The signal words used in this manual and found on labels, DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, are assigned according to the
level of potential risk.
This indicates situations that if not immediately avoided could result in serious injury or death.
This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in serious injury or death.
This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in non-life threatening injury. It is also used to indicate situations
which may cause damage to physical property.
SIGNALWORD
10010 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
10020
Location of warning labels
Location of warning labels
The following shows the locations and types of warning labels and the parts number on this machine. Heed the clearly indicated warnings
and operate safely without accidents. Do not peel the labels off. If the warning labels on the machine becomes illegible or peel off, contact
your place of purchase and exchange them with new labels.
16
10
12*1
1*1
15
3
7
4
1 8 1
13 3
6
5 4
11*3 F specification
1*2 1
14
18
3
4
15
1
G086609
*1. Only for system equipped with dual paper magazine unit (option)
*2. Only for single paper magazine specification
*3. QSS-3502 only
10020 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
10020
Location of warning labels
1 2
A023349-01 A023200-01
5 6
A023031-01 A022587-01
7
A234392-01
8
A234350-01
10020 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
10020
Location of warning labels
9 10
A022536-01 A023473-01
13 14
A022516-01 A045206-01
15
A063381-01
16 17
A022509-01 A031010-01
10020 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
10020
Location of warning labels
18 A087463-01
10020 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
10030
For safe operation
For safe operation
! General precautions
IMPORTANT
• Ground wires (green and yellow) are connected to the covers and units of the machine.
For reassembly, be sure to connect the ground wires as they were.
• Be sure to perform an operation check after replacing or adjusting any parts (or units).
• This machine uses non-pharmaceutical poison and toxic processing solutions which are dangerous to drink in. Direct
contact with processing solutions may irritate eyes.
When handling processing solutions, wear safety goggles.
If a processing solution has been ingested accidentally, immediately rinse the mouth out with water, and drink one or
two cups of water. Contact a physician as soon as possible, and then vomit the solution according to the physician's
instructions.
If processing solution gets into eyes, immediately rinse them under running water for at least 15 minutes, and then
contact a physician.
• Direct contact with processing solutions may irritate the skin and may cause an allergic reaction.
When handling processing solutions, be sure to wear rubber gloves and clothing for workwear, to avoid direct contact.
If there is a possibility of direct or indirect exposure to a processing solution, wash with soap and rinse with lots of
water, after completion of work.
• Processing solution stains on your clothing may result in discoloration or fading. When handling processing solutions,
wear clothing for workwear.
10030 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
10030
For safe operation
• If any case you have to take care of wiring for the power such as moving the machine, ask a qualified professional
electrician for work. Do not forget to ground the machine.
• Be careful for your hands, hair, clothes, etc., not to be caught under the gear, chain, belt, roller, fan and other rotating
parts.
Do not remove the cover unless it is specified.
Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply of this machine before performing any work.
Keep away your hands from the machine during operation.
If your hand or the like is caught and you cannot move, ask someone around you to turn off the circuit breaker at once.
• The processing solution heater, dryer heater and motor, etc. generate high fever.
If you directly touch them during operation or right after operation, you may get burnt.
When replacement of parts or maintenance is performed, make sure that the temperature is fully lowered.
After temperature fully falls, carry out the operation by turning OFF the circuit breaker and the main power supply.
Cooling time, such as the heater section and the motor, changes with work states.Turn off the circuit breaker and
main power supply. Then, perform the work after the temperature has become low enough.
If you have got burnt, cool the burn with flowing water and contact a physician as soon as possible.
10030 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
10030
For safe operation
• There is a danger of hands being caught by the open/close covers or doors, or by the movable units.
When opening and closing covers or doors, be sure to hold them firmly.
10030 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
10040
For safe operation
If an electrically charged human body touches electronic parts such as PCBs, it may adversely affect the electronic parts.
When handling the electronic parts, be sure to use static-dissipative tools as below to prevent the components on the PCB from being
• When using the static-dissipative tool, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the unit and the main power supply, and
wait 10 seconds or more to carry out operation.
10040 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
10050
For safe operation
Laser Precautions
NOTE
• The system of QSS-3501i series is not equipped with laser engine.
3
4
5
2
G084076
1 2
3 4
10050 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
10050
For safe operation
10050 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
2000
2000 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
2000
2000 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
20005
System list
System list
20005 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
20005
System list
20005 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
20020
Removing covers [35, 35i]
Removing covers [35, 35i]
G084486
! Printer section
The numbers in the brackets show the number of screws for covers.
20020 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
20021
Removing covers [35, 35i]
! Processor section
The numbers in the brackets show the number of screws for covers.
Sub-tank top cover PCB cover 1 (3 pcs.) Processor rear cover (6 pcs.)
[F] specification
Sub-tank top cover PCB cover 1 (3 pcs.) Processor rear cover (9 pcs.)
[J] specification
Sub-tank top cover PCB cover 1 (3 pcs.) Processor rear cover (6 pcs.)
20021 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
20021
Removing covers [35, 35i]
Processor side cover 1 (11 pcs.) Dryer cover (1 pc.) Air duct (1 pc.)
G084432
20021 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
20110
Adjusting the belt tension
Adjusting the belt tension
Reference
☞ Paper supply unit A, B (for 35, 35i) ☞ Exposure advance unit (for 35)
☞ Exposure advance unit (for 35i) ☞ Paper advance unit (for 35, 35i)
2 3
4,5
G083240
20110 1/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
20110
Adjusting the belt tension
197±24 g
(1.9±0.2 N)
(35i)
1 3
G083239
2 Pressure change motor 1 belt 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 194±20 g Pressure change motor
(1.9±0.2 N) 1
20110 2/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
20110
Adjusting the belt tension
G083238
20110 3/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
20110
Adjusting the belt tension
4 Pressure change motor 2 belt 6.0 mm 2.0 mm 310±50 g Pressure change motor
(3.0 ± 0.5 N) 2
20110 4/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
20110
Adjusting the belt tension
G083241
20110 5/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
20110
Adjusting the belt tension
20110 6/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
20125
Adjusting the belt tension
Colorimeter
No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration
1 Paper advance motor belt 50 g 1.0 mm Attaching position of the
(0.5 N) tension pulley
20125 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
20140
Adjusting the belt tension
Adjusting belt tension (Dryer section and conveyor section) [35, 35i]
5
3
1, 2
G083194
NOTE
• For adjustment, refer to the reference listed in the following table.
Reference
No. Name Reference
1 Replacing print conveyor unit belt [35, 35i] ☞ 27120
4 Adjusting chain tension of print sorter unit [35, 35i] ☞ 27450
− Adjusting elevator belt tension [J] [35, 35i] ☞ 27650
5 Paper advance motor belt 265 to 296 g 1.6 mm Position of drive motor
(2.6 to 2.9 N)
20140 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
21170
PC control section
PC control section
! Procedure
G084060
Stopper
G084036
21170 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
21180
PC control section
Removing PC control unit cover [35, 6. Open the PC control unit. Stand the stopper
and securely attach it to the PC control unit.
35i]
! Procedure
G084060
G084451
21180 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
21190
PC control section
IMPORTANT
• If the backspace of the system is 190 mm or less,
remove the PC control unit cover.
21190 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
22000
Paper magazine section
Paper magazine section
Procedure to check magazine [35, 2. Check that the paper guides are securely
attached.
35i]
Paper guides
Check item
Paper Check that paper is neat in shape.
magazine Check that paper guides are attached securely.
! Procedure
G074539
G074538
U 82.5 mm
22000 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25610
Paper supply unit A
Paper supply unit A
Removing paper supply unit A [35, 7. If the CVP unit is to be attached, replace
paper advance unit A and carry out the CVP
35i] imprint pressure adjustment.
☞ 25640
! Procedure
25610 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25620
Paper supply unit A
Removing cutter unit and adjusting 3. Remove the loading sensor. (two screws)
its right angle [35, 35i] IMPORTANT
• When replacing the loading sensor, in order
to remove the wiring of loading sensor, it is
! Removing the cutter unit necessary to cut the mini band.
Loading sensor
1. Pull out paper supply unit A.
2. Unplug the connector(s).
• J/P422 (Cut motor)
J/P424 J/P425
Mini band
G078404
G074447
Positioning plate
G078405
25620 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25620
Paper supply unit A
Positioning plate
Loosen these
screws.
G057512
" Point
Check the right angle of the paper cut section by
matching up with cut edges as shown illustration
below.
The second print
A B
Paper
advance
direction
25620 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25630
Paper supply unit A
Adjusting paper hold timing of arm (3) Adjust the position of the detection plate so
that the plate is protruded 1.8±0.2 mm from
[35, 35i] the paper hold sensor. (Loosen two set-
screws.)
Set-screws of the
detection plate
Cam
Detection plate
Loosen this Paper hold motor mounting Paper hold sensor Hexagonal screwdriver
screw. plate
G057638
3. Adjust the position of the detection plate of View from this side.
the paper hold motor.
Cam
Detection
1.8±0.2 mm
plate
G074454
screwdriver to the right so that the bulge of (4) Tighten the set-screws of the paper hold
the cam faces below. motor. (Two set-screws)
NOTE 4. Operate the paper hold motor via Output
• Set-screws (A) and (B) need not be check to check that the pressure pin is align
loosened. If it is loosened, attach it as it
was.
• Set-screws (A) and (B) fix the cam to the
paper hold motor.
25630 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25630
Paper supply unit A
Guide
0.0 mm
Pressure pin
G074455
25630 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25640
Paper supply unit A
Adjusting CVP imprint pressure [35, position of the CVP unit is the same as that
of the head adjustment jig.
35i]
Head adjusting jig
! Procedure
25640 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25710
Paper supply unit B
Paper supply unit B
Removing paper supply unit B [35, 4. Remove screw(s) from paper supply unit B.
(Loosen two screws out of four.)
35i]
Paper supply unit B
G084597
PCB cover
G084595
G084596
25710 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25710
Paper supply unit B
Screws A
G084600
25710 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25710
Paper supply unit B
G074547
25710 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25720
Paper supply unit B
Adjusting the height and position of 3. Tighten the screws of the magazine slide
frame. (four screws)
paper magazine mount B [35, 35i]
4. Check the detection status of magazine
sensor B via input check. ☞ 35210
IMPORTANT If magazine B is not detected correctly, adjust the
• 33/33SD/3300i position of paper magazine code sensor B.
☞ Adjusting the position of paper magazine code
• Check if paper magazine mount B is set to the
sensor B
positioning pin of paper supply unit B smoothly.
5. After the adjustment, check that the paper
Positioning pin does not zigzag.
G074552
Loosen these screws.
G059255
G074553
25720 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25720
Paper supply unit B
adjust them. (Two adjusting screws each left the magazine code can be detected with
and right) paper magazine B inserted.
Holder 2
Adjusting screws
Loosen these screws.
G059258
G059256
25720 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25730
Paper supply unit B
Adjusting paper feeding Example: When the first test print is misaligned in the left.
unevenness of paper supply unit B First test print 0.5 mm Second test print
[35, 35i]
A
! Procedure
A
IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the zigzagging of paper supply unit
Paper advance
direction
A
G072367
Paper advance
direction
G074555
25730 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25730
Paper supply unit B
Positioning pin
Right
Left
25730 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25810
Exposure advance unit
Exposure advance unit
! Procedure
Stopper
G083246
25810 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25810
Exposure advance unit
5. Lift the exposure advance unit to arrow direction holding the part of A and B, and then remove it.
Part A Exposure advance unit
IMPORTANT
• Be careful when handling the exposure advance unit since it is very heavy.
1. The exposure advance unit has positioning pin(s). No position adjustment is needed in attaching the
exposure advance unit.
25810 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25820
Exposure advance unit
Reference
For 35i, refer to ☞ Banding shooting [35i].
80mm
86mm
Turn unit
Pressure roller 2
Pressure roller at the inlet side
Pressure roller at the exit side
G074561
25820 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25820
Exposure advance unit
Exit arm
Pressure roller 2
G084601
25820 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25820
Exposure advance unit
G083106
NOTE
• The banding is generated on the print whole area.
25820 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25830
Exposure advance unit
Reference
For details of 35, refer to ☞ Banding shooting [35].
80mm
86mm
Pressure roller 2 74mm 74mm
Arm unit 2
17mm 27mm
Paper guide
Turn unit
Pressure roller at the inlet side Pressure roller at the exit side
G083104
25830 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25830
Exposure advance unit
25830 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25830
Exposure advance unit
Pressure roller 2
G083105
G083106
25830 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
25830
Exposure advance unit
Tension bearing
G082064
NOTE
• The banding is generated on the print whole area.
25830 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26610
Paper Advance Section
Paper Advance Section
Removing paper advance unit [35, 3. Slightly lift up the paper advance unit. Attach
the pin to the position shown in the figure not
35i] to touch the stopper and fix a screw.
Pin Screw
! Procedure
Pin Spacer
Pin Stopper
G084449
• The paper advance unit is regulated with the positioning
pin. No need for adjusting when attaching.
1. Hang the paper advance unit and attach it to When the new paper advance unit is attached
the pin.
1. Carry out Paper Advance Unit Correction.
2. Move the paper advance unit in the direction ☞ 36010
of the arrow.
26610 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26630
Paper Advance Section
! Procedure
G058399
Ground wire
G084411
26630 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26710
Laser engine unit
Laser engine unit
IMPORTANT
• If you replaced the laser unit, items shown below are necessary in returning the defective unit.
• There are different types of laser units. Refer to ☞ 61450 regarding how to distinguish those types.
Cover 1
G085809
26710 1/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26710
Laser engine unit
5. Disconnect the ground wire. (Four wires) (One screw for each)
When removing the PCB plate, disconnect the cables from the clamps.
J/P1515
J/P1663
J/P1532
J/P1637(G) J/P1526
Cable clamp
G085810
Light-tight cover 2
G085811
26710 2/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26710
Laser engine unit
10. Remove the laser unit. (Four fixing nuts and four washers)
11. When replacing the laser unit, remove lock holder (2) and attach lock holder (2) to a new laser unit. (two
screws)
26710 3/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26710
Laser engine unit
1. When removing lock holder (2) to replace the laser unit, attach lock holder (2) to the holes in the
direction of the arrows and tighten the two screws. (two screws)
If lock holder (2) is installed in a wrong direction, the laser unit cannot be installed properly in the printer.
2. Attach the light-tight cover by pushing it in the direction of the arrows. (two screws)
3. Install laser control box cooling fan 2 with the label facing in the direction of the arrows. (two screws)
Light-tight cover 2
G085815
26710 4/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26710
Laser engine unit
2. Adjust the position of the laser unit so that the positioning pins move up and down smoothly. (four nuts
and four washers)
Laser unit
Nuts and washers
G085814
26710 5/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26720
iBeam unit
iBeam unit
IMPORTANT
• If you replaced the iBeam unit, items shown below
are necessary in returning the defective unit.
G083178
26720 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26720
iBeam unit
8. Remove the iBeam unit. (two screws) ! How to adjust the iBeam unit position
J/P901
J/P900
G083180
Pin
G083181
26720 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26720
iBeam unit
26720 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26810
Zigzag adjustment
Zigzag adjustment
NOTE
1. Check the condition of the paper magazine. • For example, if the measurement values of the
second test print is 120 mm for both lines A and
☞ 22000 B
Check that the difference of dimension between
2. Adjust zigzagging for paper supply unit B. lines A and B on the first test print is within the
tolerance level in the following table.
☞ 25730
Test Print Tolerance range
NOTE
355.6 mm A−B is ±0.5 mm, both A and
• If difference between part A on the first test
B are between 119.5 mm and
print and the second test print is within 0.5 mm,
120.5 mm.
you do not have to adjust it.
610.0 mm A−C is ±1.0 mm, both A and
Example: If the first test print skews to the right C are between 119 mm or
more and 121 mm or less.
First test print 0.5 mm Second test print
Test print (first) Test print (second)
A
A
B
B
C
Line C
G078473
26810 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26810
Zigzag adjustment
G068463
NOTE
• After master correction of the exposure center
correction, carry out Exposure Center
Correction (for each Paper Magazine) again if
you are also using another paper magazine.
26810 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26910
Space dimension between units
Space dimension between units
Space dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance
unit [35]
The dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit differs between 35 and 35i.
• Normally, it is not necessary to adjust or check the space dimension between paper supply unit A and exposure advance unit.
However, if the space dimension between the units gets different, ☞ No. 6208 Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit. may
occur when printing with the paper advance length between 320.1 mm and 324.0 mm.
(Front view)
(2) 0 +0.5 mm
(1) 15.5±0.5 mm
G084415
26910 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26910
Space dimension between units
G084414
26910 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26910
Space dimension between units
! Adjusting the position between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit
3. Loosen the screw of the shim beneath the laser unit, and insert or remove the shim. (Loosen two screws
each.)
• To insert and remove shims (rear), remove the printer rear cover. ☞ 20020
Shim (rear)
Laser unit
Shim
G085893
26910 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26910
Space dimension between units
Shim
Thickness Part No. Name
0.1 mm A064878-01 Shim (1)
0.2 mm A064878-02 Shim (1)
0.5 mm A064880-01 Shim (2)
1.0 mm A064880-02 Shim (2)
4. Check if the laser unit positioning pin is in the position where it moves up and down smoothly.
If necessary, adjust the position of the laser unit. Refer to ☞ Procedure for adjusting the laser unit position.
Positioning pins
26910 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26920
Space dimension between units
Space dimension between paper supply unit A and exposure advance unit
[35i]
The dimension between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit differs between 35 and 35i.
26920 1/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26920
Space dimension between units
(Top view)
(Front view)
G082043
26920 2/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26920
Space dimension between units
(2) 0 +0.5 mm
(1) 15.5±0.5 mm
G082042
26920 3/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26920
Space dimension between units
! Procedure for adjusting position between paper supply unit A and exposure advance
unit [35i]
G084445
26920 4/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26920
Space dimension between units
Positioning pin
G084438
7. Loosen the screw of the shim installed in the iBeam unit mount (front), and insert or remove the shim.
(Loosen two screws each.)
Front
Shim
G082089
8. Loosen the screw of the shim installed in the iBeam unit mount (rear), and insert or remove the shim.
(Loosen two screws each.)
• To insert and remove shims (rear) in the iBeam unit, remove the printer rear cover. ☞ 20020
26920 5/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
26920
Space dimension between units
Rear
G082090
Shim
Thickness Part No. Name
0.1 mm A064878-01 Shim (1)
0.2 mm A064878-02 Shim (1)
0.5 mm A064880-01 Shim (2)
1.0 mm A064880-02 Shim (2)
9. Confirm if the positioning pin of the iBeam unit mount is in the position where it moves up and down
smoothly.
10. Check the length between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit again.
11. Check Turn Unit Stop Position Correction of Paper Advance Unit Correction.
Refer to ☞ 36010.
Positioning pin
Positioning pin
Nuts
Nuts
G084438
3. Check the length between paper supply unit A and the exposure advance unit again.
26920 6/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27100
Conveyor unit section
Conveyor unit section
G084450
Colorimeter
Calibration plate
FD for
calibration data
G083197
• When replacing the colorimeter, remember that the
colorimeter, the calibration plate, and the FD for Fan unit
calibration make a set. Replace them as one set. G083198
27100 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27100
Conveyor unit section
3. Remove the colorimeter unit top. 6. Remove the advance unit from the
(four screws) colorimeter unit bottom.
(four screws)
Colorimeter unit top
J/P801
J/P802, 804
Plate bottom
G083228
27100 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27100
Conveyor unit section
27100 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27100
Conveyor unit section
27100 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27110
Conveyor unit section
Adjusting the height of colorimeter 2. Loosen the lock screw on the leading end
control holder of the colorimeter. (one screw)
unit [35, 35i]
Leading end control holder
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the height adjustment securely if colorimeter of
the colorimeter unit is replaced.
! Procedure
Lock screw
G083226
G083230
27110 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27110
Conveyor unit section
G072364
IMPORTANT
• If the colorimeter leading end is out of back
face of the colorimeter mount, it may damage
the calibration plate or test prints.
27110 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27120
Conveyor unit section
Roller
G083245
27120 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27220
Dryer section
Dryer section
! Procedure
G084417
G084419
27220 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27220
Dryer section
G084418
1. Attach it by pushing the gear side of dryer rack to the stopper. (four screws)
Stopper
G084609
27220 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27220
Dryer section
2. Attach the dryer rack by pushing it in the arrow direction. (two screws)
Dryer rack
27220 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27222
Dryer section
• Usually, adjusting the dryer section slide base position is not necessary
• Check only when a strange sound is emitted or paper jams due to the failure in adjusting the position of dryer rack and processor
section.
! Procedure
G085804
4. Adjust the two stoppers so that the slide base opening and the position of upper turn guide No. 7 5.5 ±
0.5 mm wide. (Two adjusting screws for each)
5.5 ± 0.5 mm
G085785
27222 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27222
Dryer section
Stopper (rear)
The cushion between the stopper (rear) and slide base contact face is
shortened from 2 mm to 1 mm.
5.5 ± 0.5 mm
Stopper (near)
Slide base contact face
G085801
27222 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27222
Dryer section
Stopper Holder
1. Make some prints to check if no paper jam or abnormal noise occurs in the dryer rack.
27222 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27223
Dryer section
! Procedure
Same position
G084604
1. Make some prints to check if no paper jam or abnormal noise occurs in the dryer rack.
27223 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27224
Dryer section
• Normally, adjusting ejection guide 1 position for dryer rack is not necessary.
• Check paper exit guide 1 if the paper is jammed when it is sent to the colorimeter.
! Procedure
61.4 to 61.9 mm
1. Confirm that there is no paper jam by performing the daily setup test print etc. using the colorimeter.
27224 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27225
Dryer section
• Adjust the position of the upper turn guides when it was removed.
! Procedure
Roller
Roller
G085819
1. Confirm that there is no paper jam or flow after performing the test print.
27225 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27230
Dryer section
! Procedure
0.3 mm
1. Make some prints to check if no paper jam or abnormal noise occurs in the dryer rack.
27230 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27250
Dryer section
! Procedure
J/P718, J/P768
G084421
Heater cover
Dryer heater
G084422
27250 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27250
Dryer section
27250 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27420
Print sorter unit section
Print sorter unit section
! Procedure
J/P713
G084429
27420 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27430
Print sorter unit section
Replacing print receiving tray [35, 2. Press part C of receiving tray (3), and
remove receiving tray (2) in the direction
35i] indicated by the arrow.
! Procedure
27430 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27440
Print sorter unit section
! Procedure
G074557
27440 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27450
Print sorter unit section
! Procedure
Tension plate 2
G074558
G074639
27450 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27610
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
! Procedure
J/P399, J/P400
G084431
27610 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27620
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
! Procedure
Module
27620 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27630
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
Replacing the drum motor [J] 5. Replace the drive motor and reassemble the
parts.
NOTE
! Procedure • When attaching the gear (32T), adjust the
backlash by adjusting the attaching position of the
1. Remove the module. gear (32T). (three screws)
☞ 27620
2. Remove the gear (32T).
Gear (32T)
G050712
G052554
3. Remove the drive gear. (two screws) 6. Check the tablet sensor via Input Check.
☞ 35220
7. Check the drum operation via Output Check.
☞ 35320
Drive gear
Screws
G050713
Screw
Drum motor
Screws
G050732
27630 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27640
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
! Procedure
G085889
(1)
Wiring cover
G085849
6. Remove gear (12T) and motor mounting plate and replace the elevator motor.
! Adjustment after installing the elevator motor
27640 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27640
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
G050736
Gear (12T)
Upper idle gear
0.2 mm
Part A
27640 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27640
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
5. Attach the drum section by pushing it in the direction indicated by the arrow shown below. (four screws)
Drum section
27640 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27650
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
Bucket platforms
G050740
NOTE
• Remove the tablet replenishment unit to confirm
that the bucket platforms are parallel to the unit.
☞ 27610
6. Check the elevator operation via Output
Check.
☞ 35320
7. Reassemble the parts as they were.
G085843
500 mm position
G085886
27650 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27660
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
Adjusting the position of the upper sensor is closed at the Output Check.
(two screws)
elevator upper sensor [J]
! Procedure
Stopper IMPORTANT
G085846
• How to stop the elevator at the elevator upper
sensor position
4. Adjust the position of the elevator upper 1. Select Tablet replenishment section via
sensor so that the clearance between the
Output Check.
lowest bottom of bucket platform and tablet
2. When the elevator motor (UP) is selected and
gate is 1.5 mm±0.5 mm when stopping the
the key is kept pressed, the
elevator at the position where the elevator
elevator lifts up and stops at the position
where the elevator middle sensor is closed for
2 seconds.
3. By keeping pressing the key, the
elevator rises again and stops at the position
where the elevator upper sensor is closed.
4. If the key is released at this time,
the elevator stays at the position of the
elevator upper sensor.
5. Turn OFF the system power supply and
reassemble the parts.
6. Check if the tablet falls from the elevator via
Output Check.
☞ 35320
27660 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27670
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
Adjusting the position of the middle sensor is closed at the Output Check.
(two screws)
elevator middle sensor [J]
! Procedure
☞ 27610
2. Leave the tablet replenishment unit
Bucket platform
1.5±0.5 mm
Bucket
Bottom of the
bucket platform
G085845
Stopper
IMPORTANT
G085846 • How to stop the elevator at the elevator
4. Adjust the position of the elevator middle middle sensor position
sensor so that the clearance between the 1. Select Tablet replenishment section via
highest bottom of bucket platform and tablet Output Check.
gate is 1.5 mm±0.5 mm when stopping the 2. By selecting elevator motor (UP) and keeping
elevator at the position where the elevator pressing the key, the elevator
lifts up and stops at the position where the
elevator middle sensor is closed.
3. If the key is released at this time,
the elevator stays at the position of the
elevator middle sensor.
5. Reassemble the parts as they were.
6. Check if the tablet falls from the elevator via
Output Check.
☞ 35320
27670 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27680
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
Adjusting the position of the side of the hole in the frame is 0 to -2.0 mm.
(two screws)
elevator lower sensor [J]
Tablet replenishment unit rear side
Screws
G085847
27680 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27690
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
Cleaning method of the drum of 4. Remove the gear (64T). (one mount ring)
module [J] Mount ring
! Procedure
Gear (64T)
G050747
Narrow
G050745
Wide
Drum case
G050748
G050746
27690 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27690
Tablet replenisher section [35, 35i]
Gaps
IMPORTANT
• There is a spring in the gap of vapor proof
block. Be careful not to damage it when
cleaning.
• After cleaning, check that there is no gap
when the vapor proof block is pushed in the
arrow direction.
Gap
Springs
Gap
G050750
27690 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27810
Replenishment package unit [35, 35i]
Replenishment package unit [35, 35i]
Replacing the replenisher pump and the rating plate will not be determined
properly.
the water supply pump [SM] IN
Caps
(Do not remove them.)
! Procedure
Tray units
1. Push. G050874
G050875
27810 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27810
Replenishment package unit [35, 35i]
27810 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27810
Replenishment package unit [35, 35i]
IMPORTANT
• Make sure that the difference between the
measured value and the output amount
entered in the machine is within ±3%. If the
difference is not within ±3%, check for
damage or clogging of the pipes. When there
is still no problem relating to those items, air
must be remained in the pumps. Exhaust air,
and measure output amount securely again.
• When the output amount for each
replenishment package is measured, the
remaining amount of each solution varies.
3. Replace the replenisher pipe and the water
supply pipe to their original position.
4. Mark the label with a new pump output
amount.
(The label is affixed to the inside of processor door 1.)
5. Attach the sub-tank top cover and processor
cover 1 as they were.
IMPORTANT
• Do not leave the air exhaust tool without cleaning
after use. Otherwise the syringe packing may be
damaged.
Be sure to clean the tool before storing.
27810 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27820
Replenishment package unit [35, 35i]
Replacing the probe [SM] 6. Remove the probe nut and the probe.
BF-B BF-A
! Procedure
Probe nut
Probe
O-ring
Probe holder
G050893
G050891
7. Assemble the new probe, then tighten the
probe nut securely using the probe replacing
4. Unplug the tray unit connectors. jig.
J/P601: Tray unit A
J/P600: Tray unit B IMPORTANT
• The O-ring is attached to the new probe.
5. Remove the tray units.
• The probe (including the O-ring) should be
2. Lift it up. used properly for each solution.
Tray unit B
For CD-C solution, use the whole black
probe and the O-ring marked with a white dot.
For other solutions, use the probe which the
resin part is brown and the O-ring marked
with a green dot.
• The probe replacing jig is a service tool. Refer
to Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
1. Press the lever.
8. Reassemble the parts as they were.
Tray unit A
G050892
27820 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27830
Replenishment package unit [35, 35i]
Adjusting the sensitivity of the 4. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O
PCB. (one screw)
replenisher solution sensor [SM]
Protection cover
! Procedure
G050894
Sensor arrangement
G050898
2. Attach the replenishment package containing 6. Adjust each VR depending on each LED
the replenishment solution. condition which is OFF.
1. If LED turns ON by turning clockwise less than
3. Set the valve chuck, then turn the handle to twice from the left most position, carry out the
ON position.
operation of ☞ If LED turns on by rotating less
than twice.
2. Carry out ☞ If LED turns on by rotating more
than twice, if LED turns ON by turning clockwise
more than twice from the left most position.
27830 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27830
Replenishment package unit [35, 35i]
Replenishment package
Replenishment
Probe
solution
Replenishment solution sensor
(LED)
G050897
27900
F replenishment unit [35, 35i]
F replenishment unit [35, 35i]
! Procedure
J/P632
F replenishment unit
J/P637
G085856
27900 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27900
F replenishment unit [35, 35i]
6. When removing the F replenishment unit, pull out the upper surface of the F replenishment unit in the
direction of the arrow.
F replenishment unit
27900 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27910
F replenishment unit [35, 35i]
• Remove the cartridge installation section when replacing or checking the replenishment cartridge opening motor, replenishment
cartridge position sensor (upper) or replenishment cartridge position sensor (lower).
! Procedure
G085882
1. Set the cam into the square hole in the cartridge installation section to attach it.
Cam
Square hole
G085883
2. Confirm that the F replenishment unit works normally using the Output check.
27910 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27920
F replenishment unit [35, 35i]
! Procedure
G085858
4. Remove the plate (three screws) on the replenishment cartridge opening motor and gear (one screw).
Plate
Gear
G085859
27920 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27920
F replenishment unit [35, 35i]
1. Install the gear of the replenishment cartridge opening motor so that the gap between the outer surface
of the gear and the edge of the motor axis is 3 mm. (one screw)
Plate
Gear
G085881
2. Install the replenishment cartridge opening motor with the cam remaining at the upper start point. (three
screws)
• If the cam is not adjusted to the upper start point during the replenishment cartridge opening motor, the F replenishment unit may not
be correctly attached to the product.
G085880
3. After placing the cartridge installation section and the F replenishment unit to the original positions,
confirm that the F replenishment unit works normally using the Output Check.
27920 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27930
F replenishment unit [35, 35i]
! Procedure
# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor # # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor
(1) (2)
HL−F−001
Rubber plug Flange section
G085895
1. Confirm that the replenishment solution level sensors are securely attached as shown below. (two set-
screws each)
P2RB
# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor P1R P2RA
35.9mm
47.3mm
47.4mm
63.7mm
G085894
27930 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27940
F replenishment unit [35, 35i]
Output Check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge
cleaning pump
• Perform the Output Check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge cleaning pump following the procedure with
attaching a hose. Or, water may come into a replenishment tank and it may adversely affect the replenishment solution.
! Procedure
Hose
Cleaning nozzle
G085904
5. By the Output Check, operate P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning
Pump, P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and P2RB
Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump, which are to be checked.
• The replenishment cartridge cleaning pump stops after operating for 10 seconds.
6. Remove the hose. By the Output Check, move the replenishment cartridge setting part from lower point
to upper point.
27940 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
27940
F replenishment unit [35, 35i]
27940 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
3000
3. Mode
3 Mode
Monitor setup .....................................................................................................................................................32530
Data Initialization ..............................................................................................................................................32550
Processor Settings .............................................................................................................. 33001
Print Sensor Adjustment ....................................................................................................................................33001
Counter [J] .........................................................................................................................................................33010
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM] ...........................................................................................................33030
Pump Output Amount Setting[F] ......................................................................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ........................................................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] .....................................................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] ....................................................................................................................................33060
Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................. 33500
Thermosensor Calibration .................................................................................................................................33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] .................................................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] ..............................................................................................................33510
Basic Kit Setting [J] ...........................................................................................................................................33520
Kit Correction [J] ...............................................................................................................................................33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting [J] ...................................................................................................................33540
Pump Output Amount Setting [J] ......................................................................................................................33550
Operation Check [J] ...........................................................................................................................................33560
Manual Kit Change [J] ......................................................................................................................................33570
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM] [J] ..................................................................................................33580
Cleaning Water Amount Setting[F] ...................................................................................................................33580
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting[F] ..............................................................................................33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting .............................................................................................................33600
Display Processor Working Information[F] ......................................................................................................33620
Processor Set Up Mode[F] ................................................................................................................................33630
3000 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
3000
3 Mode
Reading and Writing Data .................................................................................................................................35400
System Version Check .......................................................................................................................................35500
System update for each control PCB (CPU) .....................................................................................................35600
Operation Information .......................................................................................................................................35700
Machine Specification .......................................................................................................................................35800
Self-diagnostic ...................................................................................................................................................35920
Media Drive Self-diagnostic ..............................................................................................................................35920
Printer Mechanical Adjustment ............................................................................................ 36000
Paper sensor adjustment ....................................................................................................................................36000
Paper Advance Unit Correction .........................................................................................................................36010
Exposure Magnification Correction [35] ...........................................................................................................36020
Exposure Position Adjustment [35] ...................................................................................................................36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment [35] .................................................................................................36040
Paper Advance Length Correction ....................................................................................................................36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction ...................................................................................................................36060
Exposure Center Correction ..............................................................................................................................36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment 1 ......................................................................................................................36080
Exposure Advance Adjustment 2 ......................................................................................................................36081
Paper pressure operation correction ..................................................................................................................36090
WB width correction .........................................................................................................................................36100
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment ....................................................................................... 36700
Compact Archive Unit Initialization .................................................................................................................36700
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ............................................................................................................36710
Laser Unit Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 37300
Laser Unit Adjustment [35] ...............................................................................................................................37300
Operation Information .......................................................................................................... 37500
Saving the Logdata ............................................................................................................................................37500
Saving the memory data ....................................................................................................................................37510
Saving the memory data and Logdata at the same time ....................................................................................37520
System Version Check on ARCNET communication error ..............................................................................37530
Machine Specification .......................................................................................................................................37540
3000 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
30500
Passwords
Passwords
Passwords
! Explanation
3. Mode
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed
on each display.
NOTE
• After password input display appears, input the password
within 10 seconds.
If the display disappears while you are entering the
password, start it over again.
IMPORTANT
• Do not eject the floppy disk while the LED of the
floppy disk drive is ON. (It may damage the floppy
disk drive or the floppy disk.)
30500 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
31000
Mode structure chart
Mode structure chart
• SP1: Input the service personnel password (2260) to select this mode.
• SP2: Data can be changed by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
! Order Display
Item Reference
Menu
Scanner Lamp ON/OFF*1
Processor Drive ON/OFF*1
Rewind Paper
Media Copy
3. Mode
Start Adobe Photoshop
Net Order Mode
Start Bravo Utility Refer to the Bravo Service
Manual.
Remote Control Start
Help Display
*1. For the Stand Alone Printer, this does not appear.
! Menu display
Item Reference
Close Down Checks
Pricing Sheet Reissue
Daily Totals*1
Daily Setup
Emulsion Number Change
AFC Cleaning*2
Cleaning the Focal Plane Regulating Guide
Extension ☞ Extension display
*1. If pricing unit is not registered as an option, selecting this item is not available.
*2. For the Stand Alone Printer, this does not appear.
! Extension display
Item Reference
Extension Setup ☞ Setup
Processor Settings ☞ Processor settings [N]
Operator Selections ☞ Operator Selections
IX Data Settings
Noritsu-eNET Setting (SP1) Refer to Noritsu-eNET
system program Setting
Manual.
Price Setting
Function and Option Registration
Password Registration
Maintenance ☞ Maintenance
31000 1/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
31000
Mode structure chart
! Setup
Item Reference
Laser Setup Paper Specification Registration/Setup ☞ 32510
(35) Magazine Registration/Setup ☞ 32520
iBeam Setup Paper Specification Registration/Setup ☞ 32510
(35i) F iBeam Tuning ☞ 32511
F iBeam Engine Check (SP1) ☞ 32512
Magazine Registration/Setup ☞ 32520
Paper Setup
Print Channel
Scanner Setup Refer to the Scanner
Service Manual.
3. Mode
Flatbed Scanner Setup
Master Data
Monitor Setup ☞ 32530
Data Initialization (SP1) ☞ 32550
Initial Setup (SP1)
Create Template
Item Reference
Print Sensor Adjustment ☞ 33001
Processing Solution Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting
Pump Output Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display (SP2) ☞ 33040
Dryer Temperature Setting
Processor Standard Setting (SP1) Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33580
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33600
31000 2/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
31000
Mode structure chart
3. Mode
Operation Check (SP1)
Manual Kit Change ☞ 33570
Cleaning Water Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33580
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting (SP1) ☞ 33600
! Operator Selections
Only the function modes which are exclusive to the service mode are explained. Refer to the User Manuals for other modes.
31000 3/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
31000
Mode structure chart
3. Mode
Operator Selections (Additional)
Item Details Normal setting
120 AFC Diffuser (SP1) The 120 AFC diffuser can be set to "Used" or "Not in use". Not in use
NOTE
• For details, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
! Maintenance
Item Reference
*2
Various Adjustment Film Carrier Unit Adjustment Refer to the Scanner
Service Manual.
Colorimeter Calibration
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 35100
Printer Mechanical Adjustment Paper Sensor Adjustment ☞ 36000
Paper Advance Unit Correction (SP1) *1 ☞ 36010
Exposure Magnification Correction (SP1) ☞ 36020
(35)
Exposure Position Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 36030
(35)
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment ☞ 36040
(SP1)
(35)
Paper Advance Length Correction (SP1) ☞ 36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction ☞ 36060
Exposure Center Correction ☞ 36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment 1 (SP1) ☞ 36080
Exposure Advance Adjustment 2 (SP1) ☞ 36081
Paper Pressure Operation Correction ☞ 36090
WB Width Correction ☞ 36100
Scanner Unit Adjustment (SP1) *2 Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment Refer to the Scanner
Light Source Registration Service Manual.
Focus Adjustment
Light Source Update
Scanner Sensitivity Check
Laser Unit Adjustment (SP2) ☞ 37300
(35)
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment Compact Archive Unit Initialization ☞ 36700
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ☞ 36710
31000 4/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
31000
Mode structure chart
Item Reference
Process Control Strip
Input Check Input Section*2 Refer to the Scanner
Service Manual.
Printer ☞ 35210
Processor ☞ 35220
Output Check Input Section*2 Refer to the Scanner
Service Manual.
Printer ☞ 35310
Processor ☞ 35320
Reading and Writing Data All Data ☞ 35400
Service Data (SP1)
System Version Check Accessories ☞ 35500
3. Mode
Profile Data (SP1)
DLL/Driver (SP1)
Software Upgrade Software Upgrade (CD-ROM) ☞ 35600
Software Upgrade (HD) (SP1)
Operation Information Error Record ☞ 35700
Laser Operation Record (SP1) (for 35)
iBeam Record Setting (SP1) (for 35i)
Machine Specification (SP2) ☞ 35800
Self-diagnostic (SP1) Image Path Check ☞ 35920
Media Drive Self-diagnostic
*1. For 3501 and 3501i, Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Left) and Arm unit 2 Test Operation (Right) on Functions of Paper Advance Unit
Correction are not displayed.
*2. For the Stand Alone Printer, this does not appear.
31000 5/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32510
Setup
Setup
3. Mode
S1028-00-SM00
! Explanation
Model Explanation
35 A paper type for setup is registered and setup is carried out.
35i A paper type for setup is registered, setup, iBeam Tuning, iBeam Engine Check and Forced Pre-Emission are
carried out.
127 (1) or the OK The magazine for which paper specification is registered
like
127 (1) or the − The magazine which is registered and for which paper specification is not registered
like
# # # (#) − The magazine which is not registered
32510 1/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32510
Setup
Model Explanation
35i • Carry out iBeam Tuning System Exposure Light Intensity Setting, Paper Gamma Setup, Black
Balance Adjustment, and Printer Profile Calibration for each paper type.
• Test prints are one sheet of 22-step setup print for setting the exposure light intensity , one sheet of 22-
step setup print for adjusting the paper gamma setup, two iBeam Tuning print, one sheet of 22-step setup
print for adjusting the black balance, and three sheets of test prints for the printer profile calibration.
IMPORTANT
• On the test print for black balance adjustment of 35i, unevenness appears. This does not
matter for Setup function.
NOTE
• The test prints for the paper gamma setup are printed 3 times at most.
System Exposure Light Intensity Setting/Paper gamma setup Black Balance Adjustment
3. Mode
1
32510 2/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32510
Setup
! Functions
• SP1: Input the service personnel password (2260) to select this mode.
NOTE
• There is no adjustment for outputting the printer profile.
• The printer profile need to be created for each paper type.
3. Mode
Calibrate the printer profile.
Make test prints for calibrating the printer profile and calibrate them with the colorimeter unit.
IMPORTANT
• If the profile data installed and recovery carried out, surely carry out Printer Profile Calibration. If not, the printer
profile data does not become valid.
Make two sheets of 22-step setup prints and one sheet of 20-step test print.
Profile Chart Output Printer Profile Calibration
9.5 mm
89mm
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89mm
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89mm
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89mm
9.5 mm
14.5
89mm
14.5
32510 3/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32510
Setup
! Print Check
When a problem occurs, sample images 1 to 7 are printed. Then, the machine can be checked using the sample prints.
3. Mode
Sample 4 The print contains three kind of gray colors.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display
this.
Sample 7
Sample 8
32510 4/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32510
Setup
3. Mode
Select the most appropriate color (black).
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.
32510 5/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32510
Setup
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.
3. Mode
32510 6/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32511
Setup
width.
Bringing up the display
• To print iBeam Tuning chart, the system uses two
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Setup → iBeam Setup → Paper
pieces of paper, placing them at positions that are 3.5
Specification Registration/Setup → Functions → iBeam Tuning
mm to the left and to the right from the normal
position. This is because the maximum paper width
is still shorter than the light emission section of the
iBeam unit.
• With the iBeam Tuning chart of 35i, you cannot
correct all the surfaces for the iBeam unit using
some pieces of 89 mm width paper while it is
possible with the QSS-29 series models.
iBeam unit
210.0 mm
3. Mode
3.5 mm 3.5 mm
S1251-13-SM00
203 mm
203 mm
! Functions
S1251-02-SM00
! Explanation
! iBeam Tuning
• If the print quality does not become same as that enclosed
at the system shipment even by performing iBeam
Tuning, perform iBeam Tuning from Paper Specification
Registration/Setup. The print quality returns to the same
level as that enclosed at the system shipment.
Specification of iBeam Tuning S1251-14-SM00
Setup Times of iBeam Tuning • iBeam Tuning Data Backup History
Latest five iBeam Tuning data are recorded.
Daily Setup OK appears after one iBeam
This data is always updated.
Tuning operation.
Select the desired data to restore the settings.
Paper Specification OK appears after three iBeam
Registration/Setup Tuning operations.
Initial Setup Then iBeam Tuning can be
performed repeatedly.
32511 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32511
Setup
IMPORTANT
• Before starting the iBeam Tuning, clean the flatbed
scanner glass if it is soiled.
3. Mode
S1251-05-SM01
32511 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32511
Setup
3. Mode
If it is out of the tolerance level
• Repeat iBeam Tuning again.
32511 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32512
Setup
iBeam Engine Check [35i] 3. the test print measurement display appears.
3. Mode
S1251-05-SM00
Flatbed scanner
! iBeam Engine Check
• Diagnosis available for the iBeam Unit if dispersion or Arrow
unevenness of light intensity occurred at the iBeam unit.
IMPORTANT
• iBeam Engine Check is a mode to diagnose the
iBeam unit by measuring iBeam Tuning chart
using the flatbed scanner.
If iBeam Tuning chart has any problem due to
deteriorated processing solution, soiled iBeam
unit or Exposure advance unit, or failed
adjustment in iBeam setup, it is impossible to
diagnose the iBeam unit correctly.
Test prints
! Adjustment Glass surface
G082692
NOTE
1. Select the paper type to be used at iBeam
• It does not matter which one of the two prints is
Engine Check.
placed on the left and which one on the right.
2. Press the YES key. • Be careful so that the test prints do not overlap.
NOTE 5. Press the YES:> Next key.
• The system automatically makes test prints.
NOTE
• iBeam Engine Check test print may have lines or
• Start the measurement of test print.
lack uniformity.
32512 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32512
Setup
3. Mode
S1252-00-SM00
32512 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32520
Setup
Magazine Registration/Setup The test print is one sheet of gray 22-step setup print.
3. Mode
G068485
IMPORTANT
• To carry out Magazine Registration/Setup, Paper
Specification Registration/Setup of the paper
type needs to be completed.
NOTE
• The test prints are printed 3 times at most.
! Functions
S1035-00-SM00
! Paper Specification Registration/Setup
! Explanation Paper Specification Registration/Setup is linked, and Paper
Specification Registration/Setup can be carried out.
The paper magazine to be used is registered and the paper ☞ 32510
gamma setup is carried out.
NOTE
• For 35i, Paper width: 82.5 to 203 mm
You can resister and setup the paper magazine for each paper
type to be used. Also setup status can be checked.
32520 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32530
Setup
Carry out the following adjustment using the hard key (button)
Bringing up the display of the display monitor.
Menu → Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup
1. Make setting for color temperature according
to the value displayed on the monitor.
2. Maximize the contrast.
3. Adjust the brightness so that the difference
of the density between the BGR digital
values 0, 0, 0 and 10, 10, 10 can be barely
recognized.
3. Mode
Carry out the following adjustment using the hard key (button)
of the display monitor.
1. Make setting for color temperature according
to the value displayed on the monitor.
S1030-00-SM00
2. Adjust the brightness so that the difference
of the density between the BGR digital
! Explanation values 0, 0, 0 and 10, 10, 10 can be barely
recognized.
The mechanical basics of display monitor can be adjusted.
NOTE
Also display monitor color can be adjusted to the print color
according to the operating environment of the system. • For monitor setup procedure for LCD monitor, refer to
Option Manual → LCD monitor unit → Setup
IMPORTANT Manual.
• Before carrying out the monitor setup, check if the
color can be recognized at your working place. If ! Monitor Setup (CRT monitor)
necessary, change the environment of the working
place. 1. Make a test print.
NOTE
! Brightness Adjustment (CRT monitor, LCD
• When Only Color Adjustment Pattern is
monitor)
selected, one test print for adjustment is made.
Carry out the basic adjustment using the hard key (button) of When All is selected, seven prints including a test
the display monitor. print for adjustment are made.
IMPORTANT 2. According to the instructions on the display,
• The brightness adjustment is required according to adjust the monitor color so that the sample
the operating environment.
Brightness adjustment
Monitor setup
32530 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32530
Setup
3. Mode
Color pallet
S1241-02-SM00
Color pallet
Compare the sample image on the display with the test
print. You can adjust the monitor color by selecting the
color pallet using the mouse.
Image selection section
Compare the sample image on the display with the test
print. You can adjust the monitor color by selecting the
sample image.
REPT: Data Initialization
The monitor calibration data is initialized.
N: Check
Images which is adjusted and not adjusted are
displayed.
ORDER: Save profile
The monitor profile data that matches the setting is
made and overwritten the data.
32530 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32550
Setup
Data Initialization
3. Mode
! Explanation
The data which is saved in the PC can be initialized.
IMPORTANT
• Before initializing the data, backup the data (data writing).
If the data has been initialized by mistake, the data can be restored to the original by reading out the backup floppy
disk data or the backup media. However, be sure to update the light source when reading out data from the floppy
disk.
☞ 35400
• If there is a backup data of the service personal level, each data can be written individually.
• In case of the backup data of the user level, each data cannot be written individually.
• For all data, the following data are all initialized.
Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks
Main BkData0100 Machine Specification
Option Registration
Password Registration
Error Record
BkData0120 Print Channel Setting
Operator Selections
IX Data Settings
ShortCutKey.ini Shortcut Key Setting
BkData0125 Print Menu Setting
BkData0200 Master Data
Paper Temperature Correction
Key Difference Ratio Setting
Each Setup History
BkData0205 Laser Setup (35)
BkData0205 iBeam Setup*1 (35i)
BkData1400 NMC Setting
BkData1700 Each Slope Correction
32550 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32550
Setup
3. Mode
iBeam Tuning Data Unf.Izh iBeam Tuning Data
Correction data for brightness roi_SHD.bin Correction data for brightness of the (35)
of the Edge of Image Field Edge of Image Field
Scanner Bk0300_SCN Area Registration*1 (S-4)
Light Axis Adjustment*1
Light Source Registration*1
Focus Adjustment*1
Parameter (negative)*1
BkData2900 Scanner data*1
Misreg135_1 Erasing Scratch data*1 (S-4)
Misreg135_2
Misreg135_4*2
Misreg135_6
Misreg240_1
Misreg240_4
Misreg240_5*2
Misreg240_7
Misreg240_8
Misreg110_1
Misreg110_9
Misreg110_11
Misreg2B_1
MisregMMC_3
MisregMMC_5*2
MisregMMC_7
MisregMMC_8
MisregAMC_3
MisregAMC_5*2
MisregAMC_7
MisregAMC_8
MisregCROP_1.Izh
MisregMFC_1.Izh
MisregMFC_2.Izh
MisregMFC_4.Izh
MisregMFC_6.Izh
MisregMFC_7.Izh
MisregMFC_8.Izh
MisregMFC_9.Izh
32550 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
32550
Setup
3. Mode
Laser Operation Record (35)
iBeam Record Setting (35i)
32550 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33001
Processor Settings
Processor Settings
Print Sensor Adjustment 2. Carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment.
NOTE
Bringing up the display
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor is not
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Print Sensor
displayed if the service personnel password has
Adjustment
not been input.
• After Print Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment is completed normally, OK is
displayed.
OK: When the LED light intensity of each sensor
is from 1 to 254
• After Print Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment is not completed normally, − is
displayed.
−: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is
3. Mode
0 or 255 or more
• When LED light intensity value of each sensor is
255 and Print Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment is finished normally, the message
☞ No. 0520 Sensors may be dirty. occurs.
S4015-00-00
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor can be checked
and set by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
! Explanation
! Functions
! Adjustment
33001 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33010
Processor Settings
3. Mode
! Kit Remains
S4102-01-SM00
NOTE
• It can be configured by entering the service personnel
password (2260).
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display
.
A B C D E F G H
! Explanation
33010 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33010
Processor Settings
3. Mode
33010 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33030
Processor Settings
! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting
For [N] specification display For [SM] specification display
3. Mode
! Explanation
! F: Functions
• SP1: Input the service personnel password (2260) to select this mode.
33030 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33030
Processor Settings
! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting
3. Mode
S4502-00-SM00
! Explanation
! F: Functions
! Manual Open
There are two functions in Manual Open: creating replenishment solution and resetting the remaining amount of the replenishment
solution.
• When restarting the process without draining the replenishment solution from P1R/P2RA/P2RB after taking countermeasures
against replenisher section errors: ☞ No. 0912[F] occurs if adding water to the replenishment tank and performing manual opening
with turning on all the (upper) and (lower) replenishment solution level sensors (ON: the state of solution filled).
At this time, the remaining amount of replenishment solution is reset.
• ☞ No. 0913[F] occurs if performing Manual Open with # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor on (EXCEPT FOR the
case that all the (upper) and (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB are on, which is the state of solution
filled).
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Create Replenishment Solution
(Manual Open).
33030 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33030
Processor Settings
• Exhausting the air from PSR replenisher pump is performed when exhausting the air at Auto Cleaning.
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Initial Replenisher Operation
(Replenisher Pump).
3. Mode
33030 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33040
Processor Settings
! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Total Replenishment Amount Display
3. Mode
S4004-00-SM00
! Explanation
• SP1: Input the service personnel password (2260) to select this mode.
! Clear (SP1)
Clear the value which is accumulated.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display the clear button.
33040 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33040
Processor Settings
! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Total Replenishment Amount Display
3. Mode
S4203-01-SM00
! Explanation
! Remaining (Initial value: Package Capacity) (Input range: 0.00 to Package Capacity)
When the prints have been processed, the amount discharged from the replenisher pump is subtracted from the remaining amount.
When replacing the package before the replenishment package gets completely empty, it returns to the initial value. (Initial value:
Package Capacity)
! Package Capacity
The package capacity which has been set in the Package Capacity Setting via Functions is displayed.
! Functions
• SP1: Input the service personnel password (2260) to select this mode.
• SP3: Input the service personnel password (2260) to display this.
# Replenishment Alarm Value (Initial value: -5%) (Input range: -50 to +50%)
When the percentage of the replenishment remaining amount (internal calculated value) to the replenishment
package capacity became smaller than the Replenishment Alarm Value, 5708-5709 Replenishment Package
solution remaining error. occurs.
☞ No. 5708[SM]
33040 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33040
Processor Settings
# SM Forced Replenishment Amount Setting (Initial value: Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to
999.9 mL)
SM Forced Replenishment Setting SM Forced Replenishment Setting (time
(standard processing) reduction processing)
CD-A 42.42 ####
CD-B 42.42 ####
CD-C 60.6 ####
BF-A 41.7 ####
BF-B 60.5 ####
STB 30.0 ####
3. Mode
When the forced replenishment amount reaches this value, each replenishment pump stops.
IMPORTANT
• Do not change it to any other value than the initial value of the forced replenishment amount.
# Revolution Count
The number of pump revolution when each pump operates replenishment with the value input in Forced
Replenishment Amount Setting is displayed.
33040 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33060
Processor Settings
3. Mode
S4205-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Correction Setting
The amount of replenish and water supply can be increased
depending on the paper process amount.
33060 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33500
Processor Standard Setting
Processor Standard Setting
Thermosensor Calibration
3. Mode
S3005-00-SM00
! Explanation
NOTE
• It can be configured by entering the service personnel
password (2260).
! Correction Value
After entering the measured temperature, the correction value,
subtracting the displayed temperature from the measured
temperature, will be automatically entered.
! Displayed Temperature
The processing solution temperature measured by the
thermosensor is displayed.
33500 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33510
Processor Standard Setting
! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting
3. Mode
S4008-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Process Specification
The process specification which has been registered in the machine specification is displayed.
☞ 35800
NOTE
• Refilling Water Amount Setting does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option
Registration. (Selecting as option is available only for 35i.)
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value: Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to 999.9 ml)
Refilling Water Amount Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 Refilling Water Amount Setting 2
Setting 1 (standard processing) (time reduction processing)
CD-W 140.0 81.0 81.0
BF-W 173.0 47.0 47.0
STB1-W 230.0 41.0 53.4
STB2-W 78.0 47.0 59.4
STB3-W 76.0 44.0 56.4
STB4-W 150.0 72.0 67.4
The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling water pump is set.
33510 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33510
Processor Standard Setting
! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting
3. Mode
S4204-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Process Specification
The process specification which has been registered in the machine specification is displayed.
☞ 35800
NOTE
• Refilling Water Amount Setting does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option
Registration. (Selecting as option is available only for 35i.)
! Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value: Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to 999.9 ml)
Refilling Water Amount Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (time
Setting 1 (standard processing) reduction processing)
Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low
Humidity) Humidity)
Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low
Processing Amount) Processing Amount)
CD 118.0 60.0 60.0
BF 160.0 26.0 26.0
STB1 122.0 41.0 53.4
STB2 76.0 47.0 59.4
STB3 62.0 44.0 56.4
STB4 142.0 51.0 46.0
The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling water pump is set.
33510 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33510
Processor Standard Setting
3. Mode
33510 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33520
Processor Standard Setting
3. Mode
S4105-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Kit Processing Amount Setting (initial value: 388.8) (input range: 0.1 to 999.9 m2)
The paper area that can be processed per kit can be set.
! Drop Limit Setting (initial value CD:4/BF:8/STB:8) (input range: 0 to the number of tablets in the
cartridge)
If the tablet kit is finished, Tablet Operation will be performed. (The rest of the tablets will be dropped at once.)
A limit value for the number of tablets that can be dropped at that time can be set.
If the number of the tablets exceeds the set value (drop limit setting), 609: The Tablet kit is empty. appears.
33520 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33530
Processor Standard Setting
3. Mode
S4106-00-SM00
! Explanation
33530 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33540
Processor Standard Setting
3. Mode
S4107-00-SM00
! Explanation
Magnification
No. Working Not working
0 0.0 1.0
1 0.6 0.6
2 1.0 1.0
3 1.4 1.4
4 Free setting Free setting
Magnific Condition
ation
0.0 No refilling water
0.6 Humid condition
1.0 Standard condition
1.4 Dry condition
33540 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33550
Processor Standard Setting
3. Mode
S4108-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Functions
33550 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33560
Processor Standard Setting
3. Mode
S4109-00-SM00
! Explanation
Operation Checks of Tablet Sensor 1 and 2 can be carried out.
! Functions
! Dropping Tablet
One dropping tablet operation is carried out for the selected
chemical.
Conditions of tablet sensor 1 and 2 in dropping tablet are
displayed.
IMPORTANT
• The number of the dropped tablet in Dropping
Tablet is not to be subtracted from the number of
remaining tablets.
! Home Operation
When Either tablet sensor 1 or 2 is close, Home Operation of
the drum can be carried out for the selected chemical.
IMPORTANT
• When carrying out Home Operation, be sure to
remove the cartridges.
33560 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33570
Processor Standard Setting
3. Mode
S4110-00-SM00
! Explanation
33570 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33580
Processor Standard Setting
3. Mode
S4508-00-00
! Explanation
Set the time when the drive motor starts operation after the
! Cleaning Water Amount OFF Setting (Initial
cleaning pump starts the output operation.
value: 15.00) (input range: 0.01 to 100.00
seconds)
! Drive Stop Setting (Initial value: 15.0) (input
range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds) Set the stop time of the replenishment cartridge cleaning
pump.
Set the time when the drive motor stops operation after the
cleaning pump finishes the output operation.
! Drive Start Setting (Initial value: 8.0) (input
range: 0.1 to 100.0 seconds)
Set the time from when the replenishment cartridge cleaning
pump starts discharging until the drive motor starts.
33580 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33580
Processor Standard Setting
3. Mode
33580 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33590
Processor Standard Setting
! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting
3. Mode
S4504-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200.0 ml)
Measure the output amount of Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount, P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge
Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump in Functions, and enter the measured values.
! Functions
33590 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33600
Processor Standard Setting
3. Mode
S4012-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Functions
33600 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33620
Processor Standard Setting
! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Display Processor Working Information
3. Mode
S4507-00-00
! Explanation
! Clear
Clear the value which is accumulated.
33620 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33630
Processor Standard Setting
! Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Processor Set Up Mode
3. Mode
S4509-00-SM00
! Explanation
• If air in the auto cleaning pump is not exhausted during installation, the auto cleaning pump may be damaged. Be sure to perform
Processor Set Up Mode in the above order.
S4509-00-SM01
• At the installation, you can exhaust the air remaining in the hose by operating PSR Replenisher Pump,P1 Auto Cleaning Valve
+ Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto
Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump for a specified time.
To cancel Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump), press NO: Cancel.
• If the air in the hose cannot be exhausted even though after performing Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Cartridge
Cleaning Pump), exhaust the air by operating the pump of hose that the air remains by Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output
Amount via F: Functions from Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting, or Pump Output Amount Measurement via F:
Functions from Pump Output Amount Setting.
S4509-00-SM02
• There are two functions in Manual Operation: creating replenishment solution and the resetting the remaining amount of the
replenishment solution.
33630 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
33630
Processor Standard Setting
S4509-00-SM03
• After operating P1R Replenisher Pump, P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB Replenisher Pump for a specified time, the air
remaining in the hose can be exhausted.
To cancel Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump), press NO: Cancel.
• If air does not escape from hoses after performing Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump), activate the appropriate
pumps and remove the air inside using Functions Pump Output Amount Measurement of Pump Output Amount Setting.
3. Mode
33630 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35100
Maintenance
Maintenance
3. Mode
S3088-00-SM00
! Functions
! Cleaning operation
Use the densitometer cleaning sheet and clean the colorimeter
unit advance roller. Test paper
G084423
35100 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35100
Maintenance
3. Mode
+1 (F10) −1 (F9)
1 2
First line
G084424
! Colorimeter cleaning
35100 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35210
Maintenance
! Input Check
Item Reference
Paper Supply Unit Paper Magazine Code ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Magazine Code)
Paper Supply ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply)
Exposure Advance Unit ☞ Exposure Advance Unit
Engine Section ☞ Engine Section (35)
☞ Engine Section (35i)
☞ Paper Advance Section (Paper advance unit)
3. Mode
Paper Advance Section
! Explanation
A buzzer will sound if sensors, limit switches or other devices at the cursor position turn DARK or ON.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be displayed on the input check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Magazine Code)
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A1 DARK When the pin is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A2 DARK When the pin is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A3 DARK When the pin is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A4 DARK When the pin is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A5 DARK When the pin is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A6 DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A7 DARK When the pin is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B1 DARK When the pin is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B2 DARK When the pin is detected.
10 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B3 DARK When the pin is detected.
11 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B4 DARK When the pin is detected.
12 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B5 DARK When the pin is detected.
13 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B6 DARK When the pin is detected.
14 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B7 DARK When the pin is detected.
15 ### Attached Paper Magazine A Displays the attached paper magazine.
16 ### Attached Paper Magazine B Displays the attached paper magazine.
35210 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35210
Maintenance
3. Mode
3 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Advance Pressure Change Sensor 2 DARK Pressure roller 2 and 3 are being pressed
moving from the status in which paper
pressure is released.
4 DARK/LIGHT Exposure End Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
5 ##.#°C Inner Temperature Displays the inner temperature of printer.
35210 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35210
Maintenance
Display Status
8 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF The combination of ON/OFF identifies the
9 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF laser unit type.
Refer to ☞ Engine Section (35) for
10 ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF
details.
11 ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF
*1
12 ON/OFF G Laser Ready Status (SP1) ON When the G/B-SHG laser is normal (ready
13 ON/OFF B Laser Ready Status (SP1) *2 ON for printing)
*1. Auto Tuning: is displayed for the laser unit (Type EeR).
*2. Auto Tuning: is displayed for the laser unit (Type Ff), (Type FfR) and (Type EeR).
3. Mode
NOTE
• In QSS, temperature of iBeam Unit Thermosensor does not control.
Paper Advance Section (Paper advance unit)
Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor DARK When the pressure is applied on the paper.
2 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Sensor*1 DARK When the arm is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Arm Sensor DARK When the arm is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Turn Sensor DARK When the turn unit is in the paper transfer
position.
*1. Lane Select Sensor is not available for 3501 and 3501i.
35210 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35220
Maintenance
! Input Check
Item Specification Reference
3. Mode
Processor Section N specification ☞ Processor Section (for each specification)
SM specification ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2)
J specification ☞ Processor Section ☞ Tablet Replenishment Section
F specification ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2)
Dryer Section Common to all ☞ Dryer Section (common to all specifications)
Order Classification Section specifications ☞ Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)
Colorimeter Unit ☞ Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)
Tablet Replenishment Section J specification ☞ Tablet Replenishment Section
! Explanation
A buzzer will sound if sensors, limit switches or other devices at the cursor position turn DARK or ON.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be displayed on the input check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.
Processor Section (for each specification)
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
2 ON/OFF CD Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is run
3 ON/OFF BF Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF out.
4 ON/OFF STB Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF
5 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level*4 OFF When the solution level is too low.
6 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level*4 OFF
7 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level*4 OFF
*4
8 ON/OFF STB 2 Refilling Water Level OFF
9 ON/OFF STB 3 Refilling Water Level*4 OFF
10 ON/OFF STB 4 Refilling Water Level*4 OFF
11 ON/OFF Refilling Water Tank Level Sensor*4 OFF
12 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON When the solution safety thermostat
operates normally
13 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the rack stopper is fixed, when
the processor top cover is closed
14 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
*3
15 ON/OFF BF + STB Effluent Float Switch ON
16 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of the processor relay
PCB is connected ☞ 66220
17 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
19 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
35220 1/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35220
Maintenance
3. Mode
off.
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Dryer Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
3 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Left) (3502) DARK When the paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Right) (3502) DARK
Print Sensor (3501, 3501i)
5 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Home Sensor DARK Home position: when placing at the
position to feed paper to the print conveyor
*1. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the print sorter unit.
35220 2/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35220
Maintenance
Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F]
3. Mode
3 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level OFF
4 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level*4 OFF
5 ON/OFF STB 2 Refilling Water Level*4 OFF
6 ON/OFF STB 3 Refilling Water Level*4 OFF
7 ON/OFF STB 4 Refilling Water Level*4 OFF
8 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON Normal
9 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
10 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
11 ON/OFF BF + STB Effluent Float Switch*3 ON
12 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of the processor relay
PCB is connected ☞ 66220
13 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
14 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
15 #.## CD Flow Amount Displays the CD circulation amount.*2
16 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count
35220 3/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35220
Maintenance
3. Mode
35220 4/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35220
Maintenance
Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F]
Processor Section
No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
2 ON/OFF SW Tank Level Sensor OFF
3. Mode
3 ON/OFF SW/DW Tank Level Sensor OFF
4 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level OFF
5 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON Normal
6 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
7 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
*3
8 ON/OFF BF + STB Effluent Float Switch ON
9 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of the processor relay
PCB is connected ☞ 66220
10 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
11 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
12 #.## CD Flow Amount Displays the CD circulation amount.*2
13 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count
35220 5/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35220
Maintenance
Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J]
3. Mode
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
3 ON/OFF P1 Processable Solution Level OFF ☞ No. 5916[F]occurs.*3
4 ON/OFF P2 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 5917[F]occurs.*3
5 ON/OFF PS1 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 5918[F]occurs.*3
6 ON/OFF PS2 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 5919[F]occurs.*3
7 ON/OFF PS3 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 5920[F]occurs.*3
8 ON/OFF PS4 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 5921[F]occurs.*3
9 ON/OFF P1 Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
10 ON/OFF P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch ON
11 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of the processor relay
PCB is connected ☞ 66220
12 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
13 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
14 #.## CD Flow Amount Displays the CD circulation amount.*2
15 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count
35220 6/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35220
Maintenance
3. Mode
35220 7/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35310
Maintenance
! Output Check
Item Reference
Paper Supply Unit Paper Supply Unit 1 ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 1)
Paper Supply Unit 2 ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 2)
Exposure Advance Unit ☞ Exposure Advance Unit
Engine Section ☞ Engine Section (35)
☞ Engine Section (35i)
☞ Paper Advance Section
3. Mode
Paper Advance Section
! Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 1)
No. Display Operation
1 Paper Advance Motor 1 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Paper Supply Motor A Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 Paper Supply Motor B Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Cut Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
5 Roller Move Motor Press the YES/START key to move the printer repeatedly to
(Displayed only with 35i) front and rear.
35310 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35310
Maintenance
3. Mode
Display Status
Synchronous/Asy Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchron When the polygon mirror rotates properly and is
nchronous ous stable
• When entering the output check
• When turning ON the polygon mirror
Asynchro When the polygon mirror does not rotate
nous properly
• When turning OFF the polygon mirror
Synchronous/Asy Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchron When either of R/G/B laser is emitting
nchronous ous • When the polygon mirror is synchronous
and either of R/G/B laser output is turned
ON
Asynchro When all the R/G/B lasers are not emitting
nous • When entering the output check
• When the polygon mirror is asynchronous
• When the R/G/B laser output are all OFF
This part checks the output condition of each R/G/B laser.
Since the Synchronous Check cannot be carried out in the same condition as the usual printing operation even if
all the R/G/B lasers light, a problem may occur in the usual operation with no trouble at the Output Check.
OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G/B laser drivers are normal.
B Laser Light Source Status No Good The laser unit is deteriorated.
The G/B laser driver is not connected properly,
or is damaged.
##.#°C Displays the temperature of the R laser.
##.#°C Laser Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the laser unit.
##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7 When Laser Synchronous Sensor of Output
Check is Synchronous
- When Laser Synchronous Sensor of Output
Check is Synchronous
ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF The combination of ON/OFF identifies the laser
ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF unit type.
Refer to the list below for details.
ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF
ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF
*1 ON When the G/B-SHG laser is normal (ready for
ON/OFF G Laser Ready Status (SP1)
ON/OFF B Laser Ready Status (SP1) *2 ON printing)
*1. Auto Tuning: is displayed for the laser unit (Type EeR).
*2. Auto Tuning: is displayed for the laser unit (Type Ff), (Type FfR) and (Type EeR).
35310 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35310
Maintenance
Laser unit (Type ###) G laser differentiation signal B laser differentiation signal
1 2 1 2
Type Ff, Type FfR ON OFF OFF OFF
Type EeR ON OFF ON OFF
Type BbR OFF OFF OFF OFF
3. Mode
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the B iBeam output.
NOTE
• You can confirm the each R, G and B emission condition of iBeam with the printer door open.
Paper Advance Section
No. Display Operation
1 Paper Advance Motor 3 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Paper advance pressure change motor Press the YES/START key to repeat pressure/release.
3 Lane select motor *1 Press the YES/START key to switch among the selection
sensor position -> left selection position -> selection position
center -> right selection position.
4 Paper advance arm motor Press the YES/START key to operate up/down repeatedly.
5 Turn motor Press the YES/START key to switch between the paper
receiving position and the standby position.
35310 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35320
Maintenance
! Output Check
Item Specification Reference
3. Mode
Processor Section N specification ☞ Processor Section (1) (for each ☞ Processor Section (2) (for each
specification) specification)
SM specification ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2)
J specification ☞ Processor Section ☞ Tablet Replenishment Section
F specification ☞ Processor Section (1) ☞ Processor Section (2) *7
Dryer Section Common to all ☞ Dryer Section (common to all specifications)
Order Classification Section specifications ☞ Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)
Colorimeter Unit ☞ Colorimeter Unit (common to all specifications)
Tablet Replenishment Section J specification ☞ Tablet Replenishment Section
! Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.
Processor Section (1) (for each specification)
No. Display Operation
1 Drive Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
2 CD Heater stop.
3 BF Heater
4 STB Heater
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
8 CD Replenisher Pump
9 BF Replenisher Pump
10 STB Replenisher Pump
11 Tank Cooling Fan
12 Cleaning Pump*1
13 Exhaust Fan
14 Processor Condition Lamp (Green)*2 Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
15 Processor Condition Lamp (Red)*2 key to turn off.
*1. This does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option Registration. (Selecting as option is
available only for 35i.)
*2. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the print sorter unit.
35320 1/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35320
Maintenance
*1. This does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option Registration. (Selecting as option is
available only for 35i.)
3. Mode
1 Dryer Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
2 Dryer Heater 1 stop.
3 Dryer Heater 2
4 Dryer Heater 3
5 Dryer Lane Select Motor Press the YES/START key to stop at the position to feed
paper to the colorimeter -> Repeats stopping at the position to
feed paper to the conveyor unit
*1. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the print sorter unit.
35320 2/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35320
Maintenance
For the specifications other than [N] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [N] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.
Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F]
3. Mode
4 STB Heater
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
8 Tank Cooling Fan
9 STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump*1
10 STB 2-W Refilling Water Pump*1
11 STB 3-W Refilling Water Pump*1
12 Cleaning Pump*1
13 Exhaust Fan
14 Processor Condition Lamp (Green)*2 Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
15 Processor Condition Lamp (Red)*2 key to turn off.
*1. This does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option Registration. (Selecting as option is available
only for 35i.)
*2. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the print sorter unit.
35320 3/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35320
Maintenance
For the specifications other than [N] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [N] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.
Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F]
Processor Section
No. Display Operation
1 Drive Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
2 CD Heater stop.
3 BF Heater
3. Mode
4 STB Heater
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
8 Tank Cooling Fan
9 CD Water Supply Pump
10 S -> B Replenishment Pump
11 STB Water Supply Pump
12 Cleaning Pump*1
13 Exhaust Fan
14 Processor Condition Lamp (Green)*2 Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
15 Processor Condition Lamp (Red)*2 key to turn off.
*1. This does not appear without checking Auto Cleaning/Refilling Water from Function and Option Registration. (Selecting as option is available
only for 35i.)
*2. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the print sorter unit.
35320 4/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35320
Maintenance
For the specifications other than [N] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [N] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.
Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [SM] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J]
3. Mode
4 PS Heater
5 P1 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
6 P2 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
7 PS Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
8 Tank Cooling Fan
9 Exhaust Fan
10 Processor Condition Lamp (Green)*1 Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
11 Processor Condition Lamp (Red)*1 key to turn off.
*1. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the print sorter unit.
35320 5/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35320
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• If P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump is operated, the initial
3. Mode
value is used for the next opening.
10 P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge YES/START operates each automated flushing valve and
Cleaning Pump auto cleaning pump. *2*5
11 P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge • Follow the steps 1-4 below.
Cleaning Pump • 1. Turn ON the auto cleaning pump.
12 PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge • 2. Wait for water pressure to be adjusted for one second.
Cleaning Pump
• 3. Open each automated flushing valve (maximum three
seconds).
• 4. Close each automated flushing valve. → Turn OFF
the cleaning pump.
*1. If one of the waste solution float switches is ON, the replenishment pump does not work.
*2. If one of the waste solution float switches is ON, each automated flushing valve does not work.
However, auto cleaning pump works regardless of the waste solution float switch. If the operation continues when either of waste solution float
switches is ON, the auto cleaning pump may be damaged.
*3. Press the YES/START key to display Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Operate the
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor, prepare the cleaning water does not run into the replenishment tank from the nozzle to check. For
details, refer to the manual. Would you like to operate the Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump?.
*4. Press the YES/START key to display Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Cleaning water will
be run into the replenishing tank. Please refrain from draining for a long time. For details, refer to the manual. Would you like to operate the
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump?.
*5. Press the YES/START key to display Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Cleaning water will
be run into the replenishing tank. Please refrain from draining for a long time. For details, refer to the manual. Would you like to operate the
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump?.
*6. If the cleaning water gets into a tank, the amount of replenishment solution changes. Insert a hose into a cleaning nozzle and execute Output Check
without allowing any water to get in the tank.
When you insert a hose into the cleaning nozzle, we recommend you to operate Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor and move the replenishment
cartridge installation section to the lower position.
For details, refer to ☞ 27940.
*7. SP1: Input the service personnel password (2260) to select this mode.
35320 6/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35400
Maintenance
3. Mode
S3075-00-SM00
! Explanation
! 1. Writing Data (CPU → Floppy Disk), Reading Data (Floppy Disk → CPU)
The data can be read or written individually when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
Data can be saved via the close down checks. (User level)
When carrying out Reading Data/Writing Data via Service Data, four floppy disks are required to save the data for each printer,
processor, and scanner section.
NOTE
• The FDs shown below are required.
Details
Back Up DATA • When performing Writing Data with the user level, the data is written individually same as performing
it with the service level.
• When performing Writing Data via Service Data, the data are written separately to INITIAL DATA1
FD, INITIAL DATA2 FD, INITIAL DATA3 FD and INITIAL DATA4 FD.
• When the Reading Data is carried out via Service Data, User Setting Data appears. The Operator
Selections, IX Data Settings (except serial number) and Print Channel Setting (except image data) are
read after reading the User Setting Data. This function is very useful when creating a print channel
using the data of other system.
It is possible to read User Setting data from the INITIAL DATA1 or Back Up DATA that is saved in
the user level.
• When the Reading Data is carried out in the user level, the data cannot be read individually. All the data
is read from a floppy disk.
• Be sure to update the light source when having performed Reading Data from the floppy disk written
the data of Back Up DATA of user level or Back Up DATA of service personnel level.
☞ 7. Scanner data (Dctrl.lzh)
Details
INITIAL DATA1 Writes the data of Main, Image Processing and Pricing Unit.
INITIAL DATA2 Writes the data of Printer, Colorimeter unit, LASER (for 35), iBeam (for 35i) and Correction data for
brightness of the Edge of Image Field.
INITIAL DATA3 Writes the data of Processor.
INITIAL DATA4 *1 Writes the data of Scanner, Auto Film Carrier and Connection Unit.
*1. The default setting of the INITIAL DATA4 does not include the connection unit adjustment data.
35400 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35400
Maintenance
NOTE
• For the Stand Alone Printer, there is no INITIAL DATA4 FD.
Back Up DATA FD
Item File name Remarks
Main (*1) Main.lzh
Pricing Unit (*1) Pu.lzh
Printer (*2) Printer.lzh
Colorimeter unit (*2) Color.lzh
LASER (*2) Laser.lzh (35)
iBeam (*2) Vfp.Izh (35i)
iBeam Tuning Data (*2) Unf.Izh
Correction Data for Brightness of the Edge of Image Field roi_SHD.lzh (35)
3. Mode
(*2)
Processor (*3) Proc.lzh
*1
Auto Film Carrier (*4) Afm.lzh
*1. If the S1-II is equipped with the connection unit, the connection unit includes the adjustment data.
S-4
Back Up DATA FD
Item File name
Scanner (*4) Dctrl.lzh Misreg110_1.lzh MisregAMC_7.lzh
Misreg135_1.lzh Misreg110_9.lzh MisregAMC_8.lzh
Misreg135_2.lzh Misreg110_11.lzh MisregCROP_1.Izh
Misreg135_4.lzh (*5) Misreg2B_1.lzh MisregMFC_1.Izh
Misreg135_6.lzh MisregMMC_3.lzh MisregMFC_2.Izh
Misreg240_1.lzh MisregMMC_5.lzh (*5) MisregMFC_4.Izh
Misreg240_4.lzh MisregMMC_7.lzh MisregMFC_6.Izh
Misreg135_5.lzh (*5) MisregMMC_8.lzh MisregMFC_7.Izh
Misreg240_7.lzh MisregAMC_3.lzh MisregMFC_8.Izh
Misreg240_8.lzh MisregAMC_5.lzh (*5) MisregMFC_9.Izh
S1-II
Back Up DATA FD
Item File name
Scanner (*4) Misreg135_1.lzh Misreg240_1.lzh
35400 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35400
Maintenance
! 3. Writing All Data (CPU → Media), Reading All Data (Media → CPU)
Backup the data to the media except FD.
The data to backup is as follows.
Data Description
BkData###.dat The data saved with the usual backup
idphoto.ini ID photo data
Template Frame data set in the print channel setting
Client.mdb Customer information in the edit data
PackExData.ini Package frame information set by user
SplitSize.ini Tiling data
ToneCurve.ini Data of the tone curve shape in the Edit Mode
PuFormatData.ini Data including the standard format of the pricing sheet print and the insertion image path
3. Mode
PuFormatExData.ini Data including the pricing sheet print format that the user created and the insertion image path
PuPrt All the image data included in the pricing sheet print is saved in this folder.
IMPORTANT
• Saving destination of the Image data may be changed. When you back up, check the destination on the Operator
Selections display.
• When the daily setup is not performed after writing the FD data to QSS, be sure to update the light source.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
NOTE
• The reason why the Light Source Update is necessary is that the Light Source Update data saved on the side of QSS at that point
will be available and will not be updated to the normal data even though the backup data has been read normally.
And also, the second reason is that the FD data made a backup remains as initial value after initializing the data.
• The reason why the data updated by the Light Source Update is set to 0 in writing to FD is to reduce the storage capacity and to
save in one FD.
35400 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35400
Maintenance
! Functions
! Path Setting
When reading and writing data, carry out the path setting to save to the media except FD.
Only the media type set as Input/Output in option registration can be carried out the path setting.
NOTE
• It can be configured by entering the service personnel password (2260).
3. Mode
Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, paper remaining amount, order number, archive number, total counter 2, net
order spooler place
Laser Operation Record*1 (35)
iBeam Record Setting*2 (35i)
*1. Laser operation record data are maintained in the laser unit body. The laser operation record data is not written or loaded when Writing or Loading
all data or service data.
*2. Neither reading all data or reading service data into the QSS replaces the data.
Serial Number/iBeam Total Lighting Time/iBeam Lighting Operation Count data of iBeam Record Setting is held in the iBeam unit.
35400 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35500
Maintenance
3. Mode
NOTE
• For 35i, LASER in the display above changes to iBeam.
! Explanation
NOTE
• The display returns to the Maintenance display by pressing NO: End, but it returns to the Software Upgrade display if pressed
it on the Software Upgrade display.
! Accessories
# CPU
The name of each control PCB is displayed.
# Version
The system program version number saved on all control PCBs is displayed.
35500 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35500
Maintenance
# Version (LASER)
You can check the type of the laser unit by checking the version name of LASER.
No. Display Explanation
1 2 3 4
3. Mode
• E: B laser driver (J391160), G laser driver (J391160)
• F: B laser driver (J391160), G laser driver (J391231)
3 b, e, f Displays the type of the laser unit.
• b: Laser unit bR (Z025601)
• e: Laser unit eR (Z025532)
• f: Laser unit fR (Z025534)/Laser unit f (Z025661)
4 R It shows that the R-AOM driver functions are installed in the laser unit.
• Example:
R: laser unit fR (Z025534)
None:laser unit f (Z025661)
# Version (scanner)
The Auto Film Carrier unit name indicates the type of the scanner used for [S-4/S1-II].
Scanner type display (S-4/S1-II)
S-4 #### S4
S1-II #### S1-2
NOTE
• If error occurs such as the system program cannot be executed or read, the boot flash version is displayed.
# Communication
The communication status of all control PCBs is displayed.
OK: Communicating
-: Not communicating, not registered as an option, not connected.
• Depending on the ARCNET communication feature, Communication on the System Version Check may not be able to decide if
the ARCNET communication is working or not.
• In that case, the ARCNET communication status can be checked more correctly by using Self-Diagnosis Program.
For details, check the ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual.
! Profile Data
The profile data version is displayed.
NOTE
• It is displayed only when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
! DLL/Driver
The versions of DLL and SYS file (driver) are displayed.
NOTE
• It is displayed only when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
35500 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35600
Maintenance
3. Mode
S3060-00-SM00
IMPORTANT
• This section explains the procedure for updating the system of each control PCBs.
For details about how to perform Software Upgrade, refer to Updating the QSS software in Installation procedures of the
QSS software.
Refer to the PC Service Manual.
• When the external PC compatible with the CT-1 or QSS printer driver has been connected, do not receive the order or
make prints before or during software upgrading. Upgrading may not be performed normally.
! Explanation
NOTE
• When the software upgrade is completed, the alarm informs the completion of the upgrade. After 1 minute, the display changes to
the System Version Check display automatically. Pressing NO: End also changes the display to the System Version Check
display.
! Operation
35600 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35600
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• Data reading after upgrading is not necessary as upgrading does not initialize the system data.
Do not read the backup data of the previous version after upgrading is successfully ended as it may
malfunction.
However, since the procedure differs depending on the versions, be sure to refer to the REPLACEMENT
INSTRUCTION for details.
3. Backup the system data after upgrading.
☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to backup the system data of the new version, and be careful not to mix the backup data of the
previous version with the new one.
! Data
3. Mode
! Control PCB (CPU), system file name, and software to be upgraded
At replacing any of the control PCBs, check the check box of the software to be upgraded, and then carry out upgrading (HD).
*1. For the Stand Alone Printer, this does not appear.
35600 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35700
Maintenance
3. Mode
S3322-03
IMPORTANT
S3063-00-SM00
• The laser operation record PCB maintains Serial
NOTE Number of the laser operation records, the data of
• For 35i, Laser Operation Record in the display above the laser lighting cumulative time and operation
changes to iBeam Record Setting. count, and polygon mirror operation cumulative time
and operation count.
! Explanation The data listed above are not changed by reading
all data into the QSS using Reading and Writing
Data.
! Error Record
• The above-listed data can maintain information up
The error record is displayed in order from the latest one to five.
which has occurred.
The latest 20 errors can be checked. ! Laser Unit Serial Number
NOTE
Displays the serial No. of the laser unit.
• Up to 500 errors can be checked when the service
personnel password (2260) has been entered.
Any older data than the latest 500 errors will be deleted.
! Serial Number
Displays the serial No. of QSS that installed the laser unit.
! Daily Setup History NOTE
The daily setup history from the latest setup is displayed. • Serial Number displays the serial No. of QSS detected in
All data for the past 7 setups will be displayed, and any data Machine Specification.
prior to that will be deleted. The Serial Number data is maintained in the laser unit.
35700 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35700
Maintenance
3. Mode
S3322-02-SM00
IMPORTANT
• Serial Number/iBeam Total Lighting Time/iBeam
Lighting Operation Count data of iBeam Record
Setting is held in the iBeam unit.
In Reading and Writing Data, reading all data into
the QSS does not replace the Serial Number/iBeam
Total Lighting Time/iBeam Lighting Operation Count
data of iBeam Record Setting.
• The Serial Number/iBeam Total Lighting
Time/iBeam Lighting Operation Count information of
iBeam Record Setting can be held as much as 5
pieces.
! Serial Number
Displays the serial No. of QSS that installed the iBeam unit.
NOTE
• Serial Number displays the serial No. of QSS detected in
Machine Specification.
It also holds Serial Number data in the iBeam unit.
35700 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35800
Maintenance
3. Mode
ENGLISH KOREAN
JAPANESE PEKINESE
FRENCH TAIWANESE
GERMAN DANISH
ITALIAN GREEK
SPANISH DUTCH
PORTUGUESE FINNISH
S3066-00-00
RUSSIAN SWEDISH
NOTE
INDONESIAN -
• It can be configured by entering the service personnel
password (2260).
! HELP Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)
35800 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35800
Maintenance
! Attached Scanner
Selecting the scanner with which the QSS is equipped is
available.
Attached Scanner
Not in use S4 S1-II
3. Mode
Forced replenishment ON/OFF can be set.
! Functions
35800 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35920
Maintenance
Self-diagnostic
Display (Self-diagnostic: 35, 35i) Display (Image Path Check: 35, 35i)
3. Mode
Failed portion display
NOTE
• For 35i, images for Laser Confirmation in the Image Path Check display changes to For iBeam Confirmation.
! Explanation
NOTE
• The Film Series Image Path is not displayed for the Stand-alone Printer.
! Test Print
Put a check mark for Test Print and perform the following checks, if an abnormal print is made from the scanned image though the
scanned image saved to the storage media was normal.
NOTE
• Also perform the checks in the following conditions.
• Lines and noises are seen on the print.
• The color on the print is not good. (Black and white are not good.)
• The color on the print gets worse by performing the setup.
• The color on the print does not become better by performing the setup.
NOTE
• ← indicates it is same as on the left.
35920 1/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35920
Maintenance
NOTE
3. Mode
• The result of the diagnosis contains all the results of Film Series Image Path and Test Print.
NOTE
• Available files are 24-bit BMP and 32-bit BMP files only.
! Execution Time
Displays the expected time for the diagnostics.
! Start Test
The dialog for the Image Path Check appears by clicking Start Test. Click YES to start the diagnostics.
! Save Result
The result of Image Path Check can be saved in a file.
IMPORTANT
• The test result should be saved in C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\LogData\DiagLogImgPass.Log.
• Only one file is available to save the result.
! Clear Result
Delete the result of Image Path Check.
! Result
The result of the test is displayed after Image Path Check is completed.
NOTE
• For 35, if AOM Setup Value is displayed as Unknown, the following may cause.
35920 2/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35920
Maintenance
• When making the test print, Dairy Setup or Initial Setup has not been performed for the selected paper.
! Checking procedure
3. Mode
35 35i
Scanner unit ←
Dirt on the Scanner Unit/Light Source Section (CCD Side) ←
Dirt on the Scanner Unit/Light Source Section (Light Source Side) ←
Failed to diagnose. (LED light source temperature is being ←
adjusted.)*1
Failed to diagnose. (Focus Adjustment is not executed.)*1 ←
Failed to diagnose. (Light Source is not registered.) *1
←
Failed to diagnose.*1 ←
PC interface PCB ←
LVDS cable between the scanner ↔ PC interface PCB ←
USB cable between PC interface PCB ↔ Laser Control PCB −
− USB cable between PC Interface PCB ↔ iBeam Control PCB
Laser control PCB −
− iBeam Control PCB
R Laser Deterioration −
G Laser Deterioration −
B Laser Deterioration −
− R iBeam Deterioration
− G iBeam Deterioration
− B iBeam Deterioration
R Laser Failure −
G Laser Failure −
B Laser Failure −
− R iBeam Failure
− G iBeam Failure
− B iBeam Failure
Setup failure ←
R Laser failure or Setup failure −
G Laser failure or Setup failure −
B Laser failure or Setup failure −
− R iBeam failure or Setup failure
− G iBeam failure or Setup failure
− B iBeam failure or Setup failure
The processing solution is out of control. ←
*1. When the dirt in the photometry section was not checked properly, the message "Failed to diagnose." appears.
35920 3/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35920
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• The message, Failed to diagnose. (LED light source temperature is being adjusted.), Failed to diagnose. (Focus
Adjustment is not executed.), Failed to diagnose. (Light Source is not registered.), or Failed to diagnose. may be
displayed when the self-diagnosis is not performed normally in checking the scanner unit/light source section.
3. Mode
35920 4/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35920
Maintenance
3. Mode
S3406-00-SM00
! Explanation
! Drive
The media drive with the check mark is performed the writing test.
! Name
Displays the name of media drive.
NOTE
• Displays the media that is registered at option registration.
• For CD and DVD, if type is registered at input, the name will not displayed.
For conducting self-diagnosis, register the type as output or input/output, and prepare writable disk.
! Failed Counts
The denominator shows the number of tests and the numerator shows the number of tests failed.
35920 5/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
35920
Maintenance
! Communication System
Displays the communication type of media drive.
! Failed Information
Displays the cause of error when performing the writing test of media drive.
! Execution Time
3. Mode
Displays the time required for performing the writing test to the media drive.
NOTE
• The Execution Time varies depending on the number of drives with the check marks, Executed Counts and Data Size.
! Save Result
The result of Media Drive Self-diagnostic can be saved in a file.
IMPORTANT
• The test result of writing to the media drive is saved in C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\LogData\DiagLogMedia.log.
• Only one file is available to save the writing test result of the media drive.
! Clear Result
Delete the result of Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
! Checking procedure
1. Insert the media to perform the writing test into the media drive.
IMPORTANT
• In the case of CD-R/RW and Multi DVD drive, do not use the important media since the data is overwritten.
• In the case of other than CD-R/RW and Multi DVD drive, when the data is added then the Media Drive Self-
diagnostic is finished, the data is deleted.
2. Put a check mark for the drive to perform the writing test.
3. Set the Executed Counts and Data Size.
4. Clicking Start Writing Test displays the dialog. Click YES to start the test.
5. The cause of error is displayed in the Failed Information.
Causes of the problem
Media is not set. Data Comparison error.
The media is write protected. Failed to read and write.
Capacity error.
35920 6/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36000
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
3. Mode
displayed.
OK: When the LED light intensity of each sensor
is from 1 to 169
• After Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment is not completed normally, − is
displayed.
−: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is
S3370-00-00 0 or 170 or more
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor can be checked
and set by inputting the service personnel password (2260).
! Explanation
! Functions
36000 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36010
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Paper Advance Unit Correction ! Paper Stop Position Correction (Initial value:
0.0) (Input range: −4.0 to +4.0)
Bringing up the display Corrects the stop position of the paper rear end where the turn
unit receive the paper from the exposure advance unit.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Unit
Correction Arm unit 2 Paper transfer position
3. Mode
S3386-00-SM00
Turn unit Paper receiving position
NOTE
G083157
• It can be configured by entering the service personnel
password (2260).
! Functions
! Explanation
! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation
Carry out each correction for the paper advance unit.
The correction values for Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position
IMPORTANT Correction and Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position
• When the paper advance unit correction is carried Correction are canceled, and arm unit 2 moves back and forth
out by paper magazine A or B, it is complete. between the paper transfer position and the paper receiving
position.
• After replacing the paper advance unit, carry out The following operation starts by pressing YES.
adjustment by following the procedure below.
• First time: Carries out the initial operation and arm unit 2
1. Carry out ☞ Turn Unit Stop Position Correction. moves to the paper receiving position.
2. Carry out ☞ Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position • Second time: Arm unit 2 moves to the paper transfer
Correction. position.
3. Carry out ☞ Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position
Correction. NOTE
• The operation returns to the first operation by pressing
4. Carry out ☞ Paper Stop Position Correction.
YES, after pressing another key or opening/closing the
paper advance door.
! Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop Position Correction
(Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: −1.0 to +1.0) ! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation Confirmation
The paper receive position of arm unit 2 is corrected.
To test arm unit 2, apply the following two values: Arm Unit
2 Lower Stop Position Correction and Arm Unit 2 Upper
! Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction Stop Position Correction. If it is functioning properly, test
(Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: −4.0 to +4.0) arm unit 2 will repeatedly move back and forth between the
The paper transfer position of arm unit 2 can be corrected. paper transfer position and the paper receiving position.
! Turn Unit Stop Position Correction (Initial ! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation (left) (3502)
value: 0.0) (Input range: −2.0 to +2.0) Arm unit 2 moves to the paper transfer position (left).
The paper receive position of the turn unit can be corrected.
! Arm Unit 2 Test Operation (right) (3502)
Arm unit 2 moves to the paper transfer position (right).
36010 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36010
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
! Test Operation for the Turn Unit Stop Position 2. Input the correction value so that the height
Correction of surface A of the turn unit is 2 mm high
from surface B of the exposure advance unit.
The correction value for Turn Unit Stop Position Correction
is canceled, and the turn unit stops at the paper receiving IMPORTANT
position.
• When checking, keep your eyes horizontal so
as not to tilt the adjustment position.
! Turn Unit Stop Position Correction Test
Operation Confirmation
The correction value for Turn Unit Stop Position Correction
becomes valid, and the turn unit stops at the paper receiving
position.
3. Mode
The correction value for Paper Stop Position Correction is
canceled, and the paper is loaded and stops at the paper stop
position after the turn unit operates the initial operation.
IMPORTANT
G074586
• For each adjustment, turn ON Interlock Switch
(Printer Door 1, 2) and keep printer door 2 opened ! Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position Correction
on purpose and confirm that arm unit 2 and turn unit
operate correctly. Be sure not to put your hands into
the paper advance section.
1. Carry out Arm Unit 2 Test Operation
Confirmation via the F: Functions, and
• Be sure not to pull the paper advance unit out with move arm unit 2 to the paper transfer
the Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1, 2) turned ON. It
position.
may damage the machine.
Remove the printer door 2 interlock switch, attach it to the
2. Input the correction value so that surface C
main body, then turn on the switch. of arm unit 2 may come to the position 1 to 2
mm away from surface D of the processor
NOTE
loading unit.
• Attach the printer door 2 interlock switch to the main
body with tape or the like. IMPORTANT
• When checking, keep your eyes horizontal so
! Turn Unit Stop Position Correction as not to tilt the adjustment position.
• When + correction value is input too much for
1. Carry out Turn Unit Stop Position Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position
Correction Test Operation Confirmation Correction, it touches surface D of the
via the F: Functions, and stop the turn unit processor loading unit. Be careful to avoid it.
at the paper receiving position.
36010 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36010
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
+correction
−correction
Make a clearance of 1 to 2 mm
3. Mode
Surface C of arm unit 2 between the surfaces C and D.
+correction
−correction
G074584
G074579
36010 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36010
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
3. Mode
Paper
Paper rear end
Front edge of the turn unit guide (lower)
−correction +correction
G074585
36010 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36020
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Exposure Magnification Correction • The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP
imprinting.
[35]
! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine
Bringing up the display A/B)
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment Validate each correction value to make test prints.
→ Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Magnification NOTE
Correction
• The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
print.
G066121
3. Mode
• A piece of paper with the advance length 100 mm is
printed.
A B
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP
imprinting.
! Adjustment
! Explanation
The image to be exposed can be expanded or reduced in the
paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification correction is
carried out for any one of magazine A, B, it is
complete. G074496
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm width or 3. Select the line from part A and input the
more, make a test print with the maximum paper measured value in part B.
size which you used, then measure the length
between most outside lines of it. IMPORTANT
• Measure the length of 130 line usually.
! Cyan Line Exposure Size (Initial value: 130.0 • When you do not have the paper of 152 mm
mm) (Input range: 125.0 to 135.0 mm) width or more, measure the length between
most outside lines of it.
The length of the test print image is measured, and then the
actual measurement value can be entered. 4. Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) of
Functions.
! Functions 5. Confirm that Part A on the test print is within
±0.1 mm of the specified length.
! Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B)
6. Perform exposure center correction.
Invalidate each correction value to make test prints.
☞ 36070
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 100 mm is 7. Carry out the Exposure Position
printed. Adjustment.
☞ 36030
36020 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36030
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
3. Mode
Input the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with
the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D2.
! Functions
! BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 2 for Main 1. Check that the Exposure Zoom Rate
Scan Cyan Line = Yellow Line Correction has been completed.
Input the number and letter of the image where the cyan line ☞ 36020
aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B. 2. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
! BLOCK-B Magenta Offset Value of Main IMPORTANT
Scanning • Make a test print with the paper whose width
is 152 mm or more.
Measure the dimension between the cyan and magenta lines
on BLOCK-C 0i and input the measured value if there is no 3. Check the number of the part where the cyan
image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the line aligns with the magenta line on the test
test print BLOCK-B. print BLOCK-B. And check the number of the
36030 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36030
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
part where the cyan line aligns with the the part where the cyan line aligns with the
yellow line. yellow line on the test print BLOCK-D2.
Magenta line Magenta line
Yellow line
3. Mode
Yellow line G068456
IMPORTANT
G074510
• Check the line using the loupe.
IMPORTANT
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. Refer to
• Check the line using the loupe. Service personnel tool list.
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. Refer to ☞ 80310
Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310 7. Input each checked number.
4. Check BLOCK-C 0i and input the offset 8. Carry out Test Print (Confirmation) of
Functions.
value of main scanning and make a Test
Print again if there is no part where the cyan 9. Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and
line aligns with the magenta/yellow line on yellow) of the column 0a to 0h in BLOCK-B
the test print BLOCK-B. make the straightest line comparing with the
other columns.
Check area
Plus correction
Minus correction
G068455
G074511
36030 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36030
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Check area
3. Mode
G074512
G074497
36030 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36040
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
3. Mode
G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length 178 mm is
printed.
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP
imprinting.
! Adjustment
S3329-00-SM00
1. Check that the Exposure Zoom Rate
Correction and Exposure Position
NOTE
Adjustment have been complete.
• It can be configured by entering the service personnel
password (2260).
☞ 36020
☞ 36030
! Explanation 2. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT
This mode is used to correct dot displacement for each laser of
B, G and R on the both sides of a print. • Check line 130 usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm
IMPORTANT
width or more, make a test print with the
• When the exposure magnification fine adjustment is maximum paper size which you used, then
carried out for any one of magazine A/B, it is
complete.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm width or
more, make a test print with the maximum paper
size which you used, then measure the dimension of
the most outside line of it.
! Functions
36040 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36040
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
check the dimension of the most outside line Correcting direction of the magenta line
of it. Correcting to the right +correction
Correcting to the left −correction
3. Mode
M
+correction −correction
G074513
IMPORTANT
• Check the line using the loupe.
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. Refer to
Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
3. Carry out the correction so that the magenta
and yellow lines make a straight line with
cyan line in the vertical direction at 0 on the
test print.
IMPORTANT
• Check line 130 usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 152 mm
width or more, make a test print with the
maximum paper size which you used, then
check the dimension of the most outside line
of it.
• If there is no image where magenta and cyan
lines make one line, carry out the fine
adjustment by 0.1 dot.
• Check the line with the most outside chart of
the test print.
NOTE
• For the correcting direction of the magenta line,
refer to the list below.
36040 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36050
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
! Loading
3. Mode
The paper is loaded.
! Rewind
The paper is rewound.
! Adjustment
S3385-00-00 1. Set the magazine to carry out the paper
NOTE advance length correction on the magazine
• It can be configured by entering the service personnel mount A/B.
password (2260).
2. Carry out Test Paper Advance of
Functions.
! Explanation
3. Open printer door 2 and remove the test
Correct the paper advance length and the advance roller feed paper from the bottom of the paper advance
error. unit. Then, press the YES: OK key.
IMPORTANT
4. Measure each test paper length of the first
• The paper advance length correction is to be carried and second paper which are removed.
out with the basis of magazine A.
5. Enter each measurement dimension.
! Test Paper Measurement Value (1st) (Initial 6. After correcting, carry out Test Paper
value: 150.0 mm) (Input range: 145.0 to 155.0 Advance Confirmation of F: Functions
mm) and be sure to make a print and check if the
The first paper is for the correction of the paper which has just advance length is correct.
been fed out from the paper magazine (distance between the
paper loading sensor and the paper cutter) and the advance
7. If the advance length is not correct, adjust it
feed error. according to the following procedure.
When the print advance length of the first paper after
! Test Paper Measurement Value (2nd) (Initial loading is not correct.
value: 200.0 mm) (Input range: 180.0 to 220.0 When the Carry out + correction for Test Paper
mm) advance length Measurement Value (1st).
The second test paper is for the correction of the advance is long.
roller feed error. When the Carry out − correction for Test Paper
advance length Measurement Value (1st).
is short.
! Functions
When the print advance length of the second or later
! Test Paper Advance
paper after loading is not correct.
Invalidate the correction and advance the test papers of 200.0 Reset the measurement dimensions for Test Paper
mm for the first and 800.0 mm for the second. Measurement Valued (1st, 2nd) to the initial values and
IMPORTANT adjust them again.
• Be sure to enter the measurement dimensions of
the first and second test papers at the same time.
36050 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36060
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
3. Mode
NOTE
• For 35i, Paper width: 82.5 to 203 mm
! Explanation
Correct if the image is exposed diagonally toward the paper because of the paper zigzagging.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, B.
! Paper Magazine A or B
You can select paper magazine A or B.
! Functions
35, 35i Explanation
F Test Print 1 (Paper Magazine A) (magazine B) Invalidate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE
• The advance length of the test print is 355.6 mm.
F Test Print Confirmation 1 (Paper Magazine A) (magazine Validate the correction and output two test prints.
B) *1 NOTE
• The advance length of the test print is 355.6 mm.
F Test Print 2 (Magazine A) (magazine B) Invalidate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE
• The advance length of the test print is 610.0 mm.
F Test Print Confirmation 2 (Paper Magazine A) (magazine Validate the correction and output two test prints.
B) *1 NOTE
• The advance length of the test print is 610.0 mm.
F Loading (Paper Magazine A) (magazine B) The paper is loaded.
F Rewind The paper which has been loaded is rewound.
36060 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36060
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
*1. The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test print.
The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP imprinting.
G066121
! Adjustment
1. Clean pressure pins of the arm units using a cotton swab (two places).
Pressure pins are in the positions where the arrows indicate. Insert a cotton swab into the gap between the arm units to clean the
pins.
Clean the gap.
3. Mode
Arm units
Cotton swab
Cotton swab
G082875
2. Set the paper magazine to be carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction to magazine mount A/B.
IMPORTANT
• For magazine B, check if the zigzagging adjustment for paper supply unit B is completed.
☞ 25730
3. Check that the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit has been finished.
Refer to ☞ 25620.
4. Select magazine A/B.
5. Execute Test Print 1 of Functions.
6. Measure the difference of dimensions of lines A and B on the second test print. And input the value to
(A−B).
NOTE
• If the measured values of the test print are line A: 121 mm and B: 120 mm, for example, see the below.
36060 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36060
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Line A
A
Line B
3. Mode
C
G083159
7. After the correction, make test prints by Test Print Confirmation 2 from Functions. Then, confirm that
the dimension differences between lines A and B and between lines A and C (on the second test print)
are within the values in the following table.
NOTE
• For example, if the measurement value of line A (on the second test print) is 120 mm
Check that the difference of dimension of lines A and C (on the second test print) is within the tolerance level in the
following table.
IMPORTANT
• If the dimension difference of lines A and C (on the second test print) is out of the tolerance level, input the
correction value to (A−B).
• Check the test prints again and adjust the unit repeatedly until the value is within the tolerance level.
Status Correction Status Correction
A>B Plus correction A<B Minus correction
8. If the dimension differences of lines A and C both on the first and second test prints are out of the
tolerance level, check the following adjustment.
Paper magazine Adjustment
Magazine A Check the condition of the paper magazine. ☞ 22000
Magazine B Check the condition of the paper magazine. ☞ 22000
Adjust zigzagging for paper supply unit B. ☞ 25730
36060 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36070
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
! Functions
3. Mode
Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each
Paper Magazine) to make a test print.
Input the length from the left end to the center line on the
leading end of the test print.
! Adjustment
36070
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
2. Check that Exposure Zoom Rate 4. Measure dimension B from the left end to the
Correction has been completed. (35) center line on the test print.
☞ 36020 IMPORTANT
3. Set the paper magazine to carry out Master • When measuring the test print, use the front
(Exposure Center Correction Value) to end of the test print.
magazine mount A/B.
Center line
4. Select magazine A/B.
Front end of the test print
5. Carry out Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B)
without Correction Value of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT
• Make a test print with the maximum paper
size which you use.
3. Mode
6. Measure the length from the left end to the
center line and the length from the center line
to the right end on the leading end of the test
print.
Left end of the paper Right end of the paper
Center line
A
G074516
36070 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Exposure Advance Adjustment 1 Measure the length between the test print front end and 0 mm-
line, then input measured value.
! Functions
3. Mode
Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed
Correction and then make a test print.
A piece of paper with the advance length of 305 mm is
printed.
NOTE
• The paper width, [A ###(#)] is printed in the CVP
imprinting.
G066121
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP
imprinting.
36080 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
305 mm
3. Mode
0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement
Value
G074517
Rear end
G074518
36080 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36081
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
Exposure Advance Adjustment 2 Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of
the test print and input measured value.
3. Mode
! Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine
A/B)
Validate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start
Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed
Correction and then make a test print.
A piece of paper with the advance length of 383 mm is
printed.
S3316-00-SM01 NOTE
NOTE • The arrow is printed in purple on the print made as a test
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to bring up this print.
display.
Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)
! Explanation
! Rewind
The paper which is being loaded is rewound.
36081 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36081
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
383 mm
3. Mode
0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement
Value
G084435
36081 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36090
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
3. Mode
S3389-00-SM00
NOTE
• For 35i, Paper width: 82.5 to 203 mm
! Explanation
The banding for each magazine type can be carried out by adjusting the clearance between the pressure roller of the exposure advance
unit and the paper.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out paper pressure operation correction for each paper type.
• Copy the paper width correction value that the correction is finished to the same paper type paper magazine.
! Functions
G066121
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP imprinting.
36090 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36090
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
! Rewind
The paper which has been loaded is rewound.
! Adjustment
Print No. Revolution pulse count Revolution pulse count Test print advance length (mm)
3. Mode
(pps) (pps)
(35) (35i)
1 560 1073 152
2 547 919 153
3 532 873 154
4 517 837 155
5 501 805 156
6 487 776 157
7 473 749 158
8 459 723 159
9 444 701 160
10 429 680 161
11 415 659 162
12 400 637 163
13 387 616 164
2. Banding appears around 17 mm or 26 mm from the rear end on the test print. Check the table below
and input the correction pattern No. as the correction value.
Banding position Correction Banding position Correction
Rear end: At about 26 mm +2 Rear end: At about 17 mm −2
Example: Around 26 mm at the rear end Example: Around 17 mm at the rear end
Banding (26 mm at the rear end) −2 Banding (17 mm at the rear end)
+2
10 11 12 13
Test print with no
banding
36090 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36090
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
3. Carry out the procedure 1 and 2 for each paper magazine type.
3. Mode
36090 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36100
Printer Mechanical Adjustment
G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length 216 mm is
printed.
• The paper width, 〈A ###(#)〉 is printed in the CVP
3. Mode
imprinting.
! WB width correction
IMPORTANT
• When the margin on the test print is 0.5 mm, the
correction is not necessary.
S3394-00-SM00
1. Check that the exposure center correction
! Explanation has been completed.
☞ 36070
The margin correction can be carried out for each paper width
and surface.
2. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT 3. Measure the right and left margins on the
test print.
• When the correction is carried out for any one of
magazine A/B, it is complete.
• This correction affects the exposure position both of
WB and BL, because the image exposure position is
corrected.
36100 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36700
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment
Compact Archive Unit Initialization sequentially. This reduces the time for the hard disk drive
to access the data.
• Carry out Defrag regularly to improve the performance
Bringing up the display of the computer.
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment
→ Compact Archive Unit Adjustment → Compact Archive Unit
Initialization
! Procedure
3. Mode
S3401-00-SM00
! Explanation
G069963
The compact archive unit can be initialized or optimized.
3. Click Start.
IMPORTANT Initialization starts.
• The backup data of the compact archive unit is not IMPORTANT
made.
• You cannot change the setting of Capacity,
• If the data in the compact archive unit was initialized File system, Allocation unit size, and Enable
accidentally, it cannot be recovered. Compression on the format dialog.
• If you select the Enable Compression, it takes
! Functions approx. 35 minutes.
• If you select Quick Format, it finishes in a few
! Initialization of the Compact Archive Unit of seconds.
The image data which is saved in the hard disk drive of the
compact archive unit can be initialized. ! Defragmentation of the Compact Archive Unit
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to
1. Click F: Functions.
display this.
36700 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36700
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment
3. Mode
G069964
IMPORTANT
• If the fragments is 7%, it takes approx. 25
minutes for defragmentation.
NOTE
• After finishing the defragmentation,
Defragmentation Complete is sometimes
displayed. When the message is displayed, select
Close.
36700 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36710
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment
3. Mode
Capacity
All capacity of the drive which is selected is displayed.
Free Space
Free space of the drive which is selected is displayed.
! Save Data
You can check the data saved in the compact archive.
All Order Counts
S3402-00-SM00 All order counts saved is displayed.
NOTE
• Appears when Compact Archive Unit TYPE2 is
selected.
You can set the size of the capacity used for the compact
archive unit and that of the space used for Hold on save.
Size to be used for Compact Archive Unit
S3402-00-SM01 Set the size of space in the hard disk to be used for the
compact archive unit.
! Explanation Setting from 0.1 GB up to 80% of the hard disk drive capacity
is available.
You can check the compact archive unit capacity.
The size to be used for Hold on Save
! Unit Number Set the size of space in the hard disk to be used for Hold on
Save.
You can set the unit number of the compact archive unit.
Setting from 0 GB up to a 50% of the capacity to be used for
NOTE Compact Archive Unit is available.
• If there are some QSS with which are equipped the
compact archive unit, change the unit number in order to Default Size
identify each archive unit. Put the settings of the size to be used to the default as for the
• When TYPE 2 is selected, the archive code (2x−xxxx⋅ ⋅ ⋅ compact archive unit and the Hold on save.
⋅) does not appear. NOTE
• The values are changed to the following.
36710 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
36710
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment
3. Mode
36710 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
37300
Laser Unit Adjustment
Laser Unit Adjustment
3. Mode
• ☞ No. 6107
! Laser Unit Thermosensor Display Section
The temperature of the laser unit temperature sensor is
displayed.
NOTE
S3271-00-SM00
• The laser unit control temperature is adjusted using the
laser unit heater and laser unit cooling fan 1and 2, which
! Explanation are installed in the laser unit, to keep it within the control
temperature range.
R Laser Thermosensor
• The laser unit control temperature becomes within the
Laser Unit Thermosensor controlled temperature, and then controlling temperature
of the R laser will start.
• When the displayed temperature is within the following
range, it is normal.
Condition Details
Laser unit control temperature 17.0°C to 42.0°C
Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2: When the laser unit temperature
ON sensor exceeds 30°C.
Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2: When the laser unit temperature
OFF sensor lowers to 27°C or less.
Laser unit heater: ON When the laser unit temperature
sensor lowers to 19°C or less.
Laser unit heater: OFF When the laser unit temperature
sensor exceeds 20°C.
Laser unit heater
IMPORTANT
Laser unit
• The error message of error No. 6177 Laser Unit
G076396
temperature is out of range. appears under the
NOTE following conditions.
• Because the R laser thermosensor and laser unit • Laser temperature is controlled once between 17.0°C
thermosensor are inside of the laser unit, you cannot and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status)
check each sensor. and then the temperature exceeds 45.0°C (upper
limit temperature) again.
! R Thermosensor Display Section
• Laser temperature is controlled once between 17.0°C
The temperature of R laser temperature sensor is displayed. and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status)
NOTE and then the temperature falls under 15.0°C (lower
limit temperature)again.
• Temperature control is equipped in the R laser and this
temperature control section has been adjusted to become • ☞ No. 6177
within the controlled temperature.
• When the displayed temperature is within the following
range, it is normal.
37300 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
37500
Operation Information
Operation Information
3. Mode
• When an abnormality occurs in the system program: 6. Press the C key while pressing the Ctrl key
• Up to 10 Logdata files that are stored automatically with the file selected.
are saved. When the number of Logdata files Copy the Logdata using the shortcut key.
exceeds 10, the files will be overwritten from the 7. Press the V key while pressing the Ctrl key.
oldest one.
Paste the Logdata using the shortcut key.
• If the problem occurs several times, or another
problem occurs subsequently, it records the time 8. The file creating time and the contents about
and the contents of the problem. the problem are recorded in the Copy of
File.
NOTE
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information 9. Save the Logdata to the storage media.
shown below with the Logdata and memory data. NOTE
• Status when the problem occurs • The size of the Logdata is large, therefore save it
• Operation before the problem occurs to a storage media which has a large capacity such
as MO.
• With or without a error, its kind
• Save the paper which is used when the problem ! To obtain Logdata at present
occurs.
• Any other things you realized 1. Press the L key while pressing the Ctrl key
and the Alt key on the keyboard when the
! How to obtain problem occurs.
IMPORTANT
! To obtain Logdata recorded automatically
when the problem occurs • Carry out it immediately after the problem
occurs. The correct information cannot be
recorded after changing the mode or
1. Press the Windows key on the keyboard if performing other operations.
QSS software works.
S0100-WIN-SM00
37500 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
37500
Operation Information
3. Mode
S0100-WIN-SM00
37500 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
37510
Operation Information
! Explanation
If a problem occurs during the QSS operation, the operation
status when the problem occurs can be recorded as a memory
data.
IMPORTANT
• The memory data is from the each CPU.
• If the problem occurs several times, or another
problem occurs subsequently, it records the time
and the contents of the problem.
NOTE
3. Mode
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information
shown below with the Logdata and memory data.
• Status when the problem occurs
S1146-02-SM02
• Operation before the problem occurs
• With or without a error, its kind 3. Select the CPU you want.
The available CPU is shown as an active button to be
• Save the paper which is used when the problem
selected.
occurs.
• Any other things you realized 4. After the dialog of Save As appears, select
output directory.
! Saving procedure
S1146-06-SM01
IMPORTANT
• The acquired file should be named the store
name, date and the running number.
• Example: Noritsu12-24-01
Noritsu (store name) 12 (month) -24 (day) -01
(running number)
S1146-02-SM00
37510 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
37520
Operation Information
3. Mode
G083160
NOTE
• For 35i, VFP in the display above changes to LASER.
! Explanation
The current memory data and Logdata can be compressed and saved at the same time when a problem occurs in running the QSS.
IMPORTANT
• The memory data is from the each CPU.
• The recorded memory data and Logdata are not the ones recorded automatically when the problem occurs.
Be sure to save the data when the problem occurs.
• The Logdata recorded automatically when the problem occurs can be saved by Saving the Logdata.
☞ 37500
• If the problem occurs several times, or another problem occurs subsequently, it records the time and the contents of
the problem.
NOTE
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information shown below with the Logdata and memory data.
• Status when the problem occurs
• Operation before the problem occurs
• With or without a error, its kind
• Save the paper which is used when the problem occurs.
• Any other things you realized
! Save in
Shows the saving destination of the memory data and Logdata files.
! Browse
Can change the saving destination of data to each media drive or the like.
! START
Saves the memory data and Logdata to the files.
37520 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
37520
Operation Information
! CANCEL
Closes the Read All Memory Data & Save LogData display and returns to the QSS display.
1. Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs.
Be sure to carry out this operation immediately after the problem occurs. The correct information cannot be recorded after changing the
mode or performing other operations.
2. The Read All Memory Data & Save LogData display appears.
3. Click START in the display to save the memory data and Logdata to the files.
• Save the test result to C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-##_##\Log_Data\Memory\############.
3. Mode
• Before clicking START, clicking Browse in the display can change the saving destination of data to each media drive or the like.
G074618
IMPORTANT
• When closing the Read All Memory Data & Save LogData display forcibly using Ctrl+Alt+Delete, the QSS and
PC operations may be unstable.
• If you start the memory data and Logdata saving function during the QSS process (printing, outputting to the
media, etc.), the QSS process and saving data may become unstable.
4. When finishing saving the memory data and Logdata, the screen returns to the QSS display.
5. End.
37520 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
37530
Operation Information
3. Mode
G083161
! Explanation
Since communication of each control PCB cannot be performed when ARCNET communication error. occurs, it cannot go into the
System Version Check display from Extension.
If ARCNET communication error. occurs, use System Version Check in the following procedure to go into the System Version
Check display easily.
! Procedure
G083161
37530 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
37530
Operation Information
4. The System Version Check display appears by clicking System Version Check.
3. Mode
G083158
NOTE
• For 35i, LASER in the display above changes to iBeam.
5. Confirm the Version and Communication on the System Version Check display.
# Communication
The communication status of all control PCBs is displayed.
OK: Communicating
-: Not communicating, not registered as an option, not connected.
IMPORTANT
• Since communication data has collected on the ARCNET circuit when ARCNET communication error.
occurs, therefore, it may take time until OK is displayed.
# Version
The system program version number saved on all control PCBs is displayed.
Version is displayed.: It is communicating.
Version is not displayed.: Not communicating, not registered as an option, not connected.
IMPORTANT
• The version of each control PCB is displayed if main CPU receives the communication OK signal which
each control PCB sent responding to main CPU's ARCNET communication request to each control PCB.
• If OK is displayed in Communication field, a version will remain displayed even if Communication
becomes - later.
6. Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET communication error.
Refer to the ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual.
37530 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
37540
Operation Information
Machine Specification
3. Mode
G083161
! Explanation
QSS-35 is the Stand Alone Printer at the system shipment, but Attached Scanner in Machine Specification is registered as S4 or S1-
II. Therefore, No.6901: ARCNET communication error. occurs when it is turned on.
Machine Specification is the mode that changes the Attached Scanner setting in Machine Specification to Not in use when
No.6901: ARCNET communication error. occurs.
! Procedure
S3066-00-00
37540 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
37540
Operation Information
3. Mode
This page is intentionally blank.
37540 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4000
4. Troubleshooting
4 Troubleshooting
Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i] ..................................................................................................4470
White line and black line appear on a print. (vertical) [35i] ................................................................................4470
Mistake in setting of focal plane regulating guide [35i] ......................................................................................4470
Appearing the paper width line [35i] ...................................................................................................................4470
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner ........................................................................................... 4500
List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type) ........................................................................................4500
Diagnosis appendix: F replenishment ................................................................................... 4600
Replenishment cartridge installation section troubleshooting flow ....................................................................4600
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error ...........................................................................................4610
Recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error ...........................................................................................4620
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................. 40500
No. 0500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. .....................................................................................40500
No. 0501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ..........................................................................................40500
No. 0502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. .............................................................40500
No. 0503[N] [SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. .................................................................................................40500
No. 0505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. .................................................................................40500
No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. .......................................................................................................40500
No. 0508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ................................40500
No. 0518 Set the Dryer Cover. ........................................................................................................................40500
No. 0519 Remove the prints from the Print Conveyor Unit. ...........................................................................40500
No. 0520 Sensors may be dirty. .......................................................................................................................40500
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment .......................................................................... 40600
No. 0600[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. CD .............................................................................................40600
No. 0601[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty. BF ..............................................................................................40600
No. 0602[J] The Tablet Cartridge is empty.STB .............................................................................................40600
No. 0603[J] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. .........................................................................................40600
No. 0604[J] Add water to the SW/DW Tank. .................................................................................................40600
No. 0605[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. CD ..................................................................................................40600
No. 0606[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge. BF ..................................................................................................40600
No. 0607[J] Attach the Tablet Cartridge.STB .................................................................................................40600
No. 0609[J] The Tablet kit is empty. ...............................................................................................................40600
No. 0610[J] Empty the Effluent Tank.### ......................................................................................................40600
4000 1/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4000
4 Troubleshooting
No. 0907[F] Collect the waste solution. ..........................................................................................................40900
No. 0908[F] Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will resume. ......
40900
No. 0909[F] Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation. ........................................................40900
No. 0910[F] Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . . ................................................40900
No. 0911[F] Prcessor Section is processing. One moment please. . . ............................................................40900
No. 0912[F] Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart replenishment. 40900
No. 0913[F] Manual opening cannot be started. .............................................................................................40900
Attention message: Printer .................................................................................................. 41000
No. 1000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A ...............................................................41000
No. 1001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B ................................................................41000
No. 1002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A .........................................41000
No. 1003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B ..........................................41000
No. 1004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A .............................................................................41000
No. 1005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B .............................................................................41000
No. 1010 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ............................................................................41000
No. 1011 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ............................................................................41000
No. 1012-1013 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............41000
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . ...................................................................41000
No. 1017-1024 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............41000
No. 1027 Profile data was not found. ..............................................................................................................41000
No. 1029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. .....................................................................................41000
No. 1030-1041 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............41000
No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . .........................................................41000
No. 1047 Close printer door. ...........................................................................................................................41000
No. 1048-1051 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............41000
No. 1065 Would you like to continue? ............................................................................................................41000
No. 1074 Sensors may be dirty. .......................................................................................................................41000
No. 1079-1081 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............41000
No. 1082 iBeam temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . .......................................................41000
No. 1087 Would you like to calibrate the Colorimeter? ..................................................................................41000
No. 1093 Uneven coloring may occur on the print. Would you like to stop processing? ..............................41000
No. 1094 Unit is not attached. .........................................................................................................................41000
4000 2/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4000
4 Troubleshooting
Attention message: Software upgrade ................................................................................ 41800
No. 1801 Execute software upgrade. ...............................................................................................................41800
Attention message: Main ..................................................................................................... 41900
No. 1900-1902 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............41900
No. 1903 Proceeding. One moment please. . . .................................................................................................41900
No. 1904 Proceeding. One moment please. . . .................................................................................................41900
No. 1905-1902 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............41900
No. 1920-#### Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. .............................41900
No. 1921-#### Capacity Booster Key was detected. ......................................................................................41900
No. 1922-1926 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............41900
No. 1930 Turn ON the Flatbed Scanner. .........................................................................................................41900
No. 1931 Paper type is incorrect. Confirm the Test Print. .............................................................................41900
No. 1932 Make sure that the Test Print is placed correctly. ............................................................................41900
No. 1933-1081 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............41900
No. 1946 Foreign matter was detected on the flatbed scanner. Remove foreign matter from the flatbed scanner
glass surface or test print and measure again. ...................................................................................................41900
No. 1947-1081 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............41900
No. 1959-1972 Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .41900
No. 1977 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for the Corrective action of Attention message. ..................41900
No. 1979-1982 Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .41900
Attention message: Compact Archive Unit/Edit ................................................................... 43370
No. 3371-4052 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............43370
Attention message: QSS-Kids ............................................................................................. 44250
No. 4250-4308 Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ...........44250
Attention message: Bravo II ................................................................................................ 44350
No. 4350-4358 Refer to the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............44350
4000 3/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4000
4 Troubleshooting
No. 5517 The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 ........................................................................................45500
No. 5518 The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 ........................................................................................45500
No. 5519 Thermosensor error. CD ..................................................................................................................45500
No. 5520 Thermosensor error. BF ...................................................................................................................45500
No. 5521 Thermosensor error. STB ................................................................................................................45500
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. ..............................................................................................................45500
No. 5524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W ............................................................................................45500
No. 5525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W ............................................................................................45500
No. 5526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ........................................................................................45500
No. 5527 Refilling water operation error. STB2-W ........................................................................................45500
No. 5528 Refilling water operation error. STB3-W ........................................................................................45500
No. 5529 Refilling water operation error. STB4-W ........................................................................................45500
Error message: Processor 2 ................................................................................................ 45530
No. 5530 The Processor Top Cover is open. ...................................................................................................45530
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. .............................................................45530
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. ....................................................................................45530
No. 5534 Print Sorter Unit operation error. .....................................................................................................45530
No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. ....................................................................................45530
No. 5538 Backup data error. Processor ..........................................................................................................45530
No. 5543 The dryer cover is removed. ............................................................................................................45530
No. 5545 Print Sensor (Left) error. ..................................................................................................................45530
No. 5546 Print Sensor error. ............................................................................................................................45530
No. 5547 Print Sensor (Right) error. ...............................................................................................................45530
No. 5549 Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. .................................................................45530
No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. ................................................................................................................45530
No. 5552 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. ........................................................................................45530
4000 4/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4000
4 Troubleshooting
No. 5703[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W .........................................................................45700
No. 5704[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A ...........................................................................45700
No. 5705[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B ...........................................................................45700
No. 5706[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB .............................................................................45700
No. 5708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ..................................................................45700
No. 5709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ..................................................................45700
No. 5710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W ...................................................................................45700
No. 5711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W ....................................................................................45700
No. 5712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...............................................................................45700
No. 5713[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB2-W ...............................................................................45700
No. 5714[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB3-W ...............................................................................45700
No. 5715[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB4-W ...............................................................................45700
4000 5/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4000
4 Troubleshooting
No. 5913[F] An error occurred in the replenisher section. ..............................................................................45900
No. 5914[F] Temperature and humidity sensor error. .....................................................................................45900
No. 5916[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1 ..............................45900
No. 5917[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2 ..............................45900
No. 5918[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1 ............................45900
No. 5919[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS2 ............................45900
No. 5920[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS3 ............................45900
No. 5921[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS4 ............................45900
No. 5922[F] Replenisher section door is open. ...............................................................................................45900
No. 5923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank. ...............................................................................45900
4000 6/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4000
4 Troubleshooting
No. 6104 Printer Door is open. ........................................................................................................................46000
No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. .....................................................................................................46000
No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. .....................................................................................................46000
No. 6107 R Laser temperature is out of range. ................................................................................................46000
No. 6135 Arm Unit 1 operation error. .............................................................................................................46000
No. 6136 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. .......................................................46000
No. 6137 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. .......................................................46000
No. 6144 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor operation error. ................................................................46000
No. 6145 Lane Select Motor operation error. ..................................................................................................46000
No. 6146 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. ....................................................................................46000
No. 6147 Turn Motor operation error. .............................................................................................................46000
No. 6148 Paper End Sensor A error. ...............................................................................................................46000
No. 6149 Paper End Sensor B error. ...............................................................................................................46000
No. 6151 Paper Loading Sensor error. ............................................................................................................46000
No. 6152 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. .....................................................................................46000
No. 6153 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. ...................................................................................46000
4000 7/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4000
4 Troubleshooting
No. 6208 Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit. ..................................................................................46100
No. 6209 Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit. ..........................................................................46100
No. 6210 Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. .........................................................................................46100
No. 6211 Paper remains in the Exposure Advance Unit. ................................................................................46100
Error message: Scanner ...................................................................................................... 46300
No. 6303-6337 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message. .....................46300
Error message: Film carrier ................................................................................................. 46400
No. 6400-6446 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message. .....................46400
No. 6447-6459 Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message. ........46400
Error message: Disk/Media ................................................................................................. 46500
No. 6506 Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s). .................................................................46500
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................ 46550
No. 6551 Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. .....................................................................................46550
No. 6554 Calibration Plate advance error. ......................................................................................................46550
Error message: Pricing unit ................................................................................................. 46600
No. 6600 Pricing Unit communication error. ..................................................................................................46600
No. 6601-## Pricing Unit operation error. ......................................................................................................46600
No. 6602 Pricing Unit Printer operation error. ................................................................................................46600
No. 6603 Backup data error. PU .....................................................................................................................46600
Error: NMC .......................................................................................................................... 46620
No. 6620 Remote Control was not finished. ...................................................................................................46620
No. 6621 Could not connect to the server. ......................................................................................................46620
No. 6622 There is no backup data in the server. .............................................................................................46620
No. 6623 Noritsu-eNET was not started. ........................................................................................................46620
Error message: Software upgrade ....................................................................................... 46802
No. 6803 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English. ...............................46802
4000 8/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4000
4 Troubleshooting
No. 8361 Archive File read error. ....................................................................................................................48350
No. 8362 Archive File write error. ..................................................................................................................48350
No. 8363 Compact Archive Unit processing error. .........................................................................................48350
No. 8364 Compact Archive Unit cannot be used. ...........................................................................................48350
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................. 49000
No. 9000 Edit mode System error. .................................................................................................................49000
No. 9001 Edit mode Information file error. ....................................................................................................49000
No. 9002 Edit mode Image data error. ...........................................................................................................49000
No. 9003 Edit mode Image read error. ...........................................................................................................49000
Error message: QSS-Kids ................................................................................................... 49250
No. 9250-9311 For error corrective action, refer to QSS-Kids Service Manual. ...........................................49250
Error message: Bravo II ....................................................................................................... 49350
No. 9350-9376 For error corrective action, refer to Bravo II Service Manual. ..............................................49350
4000 9/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4001
Error and attention message regulation
Error and attention message regulation
! Attention message
The message informed through the normal processing appears
as an attention message.
• When the replacement of consumable parts is necessary
• When the judgment of operator is necessary
• When a simple operation mistake has been made
! Error
The message informed when some abnormal error occurs
appears as an error.
• When there is something wrong with the system
• When a serious operation mistake has been made,
performing the operation not allowed to be performed
4. Troubleshooting
! Error/Attention message number
Error/Attention message number are separated to main and
suffix numbers. In case of 1234-0001, 1234 is the main
number and 0001 is the suffix number.
Main number
It distinguishes the content of Error/Attention message.
Operator takes a corrective action judging with the content of
the main number and the countermeasure.
Main number
Error 0001 to 4999
Attention message 5000 to 9999
Suffix number
It distinguishes error occurring place and condition.
Service personnel figures out the error occurring condition
judging with the content of the suffix number and performs
the diagnosis.
NOTE
• For the content of suffix number, refer to Descriptions of
suffix number.
☞ 4002
4001 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4002
Error and attention message regulation
Suffix number display For example, 3 is for the multiple condition of 1 and 2,
and 5 is for that of 4 and 1.
! The types of suffix number display ! How to determine the condition from
the total of bit operation
The procedure for bringing up the suffix number is classified
in the following three types. This section describes the procedure of determining the target
• Without suffix number condition from the displayed suffix number without the
knowledge of the bit operation theory.
• Displaying the condition with suffix number
• Displaying the total of bit operation with suffix number
1. Divide the displayed suffix number into each
digit.
! Without suffix number
NOTE
When the occurring condition is single • When the displayed suffix number is 13, it is
Example 1 divided into 1 and 3.
4. Troubleshooting
! Displaying the condition with suffix number (Object table)
If the occurring condition is multiple and only one of them is
Suffix number display Suffix number (bit)
the object of the occurring cause, its suffix number appears
with four digits. F 8 4 2 1
E 8 4 2
Example 2
D 8 4 1
Suffix Condition C 8 4
number
B 8 2 1
0001 The sensor has not turned to DARK.
A 8 2
0002 The sensor has not turned to LIGHT.
9 8 1
8 8
! Displaying the total of bit operation with suffix
number 7 4 2 1
6 4 2
If the occurring condition is multiple and some of them are
possible to be the objects of the occurring cause, the total of 5 4 1
the target suffix numbers (bit) appears. 4 4
NOTE 3 2 1
• The bit operation value appears by hexadecimal digit. 2 2
Example 3 1 1
0
Suffix Condition
number NOTE
(bit)
• It can be calculated by replacing the suffix number
0001 The sensor 1 does not detect. of hexadecimal digit with decimal and assigning it
0002 The sensor 2 does not detect. from the larger number.
0004 The sensor 3 does not detect. 3. Add 0 to the second digit or later to make the
0008 The sensor 4 does not detect. number of digits same as the original one.
0010 The sensor 5 does not detect. NOTE
• 1→10 (second digit), 2 and 1 are remained (first
NOTE digit).
• When the sensors 1 and 3 of example 3 are the objects,
• For the second digit, add 0 once. For the third
0005 appears. When all the sensors are the objects, 001F
digit, add 0 two times.
appears.
• The suffix number (bit) assigned to each condition is
necessarily consisted of 1, 2, 4, 8 and 0.
As for the bit display, the other 3, 5, 6, 7... are used for
the multiple conditions.
4002 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4002
Error and attention message regulation
(Example of determining) with the decimal digit and three digits with the
hexadecimal digit.
13 4C0 Thus, the number of digits can be less when there are
↓ ↓ more combinations which can be expressed as one digit.
Divide into each digit.
NOTE
1 3 4 C (12) 0
• A to F of the hexadecimal digit are handled as a number
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
in the operation.
Replace with the suffix number of each condition.
(Conversion table)
1 2, 1 4 8, 4 Not in use
Return the number of digits by adding 0. Hexadecimal Decimal numeral Binary number
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ numeral
10 2, 1 400 80, 40 Not in use 0 0 0
↓ ↓ 1 1 1
10, 2 and 1 400, 80 and 40 are the objects. 2 2 10
are the objects.
3 3 11
4 4 100
4. Check each condition by the target suffix 5 5 101
number (bit), and specify the occurring
6 6 110
condition.
4. Troubleshooting
7 7 111
NOTE
8 8 1000
• When the suffix number of 13 appears in the
condition of example 3, the numbers of 1, 2 and 9 9 1001
10 are the objects of the suffix numbers (bit). A 10 1010
From this, the occurring condition is recognized as B 11 1011
The sensors 1, 2 and 5 do not detect.
C 12 1100
Example 3 D 13 1101
Object Suffix Condition E 14 1110
number F 15 1111
(bit) 10 16 10000
$ 0001 The sensor 1 does not detect. FF 255 11111111
$ 0002 The sensor 2 does not detect. 3FF 1023 1111111111
0004 The sensor 3 does not detect.
0008 The sensor 4 does not detect.
Bit operation
$ 0010 The sensor 5 does not detect.
• When assigning sensor 1 of example 3 to the first digit
and sensor 2 to the second digit as in order, the bit
NOTE operation value is as follows in the case that only each
• To know more details of the bit operation mechanism, condition is ON.
refer to the following explanatory notes. This hexadecimal digit value is assigned as the bit of
single condition.
Digit When multiple conditions are the objects, the total bit
• Binary digit is the basic value of computer calculation assigned to each condition appears.
and expresses the state of ON and OFF of the signal.
Condition Suffix number (bit)
A digit of the binary digit is called as bit. It expresses two
types of numbers, 0 and 1, as one digit. Hexadecim Decimal Binary
When there are two types of bit (condition), it is al numeral numeral number
expressed by the binary digit with two digits and called as Sensor 1 1 1 1
2 bit. Sensor 2 2 2 10
• Decimal digit is generally used to express ten kinds of Sensor 3 4 4 100
numbers, 0 to 9, as one digit.
Sensor 4 8 8 1000
The combinations expressed as one digit are ten kinds.
Sensor 5 10 16 10000
• Hexadecimal digit is used to express 16 kinds of
numbers, 0 to F, as one digit. The combinations
expressed as one digit are 16 kinds.
• Each digit can be converted into other digits.
When there are ten types of conditions, it is 10 bit (ten
digits) by expressing with the binary digit, four digits
4002 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4002
Error and attention message regulation
4. Troubleshooting
4002 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) [35, 35i]
For how to confirm condition of wiring connection failure and conditions, refer to ☞ Checking condition of wiring connection failure.
! PC (35, 35i)
4. Troubleshooting
Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.
4200 1/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
4. Troubleshooting
pressure change sensor 1, 2,
the exposure start sensor and
the exposure end sensor.
J/P208 Connects the paper advance The system starts up normally.
motor 1. No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs when printing is started in
the PJP mode.
J/P209 Connects the paper hold No. 6101-0002 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
motor, cut motor, paper
advance motor 2, paper
supply arm motor right and
paper supply arm motor left
J/P210 Connects the paper hold No. 6016-0005 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
sensor, cut home sensor, cut No. 6101-0002 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
end sensor, paper loading
sensor and paper end sensor
A
J/P211 Connects to paper advance No. 6146-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
motor 3, paper advance
pressure change motor, turn
motor and paper advance
arm motor.
J/P212 Connects the lane select No.6145-0001 Lane Select Motor operation error. occurs.
motor and the lane select
sensor. (For 3502)
J/P213 Arm sensor, Turn sensor, No. 6146-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
Paper advance pressure
change sensor
J/P214 Lane select sensor No. 6145-0002 Lane Select Motor operation error. occurs.
(3502)
J/P215 Connects to the SW/LED The PC does not start automatically. Prints can be made normally after starting up the PC
PCB. forcibly.
J/P216 Connects to the buzzer. The buzzer does not sound.
J/P217 Connects the printer control The printer control box cooling fan (FAN24) and inner cooling fan (FAN23) do not work.
box cooling fan (FAN24)
and inner cooling fan
(FAN23)
J/P218 Connects the counter The counter does not operate.
(option).
J/P219 Connects the interlock No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
switch (printer door 1, 2).
4200 2/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
4. Troubleshooting
the dual paper magazine occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
PCB.
J/P229 Roller Move Motor (for 35i) No. 6185-0002 Roller Move Motor operation error. occurs.
ARCNET No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. occurs.
J/P232, 233 • For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm the ARCNET communication
diagnosis manual.
J/P1502 Connects to the G-AOM The system starts up normally. The print whose color is green only is made.
driver.
J/P1503 Connects to the R-AOM The system starts up normally. The print whose color is light pink only is made.
driver.
J/P1506 Inputs the power supply (+5 No.6901-0009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor occurs. The alarm
V) from laser power supply. (buzzer) does not sound.
No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs.
J/P1508 Connects to the B, G and R- The system starts up normally. The paper is fed and No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error.
AOM drivers. occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
J/P1513 Connects to the PC interface No.6194-0008 Laser Control PCB control error. occurs.
(LVPECL)
J/P1515 Connects to the laser unit. The system starts up normally. The paper is fed and No. 6076-0001 Polygon Mirror control
error. occurs when printing is started in the PJP mode.
4200 3/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
4. Troubleshooting
J/P1542 Connects to the B-AOM The system starts up normally. The print whose color is blue only is made.
driver.
J/P1543 Connects to the G-AOM The system starts up normally. The print whose color is green only is made.
driver.
J/P1544 Connects to the R-AOM The system starts up normally. The print whose color is pink only is made.
driver.
J/P1551 Connects laser unit cooling Laser unit cooling fan 1, 2, laser control box cooling fan 1, 2 and 3, and laser unit heater do
fan 1, 2, laser control box not operate.
cooling fan 1, 2, 3 and laser Any malfunction in the operations does not occur on this condition.
unit heater.
4200 4/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
4. Troubleshooting
negative. appears on the Order display.
J/P1522 Connects the inner The system starts up normally. Paper Temperature Correction function of Master Data is
thermosensor. being used, the quality may be affected.
0 appears in the Inner Thermosensor field at Input Check.
J/P1541 Inputs the power supply The system starts up normally.
(+24 V) from printer power If printing is started from the PJP mode, icon "Printing" blinks.
supply 4. The paper is advanced to the exposure advance unit, but the system does not start printing
and the error does not occur.
J/P1654 Connects to the laser control No.6074-0007 B Laser control error. occurs.
PCB.
J/P1655 Inputs the power supply (+5 When Laser temperatures are being adjusted. About ##sec of the order display is
V) from laser power supply. completed, No.6105-0001 B Laser light source status error. occurs.
4200 5/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
4. Troubleshooting
Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.
4200 6/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
4. Troubleshooting
PCB. forcibly. The alarm (buzzer) does not sound.
J/P328 Supplies the power to the
printer control PCB (+5 V).
4200 7/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4200
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
4. Troubleshooting
J/P412 Supplies power to the laser
control PCB, B laser driver
PCB and G laser driver PCB
(+5 V, GND)
4200 8/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4203
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
For how to confirm condition of wiring connection failure and conditions, refer to ☞ Checking condition of wiring connection failure.
4. Troubleshooting
J/P674, 675 • For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm the ARCNET communication
diagnosis manual.
J/P676 Power supply from the No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
processor power supply (+5
V)
J/P677 Connects to the processor No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
relay PCB. No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs.
No. 0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
J/P679 Connects to the No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
replenishment solution level
sensor
Connects the refilling water No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
tank level sensor
J/P680 Connects the STB4 No. 5518 The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 occurs.
circulation pump.
Connects the STB3 No. 5517 The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 occurs.
circulation pump.
Connects the STB2 No. 5516 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
circulation pump.
Connects the STB1 No. 5515 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 occurs.
circulation pump.
Connects the BF circulation No. 5513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
pump.
Connects the CD circulation No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
pump.
J/P681 Supplies the power from the No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
processor relay PCB (+24 V). No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
J/P682 Processing tank cooling fan Processing tank cooling fans 1, 2, 3 and 4 do not work.
1, 2, 3 and 4
J/P683 Connects to the effluent float No. 0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
switch.
J/P684 Connects to the refilling The refilling water pump and the cleaning pump do not operate.
water pump and the cleaning
pump.
4203 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4203
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
4. Troubleshooting
No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
J/P689 Connects the chilling unit. No malfunction occurs on this condition.
J/P691 Connects the processor The processor status lamp does not light.
condition lamp.
J/P692 Connects to the manual Even though the manual sorter switch is pressed, the conveyor unit does not operate.
sorter switch
J/P693 Connects the sorter unit. No. 5534-0001 Print Sorter Unit operation error. occurs when prints are fed out of the dryer,
and the conveyor unit does not operate.
J/P694 Connects the conveyor unit. The conveyor unit does not operate.
J/P696 Connects the paper advance When performing the dairy setup, No.6554-0001 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs.
motor, pressure change By Output Check, the paper advance motor, pressure change solenoid and cooling fan do not
solenoid and cooling fan operate.
J/P698 Connects the chilling unit. No malfunction occurs on this condition.
J/P699 Connects the minute meter The hour meter does not operate.
J/P702 Connects the drive motor. No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
J/P703 Connects the paper sensor When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0003 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs.
(emission PCB) and paper
sensor 1 and 2 (detection
PCB).
J/P704 Connects to the colorimeter. The display of initializing colorimeter unit disappears, No.6903-0002 Serial communication
error. colorimeter occurs.
J/P705 Connecting the print sensor The system does not operate even though the print is put on the conveyor unit.
(3501 and 3501i) If over 5 prints are printed, No.5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. occurs.
Connects the print sensor
(right) (left).
(3502)
J/P706 Lane select home sensor No.5552 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. occurs.
J/P708 Dryer lane select motor No.5552 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. occurs.
4203 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4203
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
4. Troubleshooting
V).
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
J/P651 Connects to the processor No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
control PCB. No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs.
No. 0518 Set the Dryer Cover. occurs.
J/P652 Connects the refilling water No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
tank level sensor
J/P653 Connects the processor No malfunction occurs on this condition.
control PCB.
J/P654 Inputs the power (+24 V) All the systems do not start.
from processor power
supply.
J/P655 Connector for setting the All the dryer heater do not operate.
input voltage of the dryer
heater.
J/P656 Connects the dryer safety No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
thermostat.
J/P657 Connects the dryer fan. No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P658 Connects the drive motor. No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
J/P659 Connects the interlock switch No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. occurs.
(processor top cover).
4203 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4203
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring
4. Troubleshooting
! Checking condition of wiring connection failure
In the table below, it explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned ON with each connector
unplugged (for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fan does not rotate, or the like).
IMPORTANT
• This only describes the symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse when the connectors to each PCB are not plugged.
• For the PCBs of the processor, the PCBs only for normal specifications are mentioned.
• As for the optional PCBs, only some of them are described about.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the system on condition that a connector is
unplugged from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the connector in
the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the equipped options, cable connecting position and/or ARCNET communication
feature.
4203 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4252
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
For how to check the fuse blowout and conditions, refer to ☞ Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse.
4. Troubleshooting
from printer power supply 2)
F34 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No. 6101-0001 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
+24 V input power supply
from printer power supply 2)
F35 T3.15 A/125 V (protection of No. 6146-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor operation error. occurs.
+24 V input power supply
from printer power supply 2)
F36 T2.0 A/125 V (protection of The system starts up normally. No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs
+36 V input power supply when printing is started in the PJP mode.
from printer power supply 3)
F37 T2.0 A/125 V (protection of The system starts up normally. No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs
+36 V input power supply when printing is started in the PJP mode.
from printer power supply 3)
! CVP PCB
Refer to electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.
4252 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4252
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
4. Troubleshooting
input power supply No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
protection)
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
F18 T3.15 A/125 V (AC24 V-5 No.5552-0001 Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error. occurs.
input power supply
protection)
! Power supply
For each power supply PCB, the fuse has not been confirmed because it is irremovable.
4252 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4252
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
4. Troubleshooting
4252 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart
The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear
from the Net Order display. [35]
! Checking procedure
1. Confirm that the system is used in the environment of room temperature 15°C to 30°C.
2. Restart the system.
3. Check if the displayed temperature on Laser Unit Thermosensor goes up when turning on the laser
unit heater via Output Check.
Check if laser unit cooling fan 1/2 operate when turning on laser unit cooling fan 1/2 via Output Check.
☞ 35310
4. Check if the displayed temperatures of the laser unit temperature sensor and R laser temperature
sensor change via Output Check.
☞ 35210
5. If there is a change in the displayed temperature, wait for a while. If the temperature does not change,
check the unit for faults.
4. Troubleshooting
Symptom Cause
☞ The display of Laser temperatures is being adjusted. (U) The temperatures are not within the processable range of the laser
remains unit (17.0°C to 42.0°C).
☞ The display of Laser temperatures is being adjusted. (R) remains The temperatures are not within the processable range of R laser
(27.7°C to 28.3°C).
2. Make a diagnosis via the displayed temperature on the laser unit temperature sensor.
Checking point Checking content How to check Failure part
Laser unit heater Laser unit heater resistance value Remove P855 (relay) and measure the Laser unit (laser unit heater)
resistance value between Pin 1 and 2. It is
normal if the resistance value is 15 ± 1.5 Ω.
Laser Unit Laser unit thermosensor resistance Remove P1526 (relay) and measure the Laser unit (laser unit
Thermosensor *1 value resistance value between Pin 1 and 3. It is thermosensor)
normal if the resistance value is the same as
the value in the list below.*1
Laser control PCB Laser unit thermosensor standard It is normal if the voltage between Pin 3 (+) Laser control PCB
voltage of P1522 and the ground is 1.0 V.
Power supply to the laser unit It is normal if the voltage between Pin 7 (+)
heater*2 of P1551 and Pin 8 is as follows.
• When the heater is turned on: 24 V
• When the heater is turned off: 0 V
*1. The list below shows laser unit thermosensor resistance values by temperature.
*2. Check the status by turning on the Laser unit heater on Output Check.
4302 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart
☞ 35310
2. Make a diagnosis via the displayed temperature on the R laser unit temperature sensor.
Checking point Checking content How to check Failure part
R laser temperature Peltier control voltage If the voltage between Pin 10 (+) and 11 (−) Laser unit (R laser
control section of J1532 is over -2 V and less than 0 V temperature control section)
• When heated: greater than -2 V and
less than 0 V
• When cooled: equal to or greater than 0
V and less than 2 V
4. Troubleshooting
R Laser R laser unit thermosensor resistance Remove J1532 and measure the resistance Laser unit (R laser unit
Thermosensor*1 value value between Pin 7 (+) and 8(−). It is thermosensor)
normal if the resistance value is the same as
the value in the list below.*1
Laser control PCB R laser unit thermosensor standard It is normal if the standard voltage between Laser control PCB
voltage Pin 7 (+) and 6 (−) of J1532 is 1 V.
R laser unit thermosensor It is normal if the voltage between Pin 8 (+)
measuring voltage and 6 (−) of J1532 is around 350 mV under
28°C temperature.
*1. The list below shows R laser thermosensor resistance values by temperature.
4302 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4390
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35]
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35]
NOTE
• ← in the list below is the paper advance direction.
4. Troubleshooting
The light density line (white) in • Clean the glass surface of the laser unit.
the paper advance direction is Refer to ☞ Cleaning the laser dustproof glass.
occurred. • Clean the focal plane regulating guide of the
exposure advance unit.
• Replace the following parts if there is no
improvement after cleaning the laser unit and
exposure advance unit.
Exposure advance unit
Laser unit
The print whose color is light • Check the connection status between the laser
purple only is made. control PCB and B-AOM driver.
• Check the connection status between B laser
driver and laser unit.
• Replace the following parts if no improvement
can be recognized after checking any
The print whose color is blue connection failure.
only is made. B-AOM driver
B laser driver
Laser unit
The print whose color is green • Check the connection status between the laser
only is made. control PCB−G-AOM driver.
• Check the connection status between G laser
driver and laser unit.
• Replace the following parts if no improvement
can be recognized after checking any
connection failure.
G-AOM driver
G laser driver
Laser unit
4390 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4390
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35]
4. Troubleshooting
The stripped pattern like a wavy
line in the whole part of print is
occurred.
The light color is appeared in • Process the control strip and check the color of
unexposure position. the white part. If the problem occurs, the
chemical has deteriorated. Replace the
chemical.
• Shield the center of the laser dustproof glass
cover of the laser unit with a splicing tape and
make a setup print. If there is a difference
between the unexposed position shielded by the
splicing tape and regular unexposed position,
the abnormal print is caused by leakage of laser
beam.
• Replace the laser unit.
4390 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4390
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35]
4. Troubleshooting
Banding is occurred. ☞ 25820
White/black lines (Horizontal) ☞ 36090
1. Open the exposure advance unit and clean the laser dustproof glass using the attached cleaning sheet
(soft cloth).
IMPORTANT
• When cleaning the laser dustproof glass, clean it with the soft cloth in the direction from far to near or from near
to far at one stroke.
• If cleaning several times, wipe in the same direction. If wiping in the opposite direction, the dust which has been
removed adheres on the dustproof glass again. Use the different side of the cleaning cloth every time in order
not to adhere the removed dust again.
• Do not use the alcohol when cleaning. Using alcohol may affect the print quality.
G085852
4390 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4470
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i]
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i]
! Explanation
If an abnormal image occurs, diagnose referring to the trouble list below.
NOTE
• ↑ in the list below is the paper advance direction.
4. Troubleshooting
Paper Width line Example: 89 mm or 127 mm NOTE
• The paper width line does not
occur due to the iBeam unit
failure.
• For details, refer to
☞ Appearing the paper width
line [35i].
203 mm
4470 1/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4470
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i]
YES
YES
YES
The line occurs in the image saved from a film ☞ Inputting side is not good. (around the
to a media. scanner and around the AFC)
NO
4. Troubleshooting
YES
NO
NO
NO
4470 2/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4470
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i]
! Inputting side is not good. (around the scanner and around the AFC)
4. Troubleshooting
Lens unit
G078470
2. Clean the scanner lens and the LED light source unit glass.
G078471
3. After cleaning the AFC, the scanner and the LED light source unit, perform the Light Source Update.
4. If the condition is not improved after cleaning the AFC, the scanner and the LED light source unit, the
LED light source unit or the Scanner unit may be defective.
4470 3/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4470
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i]
1. Clean the focal plane regulating guide of the exposure advance unit.
4. Troubleshooting
G082678
iBeam unit
G082676
4470 4/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4470
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i]
1. Confirm that the image scanned with the flatbed scanner at iBeam Tuning.
If the scanned image is not normal, confirm the connection, replace or reinstall the driver software of the flatbed scanner.
IMPORTANT
• Save the result of the scanned image to C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\Tmp.
Three images of PreScan Tmp (prescanning image), ScanTmp_Left (scanning image: left) or
ScanTmp_Right (scanning image: right) are saved in Tmp.
• The image data in Tmp is overwrote every time you perform iBeam Tuning. If reset the power supply, the
image data in Tmp will be deleted.
4. Troubleshooting
G082762
2. If the error occur in scanning the image data, confirm it referring to the diagnosis in Chapter 4.
4470 5/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4470
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i]
Line
G082764
! Cause
The error above occurs if you print in condition that the focal plane regulating guide is not securely attached.
4. Troubleshooting
! Corrective action
Check that the focal plane regulating guide is securely attached.
G082679
4470 6/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4470
Diagnosis appendix: Abnormal image countermeasure manual [35i]
Example: 89 mm or 127 mm
203 mm
G082762
4. Troubleshooting
! Cause
The error above occur when printing with the bigger size paper (203 mm etc.) after you print hundreds of images with the smaller size
paper (89 mm etc.) repeatedly.
The paper width line does not occur due to the iBeam unit failure.
! Corrective action
Carry out iBeam Tuning via Paper Specification Registration/Setup to delete the line.
For the details of iBeam Tuning, refer to ☞ 32511.
4470 7/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4500
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner
The following table shows the conditions and the corrective action when error messages appear.
4. Troubleshooting
There is insufficient memory. The memory of the personal computer is not Decrease the resolution or make the frame for
enough. image smaller.
There is nothing to scan. There is no copy on the copy deck. Place the copy correctly.
Cancel When the user interrupt the previewing or scanning Carry out the same previewing or scanning
Quit the process. operation operation again after deleting the message in
the message box.
There is insufficient space left on The hard disk space is not enough. Decrease the resolution or make the frame for
the hard disk. image smaller.
The copy may be improperly When the copy is protruded from the deck Place the copy on the deck not to protrude.
positioned.
When the copy is not protruded from it, release
the error message and enlarge or move the
image frame to fit the image.
Capturing communication error When using the FB scanner with QSS software Check the conditions shown on the left and
while using the FB scanner with another software then start the FB scanner execution display by
When the power of FB scanner is OFF pressing Preview again on the Order Display.
When the cable is not connected properly to USB
port 1 or SCSI2 which the FB scanner has been
connected to
All Data included the Tone Curve When the Setting Initialization button is clicked If you would like to initialize, select OK. If
and the Save Data are initialized. on the FB scanner execution display not, select Cancel.
Are you sure you want to initialize
them?
Cut Position Error When the upper left corner of brought area is Press the Preview button again.
recognized as placed in a wrong position (The
position of copy is not wrong.)
Cut Angle Error When the inner angle of brought area is not
recognized 90-degree (The angle of copy is not
wrong.)
DLL Load Completed When trying to load the DLL again although it is Quit the message display and execution display
already loaded of FB scanner by pressing the CLOSE button
DLL Load Failed When the DLL is not recognized as already and restart the FB scanner execution display by
installed pressing YES key in the order display.
When the installation of DLL is failed
The DLL was not loaded. When the DLL is not loaded
4500 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4500
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner
IMPORTANT
• If the messages of DLL Load Completed, DLL Load Failed or The DLL was not loaded. appears repeatedly, the DLL
data may be damaged or broken. Reinstall the QSS software as a corrective action. Refer to the PC Service Manual.
NOTE
• DLL is a driver for running the FB scanner execution display on the Order Display of QSS.
Location: My Computer\C\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Exe\NKC_ImageFBScan.dll
4. Troubleshooting
4500 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4600
Diagnosis appendix: F replenishment
Diagnosis appendix: F replenishment
The replenisher section door is open. Check the setting of the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section
Door).
YES
NO
Remove the processor rear cover or open the replenisher section door.
NOTE
• If the replenisher section door does not open, unlock the door inserting the driver through the door gap.
Refer to ☞ How to open/close the replenisher section door.
4. Troubleshooting
Remove the replenishment cartridge.
If the replenishment cartridge is in the lower position, move the replenishment cartridge installation section to the upper position in the Output Check,
and remove the replenishment cartridge.
Confirm that there is no objects in the replenishment cartridge installation section.
Not operating
The operation sound of opening motor is heard. Confirm that the drive systems such as gear operate normally.
Yes
No
4600 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4600
Diagnosis appendix: F replenishment
Slits
Lever
4. Troubleshooting
Processor rear cover
G085896
4600 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4610
Diagnosis appendix: F replenishment
NO
YES NO
4. Troubleshooting
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are all ON.
NO YES
• Add water until all the replenishment solution level sensors turn ON while checking the
status of P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA (Upper)
Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor at Input Check.
IMPORTANT
• When the replenishment solution level sensor turns ON, immediately stop adding
water.
Adding too much water may cause the following errors.
After the problems are solved, perform Manual Open in F: Functions of Pump Output
Amount Setting and initialize the replenishment data.
☞ 33030
4610 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
4620
Diagnosis appendix: F replenishment
The solution levels (P1R/P2RA/P2RB) are even at the ### YES P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA
(upper) replenishment solution level sensor. (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are all ON.
NO YES
NO
4. Troubleshooting
After the problems are solved, perform Manual Open in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.
☞ 33030
4620 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40500
Attention message: Processor
Attention message: Processor
4. Troubleshooting
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 carried out.
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40500 1/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40500
Attention message: Processor
4. Troubleshooting
F15 Processor control PCB
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40500 2/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40500
Attention message: Processor
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point NOTE
1 Check that the print receiving tray and the print full • The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump,
sensor are not soiled. and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch
(processor top cover) turns OFF.
Diagnosis
Check Point
Failed parts Manual No.
1 • Check that the rack stopper is securely placed.
Print full sensor ☞ 63510
• Check that the processor top cover is securely
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 closed.
NOTE
Diagnosis
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Failed parts Manual No.
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 Interlock switch (processor top cover) ☞ 63290
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40500 3/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40500
Attention message: Processor
4. Troubleshooting
motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.
Check Point
Check Point
1 Check if all pieces of paper come out.
1 Check that the dryer section or dryer cover is securely
attached.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63290
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40500 4/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40500
Attention message: Processor
4. Troubleshooting
the print with over 420 mm of the paper advance
length at the print sensor Suffix Condition
number
- When the first print of the next order entered at the
time of detecting the rear end of the print with over 0001 Print Sensor (Left) (3502)
420 mm of the paper advance length at the print Print Sensor (3501, 3501i)
sensor 0002 Print Sensor (Right) (3502)
Check Point
1 Clean each sensor using a blower brush.
2 Carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment in Functions of Print Sensor
Adjustment.
Refer to ☞ 33001.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Print sensor ☞ 63510
(3501 and 3501i)
Print sensor (right) (left)
(3502)
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40500 5/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40600
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
tablet even though the CD Drum motor
was started. Wiring diagram
No. 0601 BF Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect ☞ 89000
tablet even though the BF Drum motor
was started.
No. 0602 STB Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect
tablet even though the STB Drum motor
was started.
NOTE
• Printing can be performed until the Reservoir Count reaches
Drop Limit if Order Display→Processor
Status→Change→Tablet Drop Reservoir is set to ON.
(Tablet Drop is not to be carried out but water supply.)
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Tablet Sensor ☞ 63310
Drum motor
Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40600 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40600
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE elevator.
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) No. 0606 The BF Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT
when you attempted to operate a drum or
Wiring diagram elevator.
☞ 89000 No. 0607 The STB Cartridge Sensor turned LIGHT
when you attempted to operate a drum or
elevator.
NOTE
• Printing can be performed until the Reservoir Count reaches
Drop Limit if Order Display→Processor
Status→Change→Tablet Drop Reservoir is set to ON.
(Tablet Drop is not to be carried out but water supply.)
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Cartridge Sensor ☞ 63310
Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40600 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40600
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment
Condition NOTE
• If the Effluent Float Switch turns ON, all water supply pumps
Suffix Condition and cleaning pumps stops physically.
number
- All tablets of CD in a kit are dropped. Condition
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• At the removal of two solutions, when the suffix number 04
appears, BF+STB will appear.
Check Point
1 Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves
up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Effluent float switch ☞ 63290
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40600 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40700
Attention message: SM replenishment
Attention message: SM replenishment
Check Point
No. 0700[SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with 1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not
soiled.
a new one.P-#
Diagnosis
Attention message release
YES Adjustment failure point Manual No.
This attention message will be released only when the Sensitivity of the replenishment solution ☞ 27830
replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn OFF the sensor
replenishment package sensor once.)
Failed parts Manual No.
Condition
Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300
Suffix Condition SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
number
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
0001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not NOTE
refilled forcibly.
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
0002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not Wiring diagram
refilled forcibly. ☞ 89000
4. Troubleshooting
0004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not
refilled forcibly.
0008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not
refilled forcibly.
0010 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not
refilled forcibly.
0020 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not
refilled forcibly.
NOTE
• When the tank is not refilled forcibly whether or not to set SM
Replenishment Setting via Machine Specification, these
messages appear. When the following conditions, the tanks
are not refilled forcibly.
SM Detecting condition of the replenishment
Replenishment solution sensor
Setting
ON The replenishment solution is not detected
when the power is ON.
The replenishment solution is not detected
when the replenishment package is replaced.
The replenishment solution is not detected
during output checks.
The replenishment solution is not detected
while measuring the output amount.
The replenishment solution is not detected
while initial replenishing.
Each replenishment solution in the
replenishment package is not detected at the
same time.
OFF Forced replenishment is not carried out.
40700 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40700
Attention message: SM replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
Adjustment failure point Manual No. NOTE
Failure in the attaching position adjustment − • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
of the replenishment package sensor
Wiring diagram
Failed parts Manual No. ☞ 89000
Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40700 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40700
Attention message: SM replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
amount in data. amount in data.
☞ No. 5708[SM] ☞ No. 5708[SM]
• If the replenishment package is not replaced but • If the replenishment package is not replaced but
attached again, the process will be continued without attached again, the process will be continued without
initializing the remaining amount of the replenishment initializing the remaining amount of the replenishment
package. package.
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- Before the replenishment package is completely - Before the replenishment package is completely
empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns
OFF. OFF.
Diagnosis Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No. Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment − Failure in the attaching position adjustment −
of the replenishment package sensor of the replenishment package sensor
40700 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40700
Attention message: SM replenishment
NOTE
No. 0705[SM]
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Replace the Replenishment Package with
a new one.P-# Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
Attention message release
YES
This attention message will be released only when the
replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn OFF the
replenishment package sensor once.)
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
refilled forcibly.
0002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
4. Troubleshooting
refilled forcibly.
0004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
refilled forcibly.
0008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
refilled forcibly.
0010 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
refilled forcibly.
0020 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns
DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are
refilled forcibly.
NOTE
• If the tank is refilled forcibly after SM replenishment has been
set via Machine Specification, these messages appear.
• A suffix number is indicated by the hexadecimal numeral.
Check Point
1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not
soiled.
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution ☞ 27830
sensor
40700 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40900
Attention message: F replenishment
Attention message: F replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
• The power supply is turned on when PSR
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is Check Point
off.
Add PSR. -
Check Point Check the PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution ☞ 35220
Level Sensor status via Input Check.
Add PSR. -
Check the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution ☞ 35220 Diagnosis
Level Sensor status via Input Check.
Failed parts Manual No.
Diagnosis PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level ☞ 63311
Sensor
Failed parts Manual No. F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700
PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level ☞ 63311 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Sensor
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700 NOTE
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) ☞ 89000
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40900 1/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40900
Attention message: F replenishment
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor turns OFF when - The replenishment cover opens when cartridge
performing the cartridge opening process. opening process is performed.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis Check the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section ☞ 35220
Door) status via Input Check.
Failed parts Manual No.
Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor ☞ 63311 Diagnosis
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700
Failed parts Manual No.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ☞ 63311
NOTE F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Wiring diagram
NOTE
☞ 89000 • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40900 2/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40900
Attention message: F replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
Check the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor status via Input Check. For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 57010.
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40900 3/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40900
Attention message: F replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
creating the solution is automatically performed again. Check.
Check Point
Diagnosis
1 Set a new cartridge.
Blown fuses Manual No.
F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40900 4/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40900
Attention message: F replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
02 P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor: OFF
04 P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor: OFF
08 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor:
OFF
Check Point
Create the replenishment solution. -
Check each replenishment solution level sensors ☞ 35220
status via Input Check.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution ☞ 63311
Level Sensor
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor
• PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40900 5/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40900
Attention message: F replenishment
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
While preparing the replenishment solution, the system has The message appears when executing the following operation
printed up to the maximum number of printed sheets (approx. while refilling the water or creating the replenishment solution.
330 sheets for L size). • Close Down Checks, Output Check, Pump Output
Amount Measurement, Initial Replenishment Operation,
Check Point Manual Open, Software Upgrade etc.
4. Troubleshooting
40900 6/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
40900
Attention message: F replenishment
Condition
Suffix Condition
If all the (upper and lower) replenishment solution level sensors number
of P1R, P2RA and P2RB are turned on when starting the manual
0001 P1R
opening operation.
0002 P2RA
4. Troubleshooting
• For restarting the process without draining the 0004 P2RB
replenishment solution of P1R/P2RA/P2RB at the
countermeasure for replenishment error: the message For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 57010.
No.912 occurs if adding the water to the replenishment tank
and performing manual opening with turning on all the NOTE
(upper and lower) replenishment level solution sensors for • When any one of the (lower) replenishment solution level
P1R/P2RA/P2RB. sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB is on after clicking Manual
Open and Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open)
and a specified time has passed, ☞ No. 5923[F] occurs.
Countermeasure
1. Drain replenishment solution completely from the
replenishment tanks of P1R, P2RA and P2RB.
2. Perform Manual Open with each replenishment tank
empty.☞ 33030
Check Point
Check the status of # # # (lower) replenishment ☞ 35220
solution level sensors of each processing solution
with Input Check.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level ☞ 63311
Sensor
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
40900 7/7
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
Attention message: Printer
4. Troubleshooting
number when the power supply is ON, the daily setup is
- Paper end sensor A or B is turned LIGHT while carried out or after you replaced the paper magazine.
printing.
Model Details
Diagnosis 3501 1. When the paper size of the magazine which
Failed parts Manual No. 3501i is in use changes from narrow to wide: One
piece of paper is advanced by 200 mm
Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 61200 advance.
Dual paper magazine PCB (in case of B) ☞ 64190 NOTE
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 • Advancing a piece of paper by 200 mm
advance in detail 1 above is for cleaning
NOTE the processing rack.
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
2. For 3501i, two pieces of paper are advanced
Wiring diagram by 200 mm before printing the test print of
☞ 89000 iBeam Tuning.
NOTE
• If printing the test print of iBeam
Tuning, the paper is advanced for the
same purpose of when the paper size
changes from narrow to wide, because
the test prints are printed over the
maximum paper width of normal print.
Two pieces of paper are advanced
because the system advances paper in
both left and right directions against the
advancing direction.
3. Other than Details Nos. 1 and 2: One piece of
paper is advanced by 82.5 mm advance.
3502 1. One piece of paper is advanced by 82.5 mm
advance.
NOTE
• Refer to ☞ 55800 for other conditions.
41000 1/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- The paper magazine code sensor A or B cannot detect - The paper magazine is set which is different from the
the paper magazine code. (All the code sensors turn specified paper magazine prior to printing.
4. Troubleshooting
LIGHT.)
Check Point
Check Point
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not soiled.
soiled. 2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is correctly set.
correctly set. 3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it will go.
will go. 4 Check the print channel setting.
Diagnosis Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No. Adjustment failure point Manual No.
The adjusting position of the paper magazine ☞ 61050 The adjusting position of the paper magazine ☞ 61050
code sensor is defective. code sensor is defective.
41000 2/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
4. Troubleshooting
No.1013 Outputting. . .
longer time than the time for usual QSS start up when
turning ON the QSS, ARCNET communication error
NOTE may cause this situation.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
the QSS does not currently use may be described. • Check the ARCNET communication status on the
Version Check display.
☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm
the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service
Manual
PC interface PCB PC Service
Manual
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
41000 3/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS
Service Manual are described in the table in above
manual.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective
action of Attention message.
Attention message (Printer)
Attention message table
No.1017 Would you like to stop printing?
No.1024 Would you like to register the correction value?
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
41000 4/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
Suffix Condition
No. 1027 number
Profile data was not found. 0091 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the parameter file for gray control is not included in
Attention message release the hard disk.
YES
Diagnosis
Condition
Failure in the profile data Manual No.
Suffix Condition Install the profile data from the profile CD PC Service
number corresponding to the main software. Manual
0001 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the monitor profile data is not included in the hard
disk.
0002 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the monitor initial setting file is not included in the
hard disk.
0011 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the profile data of paper type 1 is not included in the
hard disk.
4. Troubleshooting
0012 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the profile data of paper type 2 is not included in the
hard disk.
0013 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the profile data of paper types 1 and 2 are not
included in the hard disk.
0014 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the profile data of paper type 3 is not included in the
hard disk.
0015 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the profile data of paper types 1 and 3 are not
included in the hard disk.
0016 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the profile data of paper types 2 and 3 are not
included in the hard disk.
0017 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the profile data of paper types 1, 2 and 3 are not
included in the hard disk.
0040 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the flatbed scanner profile data is not included in the
hard disk.
0041 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the flatbed scanner initial setting file is not included
in the hard disk.
0050 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the positive scanner profile data is not included in the
hard disk.
0051 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the positive scanner initial setting file is not included
in the hard disk.
0060 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the reference table data (monitor) for color correction
table calculation is not included in the hard disk.
0061 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the reference table data (printer) for color correction
table calculation is not included in the hard disk.
0090 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out,
the parameter file for chroma enhancement is not
included in the hard disk.
41000 5/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
No. 1029
The measurement failed. Measure it again.
Countermeasure message
Press the [YES] key to measure the print again. If this error recurs,
press the [NO] key then clean the Advance Roller of the
Colorimeter Unit. For details, refer to the manual. Between steps
Attention message release
G083195
YES or NO
• Select YES to measure the print again. Diagnosis
• Select NO to stop the operation.
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ
depending on the suffix number.
Condition
When the test print color density is normal.
Suffix Condition
number Suffix The countermeasure action
Manual No.
0001 The test print paper type for measurement was not number and the failed part
correct. 0001 Adjust the height of the ☞ 27110
When measuring the daily setup test print, the density 0002 colorimeter unit.
4. Troubleshooting
between steps did not rise consecutively. Clean the advance rollers of the
0002 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was colorimeter with a cleaning sheet.
below 0.9, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
were not ready. 0003 Clean the calibration plate.
0003 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was 0004 Replace the calibration plate ☞ 27100
below 0.9, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days 0005 when it is scratched on.
did not change consecutively day by day and changed 0006
suddenly.
Colorimeter unit ☞ 27100
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
0004 The Dmax is within the range of 0.9 and 3.8, but
when calculating the daily setup correction value, the 0006 Problems may occur if the
correction value density was over 10 times as high as process of performing morning
the previous value. daily setup, then performing
emulsion number change setup
0005 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the
on the main paper when the air
correction value density was over 3 key. And minus
temperature has risen, is repeated
correction (print density has been risen) has been
for several days.
carried out.
In that case, perform the paper
0006 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the specification registration setup,
total correction value (density), which started as soon then perform the paper magazine
as the initial setup or paper specification registration registration setup of other
setup was completed, is beyond the limit value. And magazines.
minus correction (print density has been risen) has
been carried out.
When the test print color density is abnormal.
NOTE Suffix The countermeasure action
Manual No.
• Refer to the setup print judgment flow at the daily setup. number and the failed part
☞ 56620 0001 Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
• For a setup other than the daily setup, the suffix number 0001 0002 (35)
only occurs. 0003 Laser power supply ☞ 64250
0004 (35)
Check Point 0005
0006
Laser unit ☞ 61450
1 Check that the test print is correctly placed in the (35)
colorimeter. iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151
2 Check that the test print is correctly made. (35i)
Printhead module ☞ 26720
(35i)
41000 6/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
4. Troubleshooting
completed.
No.1032 One moment please. . .
No.1035 Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not
completed.
No.1038 Paper type for the magazine is not set.
No.1039 Paper type specification is not set.
No.1040 Press the [ORDER] key.
No.1041 Unable to accept additional processing at this time.
The order will be counted. Wait until the output
process is complete.
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
41000 7/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
NOTE
No. 1043
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Laser temperature is being adjusted. One
moment please. . . Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
Attention message release
YES or automatic release.
• When the temperature adjustment of the lasers B, G and R are
completed and the machine becomes processable, it returns
automatically.
Condition
Condition
The count down timer The B and G lasers are waited until the
is displayed in the temperatures become to be processable.
Order Display.
The count down timer The laser unit or R laser is waited until
is not displayed in the the temperature becomes to be
Order Display. processable.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The attention message appears until B and G lasers are
processable.
• When the laser unit is waited until the temperature becomes to
be processable, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(U)
is displayed.
• When the R laser is waited until the temperature becomes to
be processable, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(R)
is displayed.
• Processable range of the laser unit is 23.0°C to 42.0°C.
• Processable range of the R laser is 27.7°C to 28.3°C.
• The laser unit heater works to shorten the time required for
adjusting the temperature to processable.
• You can check the temperatures of R laser and laser unit in
Laser Unit Adjustment.
☞ 37300
Check Point
1 Wait until the laser temperature adjustment has been
completed.
2 The message, Laser temperatures are being
adjusted. does not disappear from the Net Order
display. Refer to ☞ 4302.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Laser unit heater ☞ 61450
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 61050
B and G laser drivers ☞ 61450
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
Laser power supply ☞ 64250
Laser unit ☞ 26710
41000 8/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point No.1050 Additional Picture CD's cannot be made in this
order. Press the [ORDER] key.
1 Check that printer doors 1, 2 and 3 are securely No.1051 Multiple input media cannot be used to create a
closed. Picture CD.
Diagnosis
NOTE
Adjustment failure point Manual No. • In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
Adjustment failure in the attaching position - the QSS does not currently use may be described.
of the interlock switch (printer door 1 or 2)
Adjustment failure in the attaching position -
of the printer door 3 sensor
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
41000 9/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
4. Troubleshooting
number
1 Check that printer door 3 is securely closed. (bit)
0001 Paper end sensor A (SE13)
Diagnosis 0002 Paper end sensor B (SE41)
Adjustment failure point Manual No. 0004 Paper loading sensor (SE14)
Adjustment failure in the attaching position -
of the printer door 3 sensor NOTE
• The corresponding sensor is displayed in the second line of the
message.
Failed parts Manual No.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 61050 For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190 Suffix number display.
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 ☞ 4002
NOTE Check Point
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
1 Clean each sensor using a blower brush.
Wiring diagram 2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor
☞ 89000 Adjustment display. ☞ 36000
NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in
the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning each sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED
Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor
LED light intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper end sensor A (SE13) ☞ 61200
Paper end sensor B (SE41)
Paper loading sensor (SE14)
Zigzagging correction sensor (left) (SE19) ☞ 61300
Zigzagging correction sensor (right) (SE20)
Exposure start sensor (SE22)
Exposure end sensor (SE24)
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
41000 10/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
NOTE
No. 1079−1081
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for
Wiring diagram Corrective action of Attention message.
☞ 89000
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS
Service Manual are described in the table in above
manual.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective
action of Attention message.
Attention message (Printer)
Attention message table
No.1079 If you would like to make a Picture CD, using the
current data, press the [ORDER] key.
4. Troubleshooting
No.1080 Unable to accept additional processing at this time.
Press the [ORDER] key.
No.1081 The Paper Magazine is out of paper.
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
41000 11/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
Condition Condition
Condition Suffix Condition
1033 The system waits for the iBeam unit to become stable. number
- This attention message appears when the test print is
Check Point not printed within one minute after calibrating the
colorimeter.
1 Wait until the stabilization has been completed.
2 If the power supply is not turned on for 20 or more
days, the system performs the forced pre-emission for
approximately 30 minutes.
☞ 32510
4. Troubleshooting
41000 12/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
4. Troubleshooting
if necessary. 0003 The Paper Supply Unit A and Paper Advance Unit
☞ 32511
NOTE
Condition • The corresponding unit is displayed in the second line of the
Suffix Condition message.
number
IMPORTANT
- When selecting to print to a wide paper size after
printing more than the specified number of prints in • This attention message occurs due to the wiring
succession at a single narrower paper size (default: connection failure at the drawer connector connected
300 prints), uneven print caused by hysteresis may when having set each unit, each motor failure and
occur. Encourage iBeam Tuning. printer control PCB failure.
Follow the diagnostic procedure shown below when the
NOTE problem recurs even after inserting and unplugging
• This notification is not displayed if configuring 0 of each unit.
Notification of Print quality confirmation (in the service
mode) of printing operation tab at Operator Selections Diagnosis
because notification function become invalid. Paper supply unit A
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper advance motor 1 ☞ 61200
Paper advance motor 2
Paper supply arm motor (left)
Paper supply arm motor (right)
Roller Move Motor (35i only)
Paper supply unit A drawer connector failure -
(J/P485, J/P486)
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
41000 13/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41000
Attention message: Printer
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
4. Troubleshooting
41000 14/14
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41300
Attention message: Scanner
Attention message: Scanner
No. 1302−1320
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for
Corrective action of Attention message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS
Service Manual are described in the table in above
manual.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective
action of Attention message.
Attention message (Scanner)
Attention message table
No. 1302 Would you like to stop scanning?
No. 1305 Photometry Section may be dirty.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 1306 Update the light source. If film remains in the Film
Carrier, remove it.
No. 1313 The Focus Adjustment was not completed yet.
No. 1314 Light source evenness is out of allowable range.
No. 1315 LED Light Source temperature is being adjusted.
process cannot be continued.
No. 1316 Focus Adjustment failed.
No. 1317 Failed to perform the Scan Position Auto
Correction.
No. 1318 Close the Scanner Unit Cover.
No. 1319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be
restarted.
No. 1320 There may be dust on the AFC opening.
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
41300 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41400
Attention message: Film carrier
Attention message: Film carrier
IMPORTANT NOTE
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS • In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
Service Manual are described in the table in above the QSS does not currently use may be described.
manual.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective
action of Attention message.
Attention message (Film carrier)
Attention message table
No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier.
No. 1401 Attach the Film Carrier.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 1402 Attach the 135/240 AFC.
No. 1303 Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process.
No. 1404 The IX frame data is incomplete.
No. 1405 Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier.
No. 1406 Remove the 240 film from the Film Carrier.
No. 1407 Remove the 110 film from the Film Carrier.
No. 1408 Remove the 120 film from the Film Carrier.
No. 1409 Set the lane for the Film Carrier.
No. 1410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier.
No. 1412 The film is upside down. Would you like to
continue processing?
No. 1413 Input the frame number
No. 1414 The FID number was not detected.
No. 1416 Select the 240 lane.
No. 1417 Close the Mount Insertion Cover.
No. 1420 Select the DX code.
No. 1421 Confirm the stop position of all the frames to be
processed.
No. 1422 Select the 135 lane.
No. 1423 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment.
Remove the film from the Film Carrier.
No. 1424 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is being
executed.
No. 1425 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is
complete.
No. 1426 Attach the 110 AFC.
No. 1427 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. If
film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it.
No. 1428 Remove the mount from the Film Carrier.
No. 1429 Make sure that the mount is placed correctly.
No. 1430 Confirm the frame size.
No. 1431 Attach the 120 AFC.
No. 1432 Attach the MMC.
No. 1433 Attach the AMC.
41400 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41400
Attention message: Film carrier
No. 1450−1454
Refer to the Connection Unit Service
Manual for Corrective action of Attention
message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS
Service Manual are described in the table in above
manual.
Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for
Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (connection unit)
Attention message table
No.1450 Attach the Connecting Unit.
4. Troubleshooting
No.1451 Remove the film from the Connecting Unit.
No.1452 Film Processor was not detected.
No.1454 Close Film Advance Guides 1 and 2.
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
41400 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41500
Attention message: Disk/Media
Attention message: Disk/Media
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS No.1536 The data has already been written to this media.
Service Manual are described in the table in above Format this media?
manual. No.1537 The appropriate file was not found.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective No.1538 There are still orders remaining for output. Click
action of Attention message. the Output Media icon to output.
Attention message (Storage Media) No.1539 The data has already been written to this media. Set
a new media.
Attention message table
No.1540 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm the
No.1500 Would you like to stop outputting media? media drive setting.
No.1501 The media is write protected. No.1541 The data for media output is waiting to be written.
Settings cannot be changed until the data is written
4. Troubleshooting
No.1502 Replace the media.
No.1503 The appropriate file was not found. to media.
No.1504 Image Destination for the print channel is not set. No.1542 The same order number data already exists. Would
you like to overwrite?
No.1505 Exif Information could not be read.
No.1543 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted
No.1506 Would you like to remove the USB Flash Memory? correctly. Would you like to read the data?
No.1508 There are some files that could not get written to the No.1545 The image size aspect ratio is not correct. Data was
media. Would you like to stop processing? not written.
No.1509 Write the data. No.1546 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm
No.1510 Read the data. Set the media. that the media capacity matches the Media Capacity
No.1511 Write the data. Set the media. Setting.
No.1512 Data was not read from the media. No.1547 Data was saved to the storage media. Remove the
media.
No.1513 Data was not written to the media. Format the
media? No.1548 Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete the
image file(s)?
No.1514 Remove the USB Flash Memory.
No.1549 Data is too small to read.
No.1515 Data is too large to write.
No.1516 Data is too large to read. NOTE
No.1517 Invalid image format. Failed to read. • In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
No.1518 Output media is the same as Input media. Select the QSS does not currently use may be described.
different one.
No.1519 Data has been written to this media. Would you
like to delete all the written files?
No.1520 Select the template.
No.1521 Template information does not match to make the
Album Print.
No.1522 Are you sure to print the previous frame except
selected one?
No.1523 It was not registered as an option.
No.1524 CD-R External Writing System is being output.
No.1526 Cannot remove the USB Flash Memory. Retry?
No.1527 Write the data. Set the media.
No.1528 Registered Print Type of Print Channel is not for
normal printing.
No.1529 Failed to read the bar code.
No.1530 The data was not written to the Network Folder.
Make sure a Network Folder exists.
41500 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41550
Attention message: Colorimeter
Attention message: Colorimeter
4. Troubleshooting
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 amount of paper.
Colorimeter unit ☞ 27100
NOTE
NOTE • Refer to the setup print color measuring operation flow.
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) ☞ 56610
Wiring diagram
Check Point
☞ 89000
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted.
2 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit
Adjustment.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 63520
Paper advance motor
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Colorimeter unit ☞ 27100
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
41550 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41550
Attention message: Colorimeter
NOTE
No. 1555
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
The calibration plate data is out of range.
Wiring diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ 89000
Make sure that the Calibration Plate is clean and placed correctly.
For details, refer to the manual.
Attention message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When calibrating the colorimeter, the difference
between the two photometry values obtained by the
calibration plate measurements at the 9 mm point
(black position) and 18 mm point (white position)
from the leading end is the determined value or less.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• Refer to the setup print judgment operation flow. ☞ 56620
Check Point
1 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.
2 Check that the calibration plate is correctly inserted.
3 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit
Adjustment.
IMPORTANT
• The calibration plate may not be inserted correctly or be
soiled. Check and clean the calibration plate, and then
install it properly.
• Check if there is no dirt on the calibration plate, and
inserted it properly, then calibrate the colorimeter unit
again.
If the same attention message appears again, perform
Updating the Calibration Plate Data.
☞ 27100
• Then carry out Updating the Calibration Plate Data. If
the same attention message appears, the corrective
action should be taken according to the following
diagnosis.
Diagnosis
In case of adjusting failure
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 27110
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
For defective parts
Replace the calibration plate when it is ☞ 27100
scratched on.
Replace the colorimeter unit in the case of the
colorimeter unit failure.
41550 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41600
Attention message: Pricing unit
Attention message: Pricing unit
No. 1600−1604
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for
Corrective action of Attention message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS
Service Manual are described in the table in above
manual.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective
action of Attention message.
Attention message (Pricing unit)
Attention message table
No.1600 Reload the Pricing Unit.
No.1601 Turn on the Pricing Unit or supply a pricing sheet.
4. Troubleshooting
No.1602 The rest 10 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit.
No.1603 The rest 2 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit.
No.1604 Pricing Sheet Print Out Check
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
41600 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41620
Attention message: NMC
Attention message: NMC
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS No.1706 Order Controller is busy.
Service Manual are described in the table in above No.1707 Enable the Compact Archive Unit (TYPE 1) to use
manual. the Order Controller.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective No.1708 This order number already exists. Change the order
action of Attention message. number.
Attention message (NMC) No.1709 Reorder cannot be started.
No.1710 No more orders can be registered to the Spooler.
Attention message table
No.1711 The CAU drive and the Spooler are placed in the
No.1621 Would you like to delete the order?
same location. Spooler will be relocated.
No.1622 Would you like to quit the Net Order Receipt?
No.1712 The CAU drive and the Spooler are placed in the
4. Troubleshooting
No.1634 Data could not be received. Would you like to same location. Relocate the Spooler.
delete the order?
No.1713 The Spooler has orders remaining. Would you like
No.1636 Check whether the Print Type in the QSS Print to delete them?
Channel Setting is Normal Print.
No.1714 The Spooler has some orders. Delete all the orders.
No.1637 Print Channel was not set. The order was not
No.1715 The order will be late for the promised Delivery
accepted.
Time. Confirm in the Net Order Display.
No.1638 Print Type in the Print Channel Setting is not
No.1716 Proceeding. This function cannot be used.
Normal Print. The order was not accepted.
No.1717 The order waiting for judgment remains. Would
No.1639 Failed to read the DPOF file. The order was not
you like to switch to the Order Controller Display?
accepted.
No.1641 Print Channel of QSS is not set. Confirm the Print NOTE
Channel. • In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
No.1642 Destination to save image is not set for the QSS the QSS does not currently use may be described.
Print Channel. Confirm the Print Channel.
No.1643 The appropriate file was not found.
No.1644 Exif Information was not read.
No.1645 Data is too large to read.
No.1646 Invalid image format. Failed to read.
No.1647 The appropriate file was not found.
No.1648 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted
correctly. Would you like to read the data?
No.1649 The Aspect Ratio of image size is incorrect. Failed
to write.
No.1650 Data is too small to read.
No.1651 Remote Control was not started.
No.1653 The output media size is too large. The data cannot
be output to the External System.
No.1656 When outputting in the HS mode, set the Media
Print Paper Fitting to either "Cut", "Overall" or
"Real Size".
No.1657 Hold On Save could not be executed. Secure
enough space, then restart processing.
No.1658 The Picture CD could not be created because there
are more frames than can be saved.
No.1659 Calibrating... Would you like to stop the
calibration?
No.1700 Would you like to stop printing?
41620 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41800
Attention message: Software upgrade
Attention message: Software upgrade
Wiring diagram
No. 1801 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
Execute software upgrade.
Countermeasure message
Upgrade software again. If this error recurs, contact us or your
place of purchase.
Attention message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- Although the version of each control PCB is checked
when the power supply is turned ON, it is not correct.
Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
0001 Printer control PCB
4. Troubleshooting
0008 Processor control PCB
0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
0100 PU control PCB
0200 Laser control PCB (35)
iBeam Control PCB (35i)
NOTE
• The name of PCB where the attention message arises is
displayed in the second line of the message.
• Carry out the corrective actions according to the following
diagnosis for the displayed PCB as a reference.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Upgrade the software. ☞ 35600
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service
Manual
PU control PCB ☞ 64241
Laser control PCB (35) ☞ 64150
iBeam Control PCB (35i) ☞ 64151
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
41800 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41900
Attention message: Main
Attention message: Main
4. Troubleshooting
No.1902 Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter Menu,
Suffix Condition
Quit the Adobe Photoshop.
number
NOTE 0001 Interrupting
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that 0002 Initializing
the QSS does not currently use may be described. 0003 Paper is being processed.
0004 Scanning (AFC)
0005 Scanning (media)
0006 Outputting media
0007 Data for media output is being acquired.
0008 Printing
0009 Outputting data to Bravo remains.
0010 Removing media
0011 When one of the following conditions are fulfilled:
• After main scanning is completed until
registration is completed by the Order Controller
• In Output Media, until the message about
writing is displayed
NOTE
• In the service mode, attention number 1904 appears instead of
condition 3 of attention message No. 1903.
Diagnosis
The following part may have some problem when the error with
suffix number 0001 (interrupting) occurs.
Failed parts Manual No.
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service
Manual
PU control PCB ☞ 64241
Laser control PCB (35) ☞ 64150
iBeam Control PCB (35i) ☞ 64151
41900 1/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41900
Attention message: Main
NOTE
No. 1904
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Proceeding. One moment please. . .
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 Attention message release
YES or NO
Wiring diagram table [scanner] • Select YES to proceed the operation.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual. • Select NO to bring up the next display on your responsibility.
Condition
Condition
- On the display subsequent from menu, an operation
that influences any of the control PCBs was
attempted while processing.
NOTE
• The suffix number varies depending on the operation in
progress.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Interrupting
0002 Initializing
0003 Paper is being processed.
0004 Scanning (AFC)
0005 Scanning (media)
0006 Outputting media
0007 Data for media output is being acquired.
0008 Printing
NOTE
• This message is displayed only in the Service Mode.
Diagnosis
The following part may have some problem when the error with
suffix number 0001 (interrupting) occurs.
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
41900 2/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41900
Attention message: Main
4. Troubleshooting
settings.
1 Check that the booster hard key is set properly.
No.1908 A Picture CD could not be made. Confirm the
settings. 2 Check if the booster software is installed properly.
No.1909 Title was not set.
Diagnosis
No.1910 There is no frame. The format will be deleted.
No.1911 This Title data already exist. Failed parts Manual No.
No.1912 There is no format. New format will be created. Capacity booster PC Service
ATX motherboard Manual
No.1913 This format is used in a Print Channel. Would you
like to edit?
NOTE
No.1914 The format has reached maximum capacity. No
more data can be added. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
☞ 89000
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
41900 3/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41900
Attention message: Main
4. Troubleshooting
No.1923 Set the destination of Media Output to other than
External System.
No.1925 Would you like to quit the Net Scan Mode?
No.1926 Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Print to
"Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size".
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
41900 4/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41900
Attention message: Main
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point ☞ 55910
1 Confirm that the flatbed scanner power supply is ON.
IMPORTANT
2 Confirm that the USB cable is connected to the
• You can check the image of the test print scanned by the
flatbed scanner.
flatbed scanner at C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\Tmp.
For details, refer to ☞ Problems of the flatbed scanner
Diagnosis 4470.
Failed parts Manual No.
Check Point
Flatbed scanner −
1 Confirm the type of the test print.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Flatbed scanner −
41900 5/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41900
Attention message: Main
4. Troubleshooting
No.1935 There is insufficient space on the disk for the Order
Controller. Are you sure you want to delete the
Conditions of scanning
Compact Archive Unit data automatically?
Condition No.1936 Compact Archive Unit data was not deleted. Delete
No dot to determine coordinates cannot be detected. them manually.
No.1937 The file was not found.
Condition in calculating No.1939 The String is too long to register.
Enough number of dots for calculation cannot be detected. No.1941 Would you like to delete the selected Print Menu?
No.1943 The setting has changed. Would you like to
NOTE register?
• For details about Conditions, refer to Flatbed Scanner No.1944 Appropriate Print Menu was not found. Stop the
Operation. process.
☞ 55910 No.1945 A tab where the Print Menu has not been set exists.
Would you like to continue?
IMPORTANT
• You can check the image of the test print scanned by the NOTE
flatbed scanner at C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\Tmp. • In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
For details, refer to ☞ Problems of the flatbed scanner the QSS does not currently use may be described.
4470.
Check Point
1 Check that the test print is correctly placed in the
flatbed scanner.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Flatbed scanner −
41900 6/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41900
Attention message: Main
Condition
Condition
Dirt or dust was adhered on the test print if it was scanned by
flatbed scanner.
When a test print scanned, dust was adhered on the glass of the
flatbed scanner.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check if there are no dirt or dust or while line on the
test print.
2 Check the flatbed scanner glass and clean it if
necessary.
NOTE
• It there are white line on the test print, clean the iBeam head
and focal plane regulating guide of the exposure advance unit.
iBeam head
41900 7/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41900
Attention message: Main
Condition
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS IMPORTANT
Service Manual are described in the table in above • The Attention messages not described in the QSS
manual. Service Manual are described in the table in above
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective manual.
action of Attention message. Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for
Attention message (Main) Corrective action of Attention message.
4. Troubleshooting
No.1949 The mode cannot be changed during input start.
processing. No.1960 Scanner focus has not been adjusted, film
(Refer to T15+S1-II option manual.) processing cannot start.
No.1951 In the Normal Mode, the film will not advance No.1961 While the scanner is working, the film will not
automatically to the scanner. Would you like to advance automatically to the scanner. Would you
switch to the Normal Mode? If the mode is like to insert the film manually? If the scanning is
changed to the Order Reservation Mode before the completed before the film is ejected from the Film
film is ejected from the Film Processor, the film Processor, the film will advance automatically to
will advance automatically to the scanner. the scanner.
(Refer to T15+S1-II option manual.)
No.1962 Film remains in the processor.
No.1952 This Order Check Number already exists.
No.1968 Now inputting. After inputting, the mode will
(Refer to T15+S1-II option manual.)
change to the Normal Mode. From now on, the film
No.1957 Reserve the order. ejected from the Film Processor will not be loaded
(Refer to T15+S1-II option manual.) automatically. Would you like to change the mode?
No.1958 It is not in the Order Reservation Mode, the film No.1969 Now inputting. After inputting, manual film
process cannot start. loading will be accepted. From now on, the film
(Refer to T15+S1-II option manual.) ejected from the Film Processor will not load
automatically. Would you like to change the mode?
NOTE
No.1970 The input process is complete. The mode will
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that change to the Normal Mode.
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
No.1971 The input process is complete. Manual film loading
will be accepted.
No.1972 To enable the option of T15 + S1-II, enable the
Order Controller.
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
41900 8/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
41900
Attention message: Main
Condition Condition
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS • The Attention messages not described in the QSS
Service Manual are described in the table in above Service Manual are described in the table in above
manual. manual.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for
action of Attention message. Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (Main) Attention message (Main)
Attention message table Attention message table
No.1977 There is insufficient space left on the disk. Stop the No.1979 Auto Reservation cannot be executed. The Print
4. Troubleshooting
process. Menu selected in the Auto Reservation Print Menu
was not found. Change the Reservation Method to
NOTE Manual.
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that No.1982 Reserved orders remain. Delete all the reserved
the QSS does not currently use may be described. orders.
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
41900 9/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
43370
Attention message: Compact Archive Unit/Edit
Attention message: Compact Archive Unit/Edit
4. Troubleshooting
No.3373 The data could not be saved to the Compact
Archive Unit. Would you like to continue? No.4036 The image size is too small to insert.
No.3374 The Compact Archive Unit could not be used. No.4037 The same file name already exists. Would you like
Confirm the setting. to overwrite?
No.3375 The data could not be saved to the Compact No.4038 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted
Archive Unit. Stop the process. correctly. Would you like to read the data?
No.4039 Image size during editing is too large.
Attention message (Edit) No.4040 The database was not changed. Confirm the
property of each field.
Attention message table
No.4041 A form larger than the print size cannot be used.
No.4001 Are you sure about deleting?
No.4042 Single Form is not positioned.
No.4002 Red Eye Correction cannot be executed no more.
No.4043 A Single Form protrudes from the Print Area.
No.4003 Image cannot be inserted into the specified position.
No.4044 Single Form is overlapped.
No.4004 Graphics are too large to insert.
No.4045 No more than three Single Form types can be
No.4005 Image save is complete. positioned.
No.4006 Prints cannot be made with this Print Channel. No.4046 When the Paper Setting is changed, the current
Select a Print Channel using a larger paper width. position information is canceled.
No.4007 The Letter Information was not read successfully. No.4047 The selected font was not found.
No.4008 Display the preview without CMM correction. No.4048 The image size is too small to make a Test Print.
No.4009 Template file was not found. Select the folder No.4049 No more items can be added.
including the files.
No.4051 Adobe Photoshop was not started. Confirm
No.4010 Specify the image area. whether the option has been registered correctly.
No.4011 Are you sure you want to exit? No.4052 Are you sure to update?
No.4012 No more UNDO can be executed.
NOTE
No.4013 No more REDO can be executed.
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
No.4014 The saved data cannot be read with this version.
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
No.4015 Selected file already exists.
No.4016 The area cannot be overlapped in Album Print.
No.4017 The head and jaw position is opposite, or the
selected area is too small.
No.4018 Would you like to quit the Edit Mode?
No.4019 If you Import, all customer information will be
deleted. Are you sure you want to Import?
No.4020 Failed to write the file.
No.4021 Failed to read the file.
No.4022 Select one or more images.
43370 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
44250
Attention message: QSS-Kids
Attention message: QSS-Kids
No. 4250−4308
Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for
Corrective action of Attention message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS
Service Manual are described in the table in above
manual.
Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for Corrective
action of Attention message.
Attention message (QSS-Kids)
Attention message table
No.4250 Output QSS are not registered.
No.4251 Data could not be updated. Try again?
4. Troubleshooting
No.4252 The version of destination QSS is incorrect.
Execute by offline mode.
No.4253 The proceeding order remains. Would you like to
execute the Close Down Checks?
No.4254 Destination QSS was not found. Execute by offline
mode.
No.4255 This order number already exists. Change the order
number.
No.4256 There is insufficient Spooler Capacity. The order
was not accepted.
No.4259 The Receipt Number already exists. Process the
orders that remain in QSS-Kids.
No.4260 The version of destination QSS is incorrect. Match
the version.
No.4300 The version of destination QSS is incorrect. Match
the version.
No.4302 The versions of QSS-Kids and QSS of selected
destination are different. %s Match the versions.
No.4303 The capacity of the files to transfer exceeds 500
MB. Reduce the file capacity to upload.
No.4304 The .tar file of the same name already exists.
Would you like to overwrite?
No.4305 Would you like to delete the selected file?
No.4306 Would you like to delete the Accept Record?
No.4307 The destination QSS is not selected. Select the
destination QSS.
No.4308 The QSS selected as the destination is a model
which cannot be used. Match the model and the
version.
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
44250 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
44350
Attention message: Bravo II
Attention message: Bravo II
No. 4350−4358
Refer to the Bravo II Service Manual for
Corrective action of Attention message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS
Service Manual are described in the table in above
manual.
Refer to the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective
action of Attention message.
Attention message (Bravo II)
Attention message table
No.4350 The input bin is empty. Set the media and press the
Ink Cartridge button on the Bravo.
No.4351 The quantity of ink in the color ink cartridge ran
4. Troubleshooting
short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the
Ink Cartridge button, then install the new cartridge.
When continuing processing without replacing the
cartridge, press the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4352 The quantity of ink in the black ink cartridge ran
short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the
Ink Cartridge button, then install the new cartridge.
When continuing processing without replacing the
cartridge, press the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4353 The quantity of ink in both ink cartridges ran short.
Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink
Cartridge button, then install the new cartridges.
When continuing processing without replacing the
cartridges, press the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4354 The Bravo Top Cover is open. Close the cover.
No.4355 The shared folder of PTBurn is full. Wait until the
writing of CD is completed.
No.4356 The power supply of Bravo is not ON. Turn ON the
Bravo.
No.4357 The data has already been written to this media. Set
a new media.
No.4358 Write the data. Set the media.
NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that
the QSS does not currently use may be described.
44350 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45500
Error message: Processor 1
Error message: Processor 1
Wiring diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ 89000
Replace the chemical filter cartridge. For details, refer to the
manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 5500 The CD processing solution temperature
exceeds the safety range (setting
temperature + 1°C) after temperature
adjustment has been completed. (CD
thermosensor)
No. 5501 The BF processing solution temperature
exceeds the safety range (setting
temperature + 3°C) after temperature
adjustment has been completed. (BF
thermosensor)
No. 5502 The STB processing solution temperature
exceeds the safety range (setting
temperature + 3°C) after temperature
adjustment has been completed. (STB
thermosensor)
NOTE
• There is a specific process
specification whose safe range of
STB is setting temperature +7°.
Check Point
1 Check that the value measured via Thermosensor
Calibration is correctly entered.
2 Check the setting temperature of the chilling unit
(only when equipped with the chilling unit).
3 Check that the cooling water solenoid valve for CD,
BF or STB works well (only when equipped with the
cooling water unit).
4 Check that the tank cooling fans operate properly.
Diagnosis
In the case of a cooling failure Manual No.
Cooling water solenoid valve ☞ 63290
Transistor PCB ☞ 63200
45500 1/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45500
Error message: Processor 1
Countermeasure message
No. 5505
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of The processing solution temperature is
purchase. below the processing range. BF
Alarm release
NO No. 5506
Error message release The processing solution temperature is
NO
below the processing range. STB
Condition
Countermeasure message
Suffix Condition Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
number purchase.
- The dryer temperature exceeds the safety range Alarm release
(setting temperature + 10°C) after temperature NO
adjustment has been completed. (dryer temperature Error message release
4. Troubleshooting
sensor) NO
NOTE
Diagnosis • The processing solution temperature will be adjusted when the
error display is canceled.
When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.
Dryer heater ☞ 63510 Condition
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 Error message No. Condition
No. 5504 The CD processing solution temperature
When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.
falls below the processing range (setting
Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63510 temperature − 1°C) after the temperature
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 adjustment has been completed. (CD
temperature sensor)
NOTE No. 5505 The BF processing solution temperature
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) falls below the processing range (setting
temperature − 3°C) after the temperature
Wiring diagram adjustment has been completed. (BF
☞ 89000 temperature sensor)
No. 5506 The STB processing solution temperature
falls below the processing range (setting
temperature − 5°C) after the temperature
adjustment has been completed. (STB
temperature sensor)
Check Point
1 Check that the value measured via Thermosensor
Calibration is correctly entered.
2 Check the setting temperature of the chilling unit
(only when equipped with the chilling unit).
Diagnosis
When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.
Processing solution heater ☞ 63510
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
45500 2/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45500
Error message: Processor 1
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- The dryer temperature falls below the processing
range (setting temperature − 10°C) during paper
4. Troubleshooting
processing. (dryer thermosensor)
Diagnosis
When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.
Dryer heater ☞ 63510
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
45500 3/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45500
Error message: Processor 1
[SM] specification
No. 5508
The processing solution level is too low. When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
Replenisher pump ☞ 63300
Countermeasure message Water Supply Pump ☞ 63300
Refer to the manual for corrective action. SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Alarm release Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NO
Error message release
YES [J] specification
When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
Condition
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63310
Suffix Condition Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
number
- The processing solution level detectors of the [F] specification
processing solution float switches (CD, BF, and STB)
turned OFF. When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
P1R Replenisher Pump ☞ 63311
NOTE P2RA Replenisher Pump
4. Troubleshooting
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing P2RB Replenisher Pump
solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700
heaters and circulation pumps turn OFF.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Check Point
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
Common to all specifications
Failed parts
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the ☞ 4203
tank.
2 Clean the replenishment pump, strainer units of water
supply pump or a hose. Check the output amounts. # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
3 Check if the float of the processing solution float
Failed parts
switch moves up and down smoothly.
☞ 4252
Diagnosis
NOTE
Common to all specifications
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Blown fuses Manual No.
Wiring diagram
F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 ☞ 89000
F17
[N] specification
When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
Replenisher pump ☞ 63290
Refilling water pump
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
45500 4/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45500
Error message: Processor 1
4. Troubleshooting
measured by the digital flowmeter falls below • The A/D conversion is a process to convert analog data
3L/min. of the temperature measured by the processing solution
- Although the machine is not equipped with a digital thermosensor, the dryer thermosensor and the inner
flowmeter, the digital flowmeter is set to ON via thermosensor into digital data via the processor control
Option Registration. PCB.
NOTE Diagnosis
• This error will not be displayed when the digital flowmeter is
Blown fuses Manual No.
set to OFF via Option Registration.
F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Check Point
Failed parts Manual No.
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled.
Thermosensor ☞ 63290
2 Check if the circulation pump and the hose connected
to the pump are clogged. Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63510
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Diagnosis
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
Failed parts Manual No.
Digital flowmeter ☞ 63290 Failed parts
45500 5/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45500
Error message: Processor 1
Diagnosis
No. 5511
The circulation pump has stopped. CD No. Blown fuses Manual No.
5511 F51 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
No. 5513 5513 F52
The circulation pump has stopped. BF 5515 F51
4. Troubleshooting
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Failed parts
Alarm release
NO ☞ 4203
Error message release
YES
# Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
Condition Failed parts
Error message No. Condition ☞ 4252
No. 5511 The rotation detector built in the CD
circulation pump detects that the pump NOTE
has stopped rotating.
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
No. 5513 The rotation detector built in the BF
circulation pump detects that the pump Wiring diagram
has stopped rotating. ☞ 89000
No. 5515 The rotation detector built in the STB
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
No. 5516 The rotation detector built in the STB2
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
No. 5517 The rotation detector built in the STB3
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
No. 5518 The rotation detector built in the STB4
circulation pump detects that the pump
has stopped rotating.
Check Point
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled.
45500 6/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45500
Error message: Processor 1
4. Troubleshooting
No. 5519 The temperature detected by the CD Blown fuses Manual No.
thermosensor is not within a specified F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
range.
No. 5520 The temperature detected by the BF Failed parts Manual No.
thermosensor is not within a specified Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63510
range.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
No. 5521 The temperature detected by the STB
thermosensor is not within a specified
range.
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
Failed parts
Diagnosis ☞ 4203
No. Blown fuses Manual No.
5520 F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 # Symptoms result from blowout of fuse
5521
Failed parts
Failed parts Manual No. ☞ 4252
Thermosensor ☞ 63290
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Wiring diagram
Failed parts ☞ 89000
☞ 4203
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45500 7/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45500
Error message: Processor 1
NOTE
No. 5524
• The CD, BF and STB4 processing solution float switches have
Refilling water operation error. CD-W a processing solution level detector, a refilling water level
detector and a safety thermostat for each.
No. 5525 The STB3, 5 and 6 processing solution float switches have a
Refilling water operation error. BF-W refilling water level detector for each.
4. Troubleshooting
Refer to the manual for corrective action. Refilling water pump ☞ 63290
Alarm release Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NO
Error message release When refilling water is incorrectly
Manual No.
YES detected
Processing solution float switch ☞ 63290
Condition
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Error message No. Condition Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
No. 5524 The refilling water level detector of the
CD processing solution float switch does NOTE
not turn ON even though approximately • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
26 seconds have passed since refilling
water operation started. Wiring diagram
No. 5525 The refilling water level detector of the ☞ 89000
BF processing solution float switch does
not turn ON even though approximately
26 seconds have passed since refilling
water operation started.
No. 5526 The refilling water level detector of the
STB1 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though
approximately 26 seconds have passed
since refilling water operation started.
No. 5527 The refilling water level detector of the
STB2 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though
approximately 26 seconds have passed
since refilling water operation started.
No. 5528 The refilling water level detector of the
STB3 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though
approximately 26 seconds have passed
since refilling water operation started.
No. 5529 The refilling water level detector of the
STB4 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though
approximately 26 seconds have passed
since refilling water operation started.
45500 8/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45530
Error message: Processor 2
Error message: Processor 2
4. Troubleshooting
(processor top cover) turns OFF. following temperatures.
Diagnosis
• If the safety thermostat of the processing solution float switch
Failed parts Manual No. turns OFF, all the processing solution heaters and circulation
Interlock switch (processor top cover) ☞ 63290 pumps will stop.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220 Check Point
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled.
NOTE 2 Check if the hose connected to the circulation pump
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) are clogged.
Wiring diagram
Diagnosis
☞ 89000
Blown fuses Manual No.
F15 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
F17
45530 1/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45530
Error message: Processor 2
4. Troubleshooting
temperatures.
Status Temperature (°C)
OPEN(OFF) 95±2.8
CLOSE(ON) 65±4.4
• When the dryer safety thermostat goes OFF, the dryer heater
and dryer fan go OFF.
Check Point
1 Check if the dryer fan is rotating.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F17 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
45530 2/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45530
Error message: Processor 2
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Although a specified time has passed since the print
sorter unit started operating, the sorter home sensor
does not turn LIGHT.
0002 Although a specified time has passed since the sorter
4. Troubleshooting
home sensor turned LIGHT, it does not turn DARK.
Check Point
1 Clean the sorter home sensor using a blower brush.
Diagnosis
In case of an operation failure Manual No.
Sorter motor ☞ 63510
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45530 3/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45530
Error message: Processor 2
Countermeasure message When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly Manual No.
Refer to the manual for corrective action. Dryer fan ☞ 63510
Alarm release
NO
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Error message release Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
YES
When the drive motor is defective Manual No.
Condition Drive motor ☞ 63290
Status Condition Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Normal After feeding out the paper from the printer to the Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
operation processor, the print sensors in the dryer section do
not turn DARK within a specified time and this In case of a detection failure Manual No.
happens consecutively six times.
Print sensor ☞ 63510
Automated When the colorimeter unit paper sensor 1 does not (3501 and 3501i)
4. Troubleshooting
Color turn DARK within a specified time in performing
Measurem the automated color measurement of setup print
Print sensor (right) (left) ☞ 63510
(3502)
ent
Paper sensor 1 ☞ 63520
NOTE Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
• For details, refer to ☞ 56100 Processor paper advance
operation. # Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET
communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the
Version Check display.
☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm
the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.
Diagnosis
In case of adjusting failure Manual No.
Check Arm Unit 2 Upper Stop Position ☞ 36010
Correction, Arm Unit 2 Lower Stop
Position Correction and Paper Stop
Position Correction of Paper Advance Unit
Correction.
45530 4/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45530
Error message: Processor 2
4. Troubleshooting
0### The backup data of the processor control PCB is • When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns OFF, the drive
abnormal. motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the
processor control PCB are abnormal. Check Point
Diagnosis
When the data is erased Manual No.
Read the backup data saved in media at the ☞ 35400
close down check.
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45530 5/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45530
Error message: Processor 2
Condition
Suffix Condition
4. Troubleshooting
number
- When performing Print Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment, the system could not adjust it
normally.
Suffix Condition
number
01 When the standard voltage was set to 7.5 V and the
light source level was set to 0, the print sensor did not
change to LIGHT.
02 When the standard voltage was set to 7.5 V and the
light source level was set to 255, the print sensor did
not change to LIGHT.
Furthermore, even after the standard voltage was set
to 3.0 V, the print sensor did not change to LIGHT.
03 Even after the standard voltage was changed from 7.5
V to 3.0 V for the light source level, the print sensor
did not turn to LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean each sensor using a blower brush.
2 Carry out Print Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment in Functions of Print Sensor
Adjustment.
Refer to ☞ 33001.
NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in
the Print Sensor Adjustment Display.
• After cleaning each sensor, carry out Print Sensor LED
Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor
LED light intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Print sensor ☞ 63510
(3501 and 3501i)
45530 6/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45530
Error message: Processor 2
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
- It was not adjusted properly when Drive Motor - The drive motor has stopped due to the protected
Revolution Count Auto Adjustment was performed operation.
in Functions of Drive Motor Revolution Count
Setting. Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is Drive motor ☞ 63290
currently processed. Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Suffix Condition Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
number
0001 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set # Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
to 255, it was smaller than the required count.
Failed parts
0002 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set
to 0, it was more than the required count.
☞ 4203
NOTE
Diagnosis • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45530 7/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45530
Error message: Processor 2
NOTE
No. 5552
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error.
Wiring diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ 89000
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
NOTE
• It occurs only when the system has the automated color
measurement function.
Condition
Condition
0001 Even though the dryer selection home sensor operates
the dryer selection guide from the DARK status
4. Troubleshooting
position to the colorimeter side for a certain period of
time, the dryer selection home sensor does not
become LIGHT.
0002 Even though the dryer selection home sensor operates
the dryer selection guide from the LIGHT status
position for a certain period of time, the dryer
selection home sensor does not become DARK.
0003 At the initial operation, even though the dryer select
motor was operated in the left direction for a certain
period of time, the dryer selection home sensor did
not change to DARK.
0004 When performing the automated color measurement,
even though the dryer selection guide was operated in
the colorimeter direction, the test print was not
ejected to the colorimeter side but onto the print
conveyor.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F18 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
45530 8/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45600
Error message: Tablet replenishment
Error message: Tablet replenishment
NOTE
No. 5600[J]
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Tablet Drum operation error. CD
Wiring diagram
No. 5601[J] ☞ 89000
Tablet Drum operation error. BF
No. 5602[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. STB
Countermeasure message
Remove the Tablet Cartridge and take corrective action. For
details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
4. Troubleshooting
number
- Even though the drum was moved for a specified
time to return it to the home position, the home
position was not detected.
- Even though the system attempted to move the drum
for a specified time to exit the home position, the
drum remained at that position.
- Even though the drum is reversed, tablet sensor 1
does not turn DARK after a specified time.
- Even though a specified time has passed since tablet
sensor 1 passed the home position and turned DARK,
tablet sensor 1 doens not turn LIGHT.
NOTE
• The home position is the position when tablet sensors 1 and 2
are LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check if the tablet is not stuck between the cartridge
and drum.
2 Check if the bucket platform is not soiled.
3 Check if the elevator does not tilt.
Diagnosis
Uncleaned places Manual No.
The module drum is cleaned. ☞ 27690
45600 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45600
Error message: Tablet replenishment
Countermeasure message
Remove the Tablet Cartridge and take corrective action. For
details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
4. Troubleshooting
number
- Even though a specified time has passed since the
drum was moved from the home position and tablet
sensor 1 turned DARK, tablet sensor 1 does not turn
LIGHT.
- Even though the drum was moved from the home
position, tablet sensor 1 does not turn DARK.
- Even though a specified time has passed since tablet
sensor 1 passed the home position, it does not turn
DARK.
- Even though the drum is reversed, the home position
is not detected after a specified time.
NOTE
• The home position is the position when tablet sensors 1 and 2
are LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check if the tablet is not stuck between the cartridge
and drum.
2 Check if the bucket platform is not soiled.
3 Check if the elevator does not tilt.
Diagnosis
Uncleaned places Manual No.
The module drum is cleaned. ☞ 27690
45600 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45600
Error message: Tablet replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
0002 When the elevator was raised, the elevator middle
Condition sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator
Error message No. Condition lower sensor turned LIGHT and a specified time
passed.
No. 5609 The Reservoir Count exceeds the drop
limit in Basic Kit Setting when Order 0003 When the elevator was raised, the elevator upper
No. 5610 sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator
Display→Processor
No. 5611 middle sensor turned DARK and a specified time
Status→Change→Tablet Drop
Reservoir is set to ON. passed.
0004 Even though the elevator was lowered for a specified
NOTE time, the elevator upper sensor did not turn LIGHT.
• To reset the reservoir count, set the reservoir count of 0005 When the elevator was lowered, the elevator middle
Counter to 0. Refer to ☞ 33010. sensor did not turn LIGHT even though it turned
• To reset the Water Supply Reservoir Amount, reset it via DARK and a specified time passed.
Functions in Counter. Refer to ☞ 33010. 0006 When the elevator was lowered, the elevator lower
sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator
middle sensor turned LIGHT and a specified time
passed.
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Position adjustment failure of elevator lower ☞ 27680
sensor
Position adjustment failure of elevator middle ☞ 27670
sensor
Position adjustment failure of elevator upper ☞ 27660
sensor
45600 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45600
Error message: Tablet replenishment
NOTE
No. 5613[J]
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
The processing solution level is too low.
Wiring diagram STB1
☞ 89000
Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When the processing solution level detector of the
STB1 processing solution float switch turns OFF and
water supply is carried out for a given amount of
time, the processing solution level detector keeps
4. Troubleshooting
OFF.
Check Point
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the
tank.
2 Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
3 Clean the strainer.
4 Check if the replenisher hose are not clogged.
5 Check the output amount.
6 Check if the float of the processing solution float
switch moves up and down smoothly.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
STB1 processing solution float switch ☞ 63310
STB water supply pump ☞ 63310
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45600 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45700
Error message: SM replenishment
Error message: SM replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
No. 5705[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-
B
No. 5706[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. STB
Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump
sensor stays DARK even though a specified time has
passed since the replenisher pump or the water supply
pump started operating.
0002 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump
sensor stays LIGHT even though a specified time has
passed since the replenisher pump or the water supply
pump started operating.
Check Point
1 Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
2 Clean the strainer.
3 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply
hose are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Replenisher pump and water supply pump ☞ 63300
45700 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45700
Error message: SM replenishment
NOTE
No. 5708[SM]
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Replenishment Package solution
remaining error. Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
No. 5709[SM]
Replenishment Package solution
remaining error.
Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
The attention message No. 0700 Replace the Replenishment
Package with a new one. will be displayed when the
4. Troubleshooting
replenishment alarm value is set to -5% (initial value) in Package
Capacity Setting and either replenishment package becomes
empty. In this case, the error messages Nos. 5708 and 5709
Replenishment Package solution remaining error. will not be
displayed.
Suffix Condition
number
- The percentage of the replenishment remaining
amount (internal calculated value) to the
replenishment package capacity became smaller than
the replenishment alarm value. (Replenishment
remaining amount < Package capacity ×
Replenishment remaining amount / 100) But the
replenishment solution sensor does not turn DARK.
Check Point
1 Check if the actual package capacity is same as the
one set in the Package Capacity Setting.
2 Check if the replenishment alarm value is sufficient.
3 Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
4 Clean the strainer.
5 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply
hose are not clogged.
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the ☞ 27830
replenishment solution sensor
45700 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45700
Error message: SM replenishment
Check Point
No. 5710[SM]
Refilling water operation error. CD-W 1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the
tank.
No. 5711[SM] 2 Check that the hoses from the water supply pump and
Refilling water operation error. BF-W refilling water pump are not clogged.
3 Check that the processing float switch moves
No. 5712[SM] smoothly.
Refilling water operation error. STB1-W
Diagnosis
No. 5713[SM]
Refilling water operation error. STB2-W When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63300
No. 5714[SM] SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Refilling water operation error. STB3-W Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
No. 5715[SM]
When refilling water is incorrectly
Refilling water operation error. STB4-W Manual No.
detected
Processing solution float switch ☞ 63290
Countermeasure message
4. Troubleshooting
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Alarm release Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NO
Error message release NOTE
YES • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
Condition
☞ 89000
Error message No. Condition
No. 5710 The refilling water level detector of the
CD processing solution float switch does
not turn ON even though a specified time
has passed since refilling water operation
started.
No. 5711 The refilling water level detector of the
BF processing solution float switch does
not turn ON even though a specified time
has passed since refilling water operation
started.
No. 5712 The refilling water level detector of the
STB1 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though a specified
time has passed since refilling water
operation started.
No. 5713 The refilling water level detector of the
STB2 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though a specified
time has passed since refilling water
operation started.
No. 5714 The refilling water level detector of the
STB3 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though a specified
time has passed since refilling water
operation started.
No. 5715 The refilling water level detector of the
STB4 processing solution float switch
does not turn ON even though a specified
time has passed since refilling water
operation started.
45700 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45900
Error message: F replenishment
Error message: F replenishment
Suffix Condition
No. 5900[F] number
Replenisher cartridge open motor 0008 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
operation error. moved to the cap cleaning position for cleaning the
cap, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
Countermeasure message (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a specified
Contact us or your place of purchase. time has passed.
Alarm release 0009 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
NO moved to the cap cleaning position to clean the cap,
Error message release Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper)
NO detects the error.
Although the replenishment cartridge setting part has
Condition been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge
Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even
Suffix Condition after a specified time has passed.
number (When restarting after operation stop such as instant-
0001 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is off)
moved to the lower position for opening the 0010 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
replenishment cartridge, the Replenisher Cartridge moved to the lower position for draining the water
Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after cleaning the cap, the Replenisher Cartridge
after a specified time has passed. Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even
4. Troubleshooting
0002 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is after a specified time has passed.
moved to the lower position for opening the 0011 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
replenishment cartridge, the Replenisher Cartridge moved to the lower position for draining the water
Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK even after cleaning the cap, the Replenisher Cartridge
after a specified time has passed. Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK even
0003 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is after a specified time has passed.
moved to lower position to open the replenishment 0012 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
cartridge, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor moved to the cap cleaning position to clean the cap,
(Lower) detects the error. Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper)
Although the replenishment cartridge setting part has detects the error.
been moved upwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Although the replenishment cartridge setting part has
Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge
even after a specified time has passed. Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even
(When restarting after operation stop such as instant- after a specified time has passed.
off) (When restarting after operation stop such as instant-
0004 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is off)
moved to the upper position after the replenishment 0013 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
cartridge was failed to be opened, the Replenisher moved to the upper position after the replenishment
Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to cartridge is opened or cap is cleaned, the Replenisher
LIGHT even after a specified time has passed. Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to
0005 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
moved to the upper position after the replenishment 0014 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
cartridge was failed to be opened, the Replenisher moved to the upper position after the replenishment
Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to cartridge is opened or cap is cleaned, the Replenisher
DARK even after a specified time has passed. Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to
0006 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is DARK even after a specified time has passed.
moved to upper position due to the failure in opening 0015 Opening or cleaning the replenishment cartridge is
the replenishment cartridge, Replenisher Cartridge completed and Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
Position Sensor (Upper) detects the error. (Upper) detects it.
Although the replenishment cartridge setting part has Although the replenishment cartridge setting part has
been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge
Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even
after a specified time has passed. after a specified time has passed.
(When restarting after operation stop such as instant- (When restarting after operation stop such as instant-
off) off)
0007 When the replenishment cartridge setting part is
moved to the cap cleaning position for cleaning the For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 57010.
cap, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a
specified time has passed.
45900 1/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45900
Error message: F replenishment
Countermeasure
No. 5902[F]
1. Check whether the replenishment cartridge setting part
Replenishment solution level sensor
malfunctions or not. error. P2RA
☞ 4600
2. Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error.
No. 5903]F]
☞ 4610 Replenishment solution level sensor
error. P2RB
Check Point
No. 5904[F]
Check that the replenishment cartridge setting ☞ 35320 Replenishment solution level sensor
part operates normally.
error. PSR
Diagnosis
Countermeasure message
Failed parts Manual No. Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
4. Troubleshooting
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor ☞ 63311 purchase.
(Upper) Alarm release
NO
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor Error message release
(Lower) YES
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) Condition
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700 Suffix Condition
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 number
- When # # # (upper) replenishment solution level
NOTE sensors of each processing solution are ON and when
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are
OFF
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
Countermeasure
1. Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors
of each processing solution with Input Check.
☞ 35220
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Replenisher solution level sensor ☞ 63311
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45900 2/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45900
Error message: F replenishment
Diagnosis
No. 5905[F]
P1R replenishment solution output Failed parts Manual No.
Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
4. Troubleshooting
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When opening process is complete, # # # (upper)
replenishment solution level sensors of each
processing solution do not turn off even a specified
amount of processing solution is added.
0002 When # # # (upper) replenishment solution level
sensors of each processing solution turned off, the
processing solution less than the specified amount
was added and # # # (lower) replenishment solution
level sensors of each processing solution also turned
off.
0003 After # # # (upper) replenishment solution level
sensors turned off, # # # (lower) replenishment
solution level sensors of each processing solution do
not turn off even though the processing solution
exceeding the specified amount has been added.
Countermeasure
1. Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors
of each processing solution with Input Check.
☞ 35220
2. Perform recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error.
☞ 4620
Check Point
Confirm that the hoses from each replenishment -
pump are not jammed.
Check each replenishment pump output amount ☞ 33030
again.
45900 3/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45900
Error message: F replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
number
0001 P1R Condition
0002 P2RA ERROR Condition
0004 P2RB No.
5909 When the replenishment cartridge is cleaned, P1R
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 57010. cartridge flushing valve and P1R agitation solenoid
valve are opened and the auto cleaning pump is
turned on for a specified time. However, P1R (Upper)
• Making approx. 330 prints for L size is available after the Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn
error occurs. on.
5910 When the replenishment cartridge is cleaned, P2RA
Countermeasure cartridge flushing valve is opened and the auto
1. Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error. cleaning pump is turned on for a specified time.
☞ 4610 However, P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor does not turn on.
Check Point 5911 When the replenishment cartridge is cleaned, P2RB
cartridge flushing valve is opened and the auto
Check the status of the replenishment solution ☞ 35220 cleaning pump is turned on for a specified time.
level sensors of each processing solution with However, P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Input Check. Level Sensor does not turn on.
45900 4/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45900
Error message: F replenishment
Check Point
No. 5912[F]
Check the output amounts of auto cleaning pump ☞ 33590 Predetermined process amount was
+ each automated cleaning valve again.
exceeded.
Check the status of the replenishment solution ☞ 35220
level sensors of each processing solution with
Input Check. Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
Diagnosis NO
Failed parts Manual No. Error message release
YES
P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level ☞ 63311
Sensor
Condition
P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor Condition
P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level When an error in the following error list occurred and printing
Sensor was processed before the error was cleared, the integrated value
Auto cleaning pump of P1R replenishment amount has exceeded the specified amount
(approx. 330 sheets for L size).
Automated cleaning valve
☞ 66700
4. Troubleshooting
F replenishment I/O PCB
Error list
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
☞ No. 5900[F] ☞ No. 5905[F] ☞ No. 5906[F]
NOTE ☞ No. 5907[F] ☞ No. 5908[F] ☞ No. 5909[F]
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) ☞ No. 5910[F] ☞ No. 5911[F] ☞ No. 5913[F]
Wiring diagram
• Even if an error is cleared, it reoccurs until the
☞ 89000 replenishment cartridge is opened (replenishment solution is
created).
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Take the corrective action in the error list. -
45900 5/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45900
Error message: F replenishment
Condition Condition
4. Troubleshooting
☞ No. 5907[F] ☞ No. 5908[F] ☞ No. 5909[F] • An error occurs when Automatic is selected at Operator
☞ No. 5910[F] ☞ No. 5911[F] ☞ No. 5913[F] Selections→Processor→Humidity.
• If errors occur frequently, water is not refilled when
• Making approx. 330 prints for L size is available after the evaporated.
error occurs. In such cases, select one of the Standard , Low or High,
except Automatic, in Operator
Diagnosis Selections→Processor→Humidity. Then, water is refilled
and the system can be used again.
Failed parts Manual No.
Take the corrective action in the error list. - Check Point
Check the status of the temperature and humidity ☞ 35220
sensor via Input Check.
Check that there is no dust on the temperature and -
humidity sensor.
Check that there is no connection failure in the -
wiring between the temperature and humidity
sensor and processor control PCB.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Temperature and humidity sensor ☞ 61050
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
45900 6/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45900
Error message: F replenishment
Diagnosis
No. 5916[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes Blown fuses Manual No.
4. Troubleshooting
below the processable level. PS3 Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
No. 5921[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes
below the processable level. PS4
Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When the water level of the float switches of each
processing solution is less than the processable level.
NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing
solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution
heaters and circulation pumps turn OFF.
Check Point
Check if the processing solution is leaking from -
the tank.
Check if the float of the processing solution float -
switch moves up and down smoothly.
Check the status of the float switches of each ☞ 35220
processing solution via Input Check.
Check each replenishment pump output amount ☞ 33030
again.
Check the output amounts of auto cleaning pump ☞ 33590
+ each automated cleaning valve again.
45900 7/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45900
Error message: F replenishment
4. Troubleshooting
0001 When the replenisher section door is opened before Suffix Condition
the cap is cleaned. number
0002 When the replenisher section door is opened while 0001 P1R
the cap is being cleaned. 0002 P2RA
0004 P2RB
• For suffix number 0001, making approx. 330 prints for L
size is available after the error occurs.
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 57010.
• For the suffix number 0002, print proceeds if an error
message is cleared by pressing YES. NOTE
• When the Manual Open and Create Replenishment
Countermeasures for the suffix number 0001 Solution (Manual Open) buttons are clicked and the (lower)
1. Close the replenisher section door. replenishment solution level sensors of P1R, P2RA or P2RB
is on, the following attention message is displayed.
2. Perform recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error.
☞ 4620 ☞ No. 0913[F] Manual opening cannot be started.
The above-mentioned error can be canceled when one of the
Check Point following conditions are fulfilled.
• Manual Open and Create Replenishment Solution
Check if the replenisher section door is closed -
(Manual Open) are performed without solution in each
securely.
replenishment tank.
Check the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section ☞ 35220 • All the (lower) and (upper) replenishment solution level
Door) status via Input Check.
sensors of each replenishment tank are on.
Diagnosis Countermeasure
Failed parts Manual No. 1. Drain replenishment solution completely from the
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ☞ 63311 replenishment tanks of P1R, P2RA and P2RB.
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700 2. Perform Manual Open with each replenishment tank
empty.☞ 33030
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE Check Point
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Check the status of # # # (lower) replenishment ☞ 35220
Wiring diagram solution level sensors of each processing solution
with Input Check.
☞ 89000
45900 8/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
45900
Error message: F replenishment
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level ☞ 63311
Sensor
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
4. Troubleshooting
45900 9/9
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
Error message: Printer 1
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced
after the paper loading has started, paper end sensors
A and B do not turn DARK.
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced
after the paper end sensors A and B have turned
DARK, the loading sensor does not turn DARK.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the
paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.
Diagnosis
No. Blown fuses Manual No.
6012 F36 Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
F37
46000 1/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
Wiring diagram
Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual. ☞ 89000
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 6014 Paper cannot be rewound into paper
magazine A.
No. 6015 Paper cannot be rewound into paper
4. Troubleshooting
magazine B.
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound
after the paper rewinding has started, the paper
loading sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound
after the paper loading sensor has turned LIGHT,
paper end sensors A and B do not turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the
paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.
3 Check that the paper loading sensor and the paper end
sensor are not soiled.
Diagnosis
In the case of an advance failure Manual No.
Paper advance motor 1 ☞ 61200
Paper supply motors A, B
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
46000 2/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
NOTE
No. 6016
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Paper Cutter operation error.
Wiring diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ 89000
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The cut home sensor does not detect LIGHT even
though a specified time has passed after the cut
operation started.
0002 The cut end sensor does not turn DARK even though
4. Troubleshooting
a specified time has passed after the cut operation
started and the cut home sensor turned LIGHT.
0003 The cut end sensor does not turn LIGHT for a while
even though the cut operation started and the cut
home sensor turned DARK.
0004 The cut home sensor does not turn LIGHT for a while
even though the cut operation started and the cut end
sensor turned DARK.
0005 The cut home sensor and cut end sensor are DARK in
the initial operation.
IMPORTANT
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may
occur.
NOTE
• The cutter blade may be locked or seized.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper supply unit is installed correctly.
Diagnosis
In case of an operation failure Manual No.
Cutter unit ☞ 25620
Cut motor ☞ 61200
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
46000 3/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- An attempt is made to carry out printing without 0001 All the synchronous signals of B, G, R lasers did not
initial setup. enter within the specified period to the synchronous
sensor PCB.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• Check the points and follow the diagnosis mentioned below Diagnosis
even though the initial setup has been finished.
IMPORTANT
Check Point • The output lines of R, G and B from the laser control
1 Allow the computer to read the backup data. PCB to laser unit are individual.
• Carry out R Laser Output ON, G Laser Output ON and
Diagnosis G Laser Output ON of Output Check → Printer →
Engine Section. If the results are shown below, each
In the case of failure Manual No. laser is normal.
Carry out initial setup. - ☞ 35310
• Laser Synchronous Sensor:Synchronous
• Polygon Mirror Frequency:1380±7
• If all lasers are abnormal, the synchronous sensors (in
the laser unit) may be defective.
Point
If there is a connection failure between the laser control PCB (J/P
1508) ↔ B-AOM, G-AOM or R-AOM driver, the above error
will appear when the system is turned on.
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46000 4/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
4. Troubleshooting
0006 to the laser control PCB and the laser unit. • The processable range of polygon mirror frequency is from
0011 1373 Hz to 1387 Hz.
• You can check the polygon mirror frequency via Input
Diagnosis Check.
Point
Diagnosis
If there is a connection failure between the laser control PCB (J/P
1519) ↔B or G laser driver, the above error will appear when Point
the system is turned on. If there is a connection failure between the laser control PCB (J/P
1515 ) ↔ laser unit, the above display will appear when printing
Failed parts Manual No. starts.
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
B laser driver ☞ 64210 Failed parts Manual No.
G laser driver Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
Laser unit ☞ 61450 AOM driver (In case of suffix number 0002) ☞ 64230
Laser unit ☞ 61450
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
Failed parts
☞ 4200 Failed parts
☞ 4200
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46000 5/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis 0### The backup data of the printer control PCB is
abnormal.
Point 1### The backup data of the system HDD and the printer
The errors described above occur at the system startup if a control PCB are abnormal.
connection failure exists between the printer control PCB
(J/P220) ↔ laser control PCB (J/P1534). NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three
Failed parts Manual No. digits of the suffix number.
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150 • If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply
being OFF or if the printer control PCB has been replaced
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
with a new one, this error message will appear.
Diagnosis
When the data is erased Manual No.
Read the backup data saved in media at the ☞ 35400
close down check.
46000 6/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
Suffix Condition
No. 6082 number
Setup error. 0108 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
Countermeasure message specification registration setup. (G)
Refer to the manual for corrective action. 0109 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
Alarm release carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
NO specification registration setup. (B)
Error message release
YES 0301 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
(R)
Condition
0302 The center correction is out of allowable range when
Suffix Condition carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
number (G)
0001 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0303 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
in the initial setup. (R) (B)
0002 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0304 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
4. Troubleshooting
in the initial setup. (G) (R)
0003 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0305 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
in the initial setup. (B) (G)
0004 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0306 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R) carrying out the paper magazine registration setup.
0005 The center correction is out of allowable range when (B)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G) 0401 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0006 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (R)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B) 0402 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0007 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (G)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R) 0403 The center correction is out of allowable range when
0008 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (B)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G) 0404 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
0009 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (R)
carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B) 0405 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
0101 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (G)
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup 0406 The tone correction is out of allowable range when
in the paper specification registration setup. (R) carrying out the emulsion number change. (B)
0102 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0501*1 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup when carrying out each setup. (R)
in the paper specification registration setup. (G) 0502*1 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range
0103 The center correction is out of allowable range when when carrying out each setup. (G)
carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup 0503*1 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range
in the paper specification registration setup. (B) when carrying out each setup. (B)
0104 The center correction is out of allowable range when 0504 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper when carrying out each setup. (R)
specification registration setup. (R)
0505 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range
0105 The center correction is out of allowable range when when carrying out each setup. (G)
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper
specification registration setup. (G) 0506 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range
when carrying out each setup. (B)
0106 The center correction is out of allowable range when
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper 0507 The target density setting value is out of allowable
specification registration setup. (B) range when carrying out each setup. (R)
0107 The tone correction is out of allowable range when 0508 The target density setting value is out of allowable
carrying out the gamma setup in the paper range when carrying out each setup. (G)
specification registration setup. (R) 0509 The target density setting value is out of allowable
range when carrying out each setup. (B)
*1. Not displayed for QSS-35i.
46000 7/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
Check Point
No. 6087
1 Calibrate the colorimeter. Laser Control PCB system error.
2 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.
Countermeasure message
Diagnosis Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
In case of adjusting failure Manual No.
Alarm release
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100 NO
Error message release
In case of colorimeter failure Manual No. YES
Colorimeter unit failure ☞ 27100
Condition
Calibration plate failure
Condition
35 An error occurs on the laser control PCB.
Failed parts Manual No.
Suffix Condition
B-AOM driver ☞ 64230 number
G-AOM driver
0001 RAM at data output side mounted on the laser control
4. Troubleshooting
R-AOM driver PCB is abnormal.(at power input and during initial
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150 operation)
Laser unit ☞ 61450 0002 SD-RAM mounted on the laser control PCB is
abnormal.
35i 0003 The image data sent from the PC interface PCB to the
laser control PCB via LVPECL and the image
Failed parts Manual No. information sent via ARCNET communication is not
iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151 the same.
Printhead module ☞ 26720 0004 Pixel value of the main scanning direction of the
image data is small or large.
NOTE 0005 RAM at data output side mounted on the laser control
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) PCB is abnormal.(while printing)
Wiring diagram 0006 Exposure does not complete even though a specified
time has elapsed after starting the exposure.
☞ 89000
0007 Pixel value of the main scanning direction of the
image data is small or large.
0008 Lookup table data and shading table sent from the
main PC cannot be transferred to the laser control
PCB successfully.
Communication between the main PC and laser
control PCB via ARCNET line ended abnormally at
turning on the power supply.
• LUT data from the main PC is identified as
abnormal.
• Shading data from the main PC is identified as
abnormal.
0009 Received LUT magazine code and exposure-
specified magazine code do not match at starting the
printing operation.
0010 No exposure-specified magazine code from the main
PC exists.
0011 No instruction of the laser output from the main PC
exists.
46000 8/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
Diagnosis
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ
depending on the suffix number (bit).
Suffix
4. Troubleshooting
number Countermeasure
(bit)
0001 Laser control PCB may be defective.
0002 ☞ 64150
0005
0006
0003 Check the cable connection between PC interface
PCB and laser control PCB. (LVPECL)
• Failure in the laser control PCB
☞ 64150
• Failure in the PC interface PCB
PC Service Manual
This error may occur when the ARCNET
communication status is abnormal.
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication,
refer to the ARCNET Communication
Diagnosis Manual.
0004 It does not occur normally.
0007
0008 This error may occur when the ARCNET
0009 communication status is abnormal.
0010 • Check the ARCNET communication status on
0011 the Version Check display.
0019 ☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication,
refer to the ARCNET Communication
Diagnosis Manual.
0022 Check the wiring connection between printer control
PCB (J/P205) ↔ laser control PCB (J/P1520).
• Failure in the laser control PCB
☞ 64150
• Failure in the printer control PCB
☞ 64140
46000 9/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
NOTE
No. 6101
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Paper Hold Motor operation error.
Wiring diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ 89000
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The paper hold sensor does not turn DARK from
LIGHT even though a specified time has elapsed
after starting the paper hold motor operation.
0002 The paper hold sensor does not turn LIGHT from
4. Troubleshooting
DARK even though a specified time has elapsed after
starting the paper hold motor operation.
IMPORTANT
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may
occur.
Check Point
1 Check that the paper supply unit is installed correctly.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F34 Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
46000 10/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
Countermeasure message
No. 6106
Remove any paper that remains then close Printer Doors 1 and 2. G Laser light source status error.
Alarm release
NO Countermeasure message
Error message release Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
YES purchase.
Alarm release
Condition NO
Error message release
Suffix Condition NO
number
0001 While prints are being made, the interlock switch Condition
(printer doors 1 or 2) turns OFF.
0002 While prints are being made, the printer door 3 Error message Condition
sensor turns off. No.
6105 An error occurs in the light source state of
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
B laser.
• Some electrical parts stop operations when the interlock 6106 An error occurs in the light source state of
switch (printer door 1 or 2) or printer door 3 sensor turns OFF. G laser.
46000 11/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
4. Troubleshooting
0002 R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C and
28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and
then the temperature falls under 25.0°C (lower limit
temperature) again.
NOTE
• The R laser thermosensor is built into the R laser.
• You can check the temperature of R laser in Laser Unit
Adjustment.
☞ 37300
Check Point
1 Refer to 4302 ☞ The display of Laser temperatures
is being adjusted. (R) remains.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
Laser unit ☞ 61450
Laser unit heater ☞ 61450
Laser unit cooling fans 1 or 2 (Suffix number ☞ 61050
0001)
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46000 12/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
4. Troubleshooting
0002 The zigzagging correction sensor does not turn specified length.
LIGHT even though the paper supply arm motor 0002 In initial operation, exposure advance pressure
moved arm unit 1 for the specified length in the change sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT from DARK
reverse direction of paper advance when zigzag even though the exposure advance pressure change
correction sensor is DARK. motor 1 has moved for the specified length.
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55200 For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55300
☞ 55210. ☞ 55310.
Diagnosis Diagnosis
In case of an operation failure Manual No. In case of an operation failure Manual No.
Paper supply arm motor (right or left) ☞ 61200 Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 ☞ 61300
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
In case of a detection failure Manual No. In case of a detection failure Manual No.
Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 61300 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 ☞ 61300
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Failed parts
☞ 4200 Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46000 13/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
NOTE
No. 6137
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Exposure Advance Pressure Change
Motor 2 operation error. Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 does not
turn DARK from LIGHT even though the exposure
advance pressure change motor 2 has moved for the
4. Troubleshooting
specified length.
0002 In initial operation, exposure advance pressure
change sensor 2 does not turn LIGHT from DARK
even though the exposure advance pressure change
motor 2 has moved for the specified length.
Check Point
1 Check that the focal plane regulating guide is
securely attached.
Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F33 Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
46000 14/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
4. Troubleshooting
turn DARK. amount, the lane select sensor does not change from
02 Even though the paper advance pressure change DARK to LIGHT.
motor operates a specified amount, the paper advance 03 In lane select operation, even though arm unit 2
pressure change sensor does not change from DARK operates a specified amount from the home position,
to LIGHT. the lane select sensor does not change from LIGHT to
03 Even though the paper advance pressure change DARK.
motor operates a specified amount from the home
position, the paper advance pressure change sensor For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55420.
does not change from DARK to LIGHT.
IMPORTANT
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55400 • The lane select sensor is attached only in one place of
☞ 55420. far side.
Therefore, the stop position of lane select operation is
Diagnosis supervised only on far side lane, but the stop position of
near side lane and center lane is not supervised.
In case of an operation failure Manual No. If the error cannot be detected in initial operation, by
Paper advance pressure change motor ☞ 61400 communication is unstable, the prints of near side lane
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 and center lane are transported, but an error may occur
on the print of far side lane.
46000 15/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
01 In initial operation, even though arm unit 2 goes
down in a specified length, the arm sensor does not
change from LIGHT to DARK.
4. Troubleshooting
02 Even though arm unit 2 goes up in a specified length,
the arm sensor does not change from DARK to
LIGHT.
03 Even though arm unit 2 goes down in a specified
length from the home position, the arm sensor does
not change from LIGHT to DARK.
Diagnosis
In case of an operation failure Manual No.
Paper advance arm motor ☞ 61400
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46000 16/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
Countermeasure message
No. 6149
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of Paper End Sensor B error.
purchase.
Alarm release Countermeasure message
NO Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
Error message release manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light
NO Intensity again.
Alarm release
Condition NO
Error message release
Suffix Condition YES
number
01 In initial operation, even though the turn unit operates Condition
a specified amount, the turn sensor does not change
from LIGHT to DARK. Condition
02 Even though the turn unit operates a specified - Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
4. Troubleshooting
amount, the turn sensor does not change from DARK Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
to LIGHT. was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
03 Even though the turn unit operates a specified amount Adjustment.
from the home position, the turn sensor does not
change from LIGHT to DARK. NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
currently processed.
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55400
☞ 55420. Suffix Condition
number
Diagnosis 0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
In case of an operation failure Manual No.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
Turn motor ☞ 61400 set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does
In case of a detection failure Manual No. not turn DARK.
Turn sensor ☞ 61400 0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT.
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Check Point
Wiring diagram
1 Clean the paper end sensor using a blower brush.
☞ 89000
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor
Adjustment display. ☞ 36000
NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in
the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED
light intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 61200
Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
46000 17/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
NOTE
No. 6151
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Paper Loading Sensor error.
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 Countermeasure message
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the
manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity again.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment.
4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
currently processed.
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does
not turn DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the paper loading sensor using a blower brush.
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor
Adjustment display. ☞ 36000
NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in
the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light
Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED
light intensity changes.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper loading sensor ☞ 61200
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
46000 18/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46000
Error message: Printer 1
NOTE
No. 6152
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error.
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 No. 6153
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right)
error.
Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
4. Troubleshooting
was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment.
NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
currently processed.
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does
not turn DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Clean the zigzagging correction sensor (right or left).
☞ 61300
2 Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ 36000
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 61300
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46000 19/19
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
Error message: Printer 2
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when - Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when
Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment
was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor was performed in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment. Adjustment.
NOTE NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is • The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
4. Troubleshooting
currently processed. currently processed.
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is 0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK. set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is 0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT. set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is 0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does
not turn DARK. not turn DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is 0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is
set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not
turn LIGHT. turn LIGHT.
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46100 1/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
NOTE
No. 6173
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Printer Door 3 is open. It may be
Wiring diagram adversely affect print quality.
☞ 89000
Countermeasure message
Close the printer door. When you inspect the paper currently
processing, check whether it is satisfactory.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
Condition
- The print door 3 sensor turns OFF while printing
from paper magazine A.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• This error appears to let the operator know that opening
printer door 3 during printing is a wrong operation and that
adversely affects the print quality.
Check Point
1 Check that printer door 3 is securely closed.
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Adjustment failure in the attaching position -
of the printer door 3 sensor
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46100 2/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
0001 Laser temperature is controlled once between 17.0°C 0001 The type detection of the laser unit differs between
and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status) 0002 lasers B and G.
and then the temperature exceeds 45.0°C (upper limit
0003 When the type detection of the laser unit is abnormal
temperature) again.
among the B laser driver, G laser driver and laser
4. Troubleshooting
0002 Laser temperature is controlled once between 17.0°C unit
and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status)
0004 The type detection of the laser unit differs between
and then the temperature falls under 15.0°C (lower
the laser driver B or the laser driver G and the laser
limit temperature)again.
unit.
NOTE
NOTE
• The laser thermosensor is built into the laser unit.
• The laser unit type judgment is performed at two places, the B
• You can check the temperature of laser unit in Laser Unit laser driver or the G laser driver and laser unit.
Adjustment.
☞ 37300 Check Point
Check Point 1 Check that the wiring of the laser drivers B, G and
laser unit have been securely connected.
1 Refer to 4302 ☞ The display of Laser temperatures
2 Check that the wiring of the laser drivers B, G and
is being adjusted. (U) remains.
laser unit have been securely connected.
3 Confirm the laser unit type via Input Check.☞ 35210
Diagnosis
4 Confirm that the types of the B and G laser drivers
Failed parts Manual No. and laser unit are adequate.☞ 61450
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
Laser unit ☞ 61450 Diagnosis
Laser unit heater ☞ 61450 Failed parts Manual No.
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 61050 B laser driver ☞ 64210
G laser driver
IMPORTANT
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser
unit are impossible.
Laser unit ☞ 61450
Replace the unit.
NOTE
NOTE • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram ☞ 89000
☞ 89000
46100 3/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
0001 Though the iBeam control PCB communicated 0001 Control error of the Flash Memory on the iBeam
against iBeam unit, it is not replied even a given time 0002 control PCB
have passed.
0003
0002 Though the iBeam control PCB communicated
0004 Poor contact of a cable between the Printer Control
4. Troubleshooting
against iBeam unit, the response is not right.
PCB and iBeam Control PCB
0005 Control of expose arrangement for iBeam control
This error occurs when turning the power supply on or off, or
0006 PCB has not been completed.
printing.
0007 The exposure does not finish after a specified time
Diagnosis has passed after starting the exposure.
0008 Communication is impossible completely
Suffix Point
0009 When the connection is disconnected while receiving
number
valid frame data
0001 The errors described above occur at the system
0010 When the valid frame data differs between the
startup if a connection failure exists between iBeam
sending terminal and receiving terminal (e.g. data
control PCB (J/P1101, 1102) ↔ iBeam unit (J/P900,
loss)
901).
0011 When having received unspecified data
Failed parts Manual No. 0012 When having received unspecified codes
iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151
Diagnosis
iBeam unit ☞ 26720
Suffix Point
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure number
0004 The errors described above occur at the system
Failed parts
startup if a connection failure exists between iBeam
☞ 4200 control PCB (J/P1520) and printer control PCB
(J/P205).
NOTE 0008 The errors described above occur at the system
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) startup if a connection failure exists between iBeam
control PCB (J/P1513) ↔ PC Interface PCB
Wiring diagram (J/P455).
☞ 89000
Failed parts Manual No.
Failure in the printer control PCB (suffix ☞ 64140
number 004)
PC interface PCB PC Service
Manual
iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151
46100 4/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0003 The image data sent from the PC interface PCB to the
iBeam control PCB via LVPECL and the image
information sent via ARCNET communication do not
match.
4. Troubleshooting
0004 Pixel value of the main scanning direction of the
image data is small or large.
0007 Pixel value of the main scanning direction of the
image data is small or large.
0008 When the lookup table data and shading table data
from the main PC cannot be sent to the iBeam control
PCB successfully.
Communication between the main PC and the iBeam
control PCB via ARCNET line at power input had an
error.
• LUT data from the main PC is identified as
abnormal.
• Shading data from the main PC is identified as
abnormal.
0009 Received LUT magazine code and exposure-
specified magazine code do not match at starting the
printing operation.
0010 No exposure-specified magazine code from the main
PC exists.
0019 There are two communication modes, main
PC→iBeam and main PC→printer→iBeam.
During the exposure, these two communications have
the same negative No. and frame No.
This message occurs when differences between these
negative No. and frame No. are detected.
46100 5/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
Diagnosis
No. 6185
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ
depending on the suffix number (bit).
Roller Move Motor operation error.
Suffix Countermeasure message
number Countermeasure Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
(bit) purchase.
0003 Check the cable connection between PC interface Alarm release
PCB and iBeam control PCB. (LVPECL) NO
• The errors described above occur at the system Error message release
startup if a connection failure exists between NO
iBeam control PCB (J/P1513) ↔ PC Interface
PCB (J/P455). Condition
• Failure of the iBeam control PCB Suffix Condition
☞ 64151 number
• Failure in the PC interface PCB 0001 Even though the roller move motor moves a specified
PC Service Manual amount, the roller position sensor does not change
This error may occur when the ARCNET from DARK to LIGHT.
communication status is abnormal. 0002 Even though the roller move motor moves a specified
4. Troubleshooting
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, amount, the roller position sensor does not change
refer to the ARCNET Communication from DARK to LIGHT.
Diagnosis Manual.
0004 It does not occur normally. Diagnosis
0007
Failed parts Manual No.
0008 This error may occur when the ARCNET
0009 communication status is abnormal. Roller position sensor ☞ 61200
0010 • Check the ARCNET communication status on Roller move motor
0019 the Version Check display. Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path. # Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
☞ 50520
Failed parts
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication,
refer to the ARCNET Communication ☞ 4200
Diagnosis Manual.
NOTE
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46100 6/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Condition
number A communication failure has occurred between the PC interface
0001 Problematic setup calculation result detected. PCB and laser control PCB.
0002
Suffix Condition
NOTE number
4. Troubleshooting
• Perform initial setup again if the error shown above occurs. 0008 Communication is impossible completely
0009 When the connection is disconnected while receiving
Diagnosis valid frame data
Failed parts Manual No. 0010 When the valid frame data differs between the
Carry out initial setup. - sending terminal and receiving terminal (e.g. data
loss)
0011 When having received unspecified data
0012 When having received unspecified codes
IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET
communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the
Version Check display.
☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm
the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.
Diagnosis
Suffix Point
number
0008 The errors described above occur at the system
startup if a connection failure exists between the
laser control PCB (J/P1513) ↔ PC Interface PCB
(J/P455).
46100 7/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
NOTE Condition
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Suffix Condition
Wiring diagram number
☞ 89000 0001 When a failure occurs in EE-PROM write
0002 When a failure occurs in EE-PROM read
IMPORTANT
• Error display does not appear for this error
This error will be recorded in the Error Record of
Operation Information.
The occurrence of this error does not interrupt the
normal process.
4. Troubleshooting
46100 8/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
Diagnosis
No. 6203
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ
Setup error. depending on the suffix number.
0003 The Dmax of the measured daily setup print was 0006 Problems may occur if the
4. Troubleshooting
above 3.8, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days process of performing morning
did not change consecutively day by day and changed daily setup, then performing
suddenly. emulsion number change setup
on the main paper when the air
0004 The Dmax is within the range of 0.9 and 3.8, but temperature has risen, is repeated
when calculating the daily setup correction value, the for several days.
correction value for specific colors was over 10 times In that case, perform the paper
as high as the previous value. specification registration setup,
0005 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the then perform the paper magazine
correction value for specific colors was over 3 key. registration setup of other
0006 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the magazines.
total amount of the correction value (specified color) Process the control strip and
after completing the initial setup or paper check the condition of the
specification registration setup exceeded the limit processing solution.
value.
When the test print color density is abnormal.
Suffix The countermeasure action
Manual No.
number and the failed part
0001 B-AOM driver ☞ 64230
0004 (35)
0005 G-AOM driver
0006 (35)
Between steps R-AOM driver
(35)
G083195
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
IMPORTANT (35)
• It occurs when an abnormal correction value is Laser power supply ☞ 64250
calculated. Confirm that the color density state of the (35)
test print have not changed too much in comparison with Laser unit ☞ 61450
the previous print. (35)
NOTE iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151
• Refer to the setup print judgment flow at the daily setup. (35i)
☞ 56620 Printhead module ☞ 26720
(35i)
0004 It may occur when the
contamination has occurred.
Process the control strip and
check the condition of the
processing solution.
46100 9/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
4. Troubleshooting
0002 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the
correction value density was over 3 key. And plus
correction (print density has been decreased) has
been carried out.
0003 When calculating the daily setup correction value, the
total correction value (density), which started as soon
as the initial setup or paper specification registration
setup was completed, is beyond the limit value. And
plus correction (print density has been decreased) has
been carried out.
Between steps
G083195
IMPORTANT
• It may occur when the processing solution is
deteriorated. Confirm that the color density state of the
test print have not changed too much in comparison with
the previous print.
NOTE
• Refer to the setup print judgment flow at the daily setup.
☞ 56620
46100 10/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
Diagnosis
No. 6205
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ
depending on the suffix number.
Setup error.
When the test print color density is normal. Countermeasure message
Calibration Plate may be dirty. Clean the Calibration Plate.
Suffix The countermeasure action
Manual No. Alarm release
number and the failed part
NO
0002 Clean the calibration plate. Error message release
0003 Replace the calibration plate ☞ 27100 YES
when it is scratched on.
Colorimeter unit ☞ 27100 Condition
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 Suffix Condition
0003 Problems may occur if the number
process of performing morning 0001 When the test print was measured, the Dmax was
daily setup, then performing above 3.8, and the daily setup Dmax data for 15 days
emulsion number change setup did not change consecutively (the Dmax is increasing
on the main paper when the air day by day)
temperature has risen, is repeated
for several days.
4. Troubleshooting
In that case, perform the paper
specification registration setup,
then perform the paper magazine
registration setup of other
magazines.
Even though the color density
state of the test print have not
changed too much in comparison Between steps
with the previous print, the
G083195
correction value may have
become high due to the gradual NOTE
deterioration of the processing • Refer to the setup print judgment flow at the daily setup.
solution. ☞ 56620
In that case, process the control
strip and check the condition of Diagnosis
the processing solution.
When the test print color density is normal.
When the test print color density is abnormal. Suffix The countermeasure action
Manual No.
number and the failed part
Suffix The countermeasure action
Manual No. 0001 Clean the calibration plate.
number and the failed part
0001 Process the control strip and Replace the calibration plate ☞ 27100
0002 check the condition of the when it is scratched on.
0003 processing solution.
NOTE
Clean the strainer units of the
replenisher pumps and the hoses. • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Check the output amounts. Wiring diagram
NOTE
☞ 89000
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46100 11/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
Diagnosis
No. 6208
Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply In case of an operation failure Manual No.
4. Troubleshooting
For details of operation specification, refer to ☞ 55300 Wiring diagram
☞ 55310.
☞ 89000
Check Point
1 Check that the exposure start sensor is not soiled.
2 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment. ☞ 36000
IMPORTANT
• When the error above occurs, if paper whose advance
length is 320.1 mm or longer stops somewhere close to
Roller 1 in the Exposure Advance Unit during
processing, examine the dimensions of the gap
between Paper Supply Unit A and the Exposure
Advance Unit.
Roller 1 and surrounding area
G081998
• In case of adjusting failure Manual No.
Verify that the paper advance length of the ☞ 55200
Paper supply operation is 320.1 mm or ☞ 55210
longer.
Check the length between paper supply unit ☞ 26910
A and the exposure advance unit.
46100 12/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
after the exposure start sensor has turned DARK, the
exposure start sensor does not turn LIGHT. NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
0002 The exposure end sensor does not turn DARK even
4. Troubleshooting
though a specified length of paper was fed from the Wiring diagram
exposure standby position. ☞ 89000
0003 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced
after the exposure end sensor has turned DARK, the
exposure end sensor does not turn LIGHT.
Check Point
1 Check that the exposure start sensor and exposure
end sensor are not soiled.
2 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment. ☞ 36000
IMPORTANT
• When paper is jammed in the turn unit, confirm the state
of pressure release arm.
Turn unit
G083099
Diagnosis
In case of adjusting failure Manual No.
Paper Advance Unit Correction ☞ 36010
46100 13/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
Diagnosis
No. 6210
Paper remains in the Paper Supply Unit. In case of a detection failure Manual No.
Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 61200
Countermeasure message Paper loading sensor
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual. Dual paper magazine PCB ☞ 64190
Alarm release Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
NO
Error message release
YES # Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure
Failed parts
Condition
☞ 4200
Condition
- After turning on the system, releasing the error of NOTE
paper jam, or opening or closing the printer door, the • Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
status of each sensor was DARK.
Wiring diagram
NOTE ☞ 89000
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
4. Troubleshooting
currently processed.
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Paper end sensor A
0002 Paper end sensor B
0003 Paper loading sensor
0004 When there is paper between the paper loading sensor
and exposure start sensor
Check Point
1 Confirm whether the paper remains at each sensor in
the printer.
2 Check that each sensor is not soiled.
3 Check that paper magazine is correctly placed.
4 Check that the paper supply unit is installed correctly.
2 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment. ☞ 36000
NOTE
• When suffix number 0001 or 0002 was displayed, the printer
door may have been shut in the state where the paper
magazine is not correctly placed.
• The above mentioned is occurred by having blocked the paper
end sensor with a normal magazine code has not been detected
by the paper magazine code sensor.
46100 14/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46100
Error message: Printer 2
No. 6211
Paper remains in the Exposure Advance
Unit.
Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
Condition
- After turning on the system, releasing the error of
paper jam, or opening or closing the printer door, the
status of each sensor was DARK.
NOTE
4. Troubleshooting
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is
currently processed.
Suffix Condition
number
0001 Exposure start sensor
0002 Exposure end sensor
Check Point
1 Confirm whether the paper remains at each sensor in
the printer.
2 Check that each sensor is not soiled.
3 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity
Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor
Adjustment. ☞ 36000
Diagnosis
In case of a detection failure Manual No.
Exposure start sensor ☞ 61300
Exposure end sensor
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46100 15/15
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46300
Error message: Scanner
Error message: Scanner
No. 6303−6337
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for
Corrective action of Error message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Error messages not described in the QSS Service
Manual are described in the table.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective
action of Error message.
Error message (Scanner)
Error message table
No. 6303 Scanner Zoom 1 operation error.
No. 6304 Scanner Zoom 2 operation error.
No. 6305 Scanner Focus operation error.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 6306 Scanner IRIS operation error.
No. 6309 Scanner change of light error.
No. 6319 Backup data error. Scanner AFC
No. 6321 Focus auto adjustment error.
No. 6322 Scanner input balance error.
No. 6324 F stop value range error.
No. 6327 Scanner Light Source Section temperature
adjustment error.
No. 6329 Analog setting communication error.
No. 6330 Digital setting communication error.
No. 6331 Line scanning communication error.
No. 6332 Light Source adjustment error.
No. 6333 The Line Data is out of the Standard Range Error.
No. 6334 Lane change operation error.
No. 6335 The Scanner Unit Cover is open.
No. 6336 Scanner Zoom operation error.
NOTE
• In the Error No. message table, the error message No. that the
QSS does not use currently may be described.
46300 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46400
Error message: Film carrier
Error message: Film carrier
IMPORTANT
• The Error messages not described in the QSS Service
Manual are described in the table.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective
action of Error message.
Error message (Film carrier)
Error message table
No. 6400 Perforation Sensor error.
No. 6401 Loading Sensor error.
No. 6402 Ready Sensor error.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 6403 135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
No. 6404 240 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
No. 6405 110 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
No. 6406 120 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
No. 6407 Spool Key operation error.
No. 6408 The Film Carrier is unlocked.
No. 6409 The 240 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 6410 Film Sensor error.
No. 6411 Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment was not
executed.
No. 6412 135 DX Sensor 1 error.
No. 6413 135 DX Sensor 2 error.
No. 6414 135 DX Sensor 3 error.
No. 6415 135 DX Sensor 4 error.
No. 6416 240 DX Sensor 1 error.
No. 6417 240 DX Sensor 2 error.
No. 6423 Auto focus error.
No. 6424 Mount Unit operation error.
No. 6425 Mount detection error.
No. 6426 The lane is out of position.
No. 6429 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB)
No. 6431 Auto focus error.
No. 6432 Mount insertion operation error.
No. 6433 Mount detection error.
No. 6434 Mount detection (inlet) error.
No. 6435 Mount insertion operation error.
No. 6436 Mount elevator operation error.
No. 6437 Mount eject operation error.
No. 6438 135 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 6439 The film strip is too short for processing.
No. 6441 The 120 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 6442 The perforation of the film may be broken.
No. 6443 Move Table operation error.
No. 6444 Cartridge is out of position.
46400 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46400
Error message: Film carrier
No. 6447−6459
Refer to the Connection Unit Service
Manual for Corrective action of Error
message.
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Error messages not described in the QSS Service
Manual are described in the table.
Refer to the Connection Unit Service Manual for
Corrective action of Error message.
Error (Connection unit)
Error message table
No. 6447 I/O extension PCB could not be detected.
No. 6448 The Connecting Unit was unlocked.
4. Troubleshooting
No. 6449 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was not
executed.
No.6450 Film Sensor 1 error.
No.6451 Film Sensor 2 error.
No.6453 Film has stopped in the Connecting Unit.
No.6454 Guide switching operation error
No.6455 Film cut operation error.
No.6456 Arm operation error.
No.6457 Interlock error.
No.6458 Film Processor error. Film will be ejected to the
Negative Stocker.
No.6459 Manual insertion was detected. Film auto loading
cannot continue to the Scanner. Quit the process.
No.6460 Advance Motor control error.
No.6461 Film Advance Guide 1 has opened. The process was
stopped.
No.6462 The Cleaning Leader has stopped in the Connecting
Unit.
NOTE
• In the Error message table, the error message No. that the QSS
does not use currently may be described.
46400 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46500
Error message: Disk/Media
Error message: Disk/Media
No. 6506
Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary
image file(s).
Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
• Select NO to bring up the File Delete dialog box. Delete
unnecessary files in the hard disk.
• Select PASS to stop the operation.
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 When the power supply is turned on or the data is to
be written to the hard disk, the free space of hard disk
4. Troubleshooting
drive is below 4 GB.
NOTE
• The name of the corresponding drive is displayed in the third
line of the message.
C:
• Read only files will not be deleted.
Check Point
1 Delete unnecessary files.
46500 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46550
Error message: Colorimeter
Error message: Colorimeter
4. Troubleshooting
0003 When ejecting paper, paper sensor 2 does not turn calibration plate, paper sensors 1 does not turn
LIGHT although a specified length of paper is fed to LIGHT.
lead the front end of the paper. 0004 When the calibration plate is being fed, paper sensor
1 turns LIGHT.
NOTE
0005 Not occur
• Refer to the setup print color measuring operation flow.
☞ 56610 0006 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a
specified length, paper sensor 1 dose not turn DARK.
Check Point
NOTE
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted. • Refer to the colorimeter calibration operation flow. ☞ 56600
2 Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a
cleaning sheet. Check Point
3 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit 1 If the errors of suffix number 0003 or 0006 may
Adjustment. occur with the calibration plate placed on the standby
4 If the error of suffix number 0003 may occur without position, clean the paper sensor 1.
a paper in the colorimeter unit, clean the paper sensor
2. Diagnosis
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46550 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46600
Error message: Pricing unit
Error message: Pricing unit
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- Power of the Pricing Unit was not on when issuing 0001 Although a specified time has passed since printing
Pricing sheet. started, printing is not completed.
0002 Since excessive communication data is sent to the
NOTE 0003 pricing unit, the printing operation is delayed.
• Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is 0004
4. Troubleshooting
different.
NOTE
Suffix Type
number • Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is
different.
0002 Type A
Bar code pricing unit Suffix Type
number
0003 Type B
0001 Standard
Card printer pricing unit
Pricing Unit
0004 Type C
0002 Type A
Bar code pricing unit
Bar code pricing unit
0003 Type B
Check Point Card printer pricing unit
1 Check that the pricing unit power supply is ON. 0004 Type C
Bar code pricing unit
Diagnosis
• When the pricing unit specification via Machine
Blown fuses Manual No. Specification is set to Not in use, this error does not occur.
F15 PU control PCB ☞ 64241
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Blown fuses Manual No.
PU control PCB ☞ 64241 F15 PU control PCB ☞ 64241
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) Failed parts Manual No.
PU control PCB ☞ 64241
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000 NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46600 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46600
Error message: Pricing unit
4. Troubleshooting
number
0003 Type B NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three
Card printer pricing unit
digits of the suffix number.
NOTE
Diagnosis
• Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is
different. When the data is erased Manual No.
• When the pricing unit specification via Machine Specification Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400
is set to Not in use, this error does not occur.
Failed parts Manual No.
Diagnosis
PU control PCB ☞ 64241
Blown fuses Manual No.
F15 PU control PCB ☞ 64241 NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Failed parts Manual No. Wiring diagram
PU control PCB ☞ 64241 ☞ 89000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46600 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46620
Error: NMC
Error: NMC
4. Troubleshooting
1 Restart the computer.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Confirm the connection to the server. −
46620 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46620
Error: NMC
Diagnosis
4. Troubleshooting
Failed parts Manual No.
Reinstall the Noritsu-eNET software. −
46620 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46802
Error message: Software upgrade
Error message: Software upgrade
No. 6803
Language version of message data is
incorrect. Message display in English.
Countermeasure message
Upgrade software again. If this error recurs, contact us or your
place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
Condition
Suffix Condition
number
- When the power supply is turned on or when the
language of the system specification is to be changed,
the selected language does not appear.
4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
46802 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46900
Error: Main
Error: Main
4. Troubleshooting
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ
number
depending on the suffix number (bit).
(bit)
0001 ARCNET or LVDS cannot be used. Suffix
number Countermeasure Manual No.
0002 There is no enough memory, failed to operate.
(bit)
0004 There is no initial data file.
0004 Reinstall the QSS system PC Service
0008 It loses one frame of the scanned images (0 frame). 0010 program. Manual
0010 The temporary file can not be made. 0040
0020 The number of scanned images is too many. 0080
0040 Check the error of the backup data. 0001 Carry out the recovery.
0002
0080 Check the error of the backup data.
0100
0100 Communication error between tasks 0200
0200 The backup file of the frame format cannot be found. 0400 Initialize the Compact Archive ☞ 36700
0400 The data base file of the archive is damaged. Unit.
0800 • The image data cannot be sent normally from 0800 • Check the LVPECL -
Main PC → Laser control PCB or iBeam communication between
Control PCB (LVPECL). Main PC → Laser control
• The data mainly processed is not consistent. PCB or iBeam Control
PCB.
1000 When writing the data to the input media like MO,
the image data is not written normally. • When recurs, get the log ☞ 37500
data.
NOTE 1000 Check the connection of each PC Service
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation. media drive. Manual
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display. Suffix
☞ 4002 number Failed parts Manual No.
(bit)
Check Point 0040 Hard disk (for system) PC Service
0080 Manual
1 Reset the power supply.
0200
2 Read the system data.
☞ 35400 0001 Laser control PCB ☞ 64150
(35)
3 When recurs, get the log data.
☞ 37500 iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151
(35i)
46900 1/11
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46900
Error: Main
Suffix
number Failed parts Manual No.
No. 6901
(bit) ARCNET communication error.
0800 LVPECL cable -
Laser control PCB ☞ 64150 Countermeasure message
(35) Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase.
iBeam Control PCB ☞ 64151 Alarm release
(35i) NO
PC interface PCB PC Service Error message release
(35, 35i) Manual NO
NOTE
Condition
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Condition
Wiring diagram
When the power supply is turned ON, the version is checked, or
☞ 89000 software is upgraded, an ARCNET communication error occurs.
The communication error occurs temporarily because of the
Wiring diagram instant power failure.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
0001 Printer control PCB
0008 Processor control PCB
0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
0100 PU control PCB
0200 Laser control PCB (35)
iBeam Control PCB (35i)
IMPORTANT
• When this error occurs, the operation may not be
continued. It is necessary to reset the power supply of
QSS.
• The PCB without reference to the error may be
displayed in the second line depending on the equipped
options or ARCNET communication feature.
Check the ARCNET communication path other than the
displayed PCB.
☞ 50520
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the
Version Check display.
☞ 37530
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm
the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.
NOTE
• The name of PCB where the error arises will be displayed in
the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.
46900 2/11
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46900
Error: Main
Diagnosis
No. 6903
Suffix Point Serial communication error.
number
0010 For the Stand Alone Printer at installation, check if
Countermeasure message
Machine Specification→Attached Scanner setting
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
is Not in use if the above error occurs when turned
purchase.
ON.
Alarm release
☞ 37540 NO
Error message release
Failed parts Manual No. YES or NO
ARCNET cable - • Select YES to continue the communication.
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 • Select NO to abort the communication.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Condition
Manual Suffix Condition
Laser control PCB (35) ☞ 64150 number
iBeam Control PCB (35i) ☞ 64151 (bit)
PC interface PCB PC Service 0002 • There was a communication error between the
4. Troubleshooting
Manual colorimeter and processor control PCB.
PU control PCB ☞ 64241 • There was a serial communication error between
the ATX motherboard and colorimeter.
Multi power supply (scanner) Scanner Service
Manual
NOTE
Laser power supply ☞ 64250 • The name of PCB where the error arises will be displayed in
iBeam power supply the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
Failed parts Manual No. For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
If the connecting unit is installed in S1-II Connection Unit Suffix number display.
• The above error occurs if the multi Service Manual ☞ 4002
power supply (scanner) does not provide
the I/O extension PCB with 5 V. Diagnosis
I/O extension PCB Suffix Point
number
# Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure 0002 An error happens if the following symptoms occur.
46900 3/11
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46900
Error: Main
Condition
Condition
Each control PCB does not return any signal when the mode is
4. Troubleshooting
changed.
Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
1### Normal mode
2### Input/Output mode
3### Setup mode
4### Adjustment mode
5### Start Up Checks mode
6### Close Down Checks mode
7### Program timer mode
8### Input Check mode
F### Unknown
NOTE
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
46900 4/11
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46900
Error: Main
Diagnosis
No. 6907
Failed parts Manual No. The file was not found.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140 Countermeasure message
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Contact us or your place of purchase.
Manual Alarm release
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 NO
Error message release
Laser control PCB (35) ☞ 64150 NO
iBeam Control PCB (35i) ☞ 64151
PU control PCB ☞ 64241 Condition
4. Troubleshooting
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
46900 5/11
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46900
Error: Main
NOTE
No. 6908
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Processing response error.
Wiring diagram
Countermeasure message ☞ 89000
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of
purchase. Wiring diagram
Alarm release
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
NO
Error message release
NO
Condition
Condition
When the processing command is given, each CPU does not
return any signal.
The communication error occurs temporarily because of the
instant power failure.
4. Troubleshooting
Suffix PCB
number
(bit)
0001 Printer control PCB
0008 Processor control PCB
0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
0100 PU control PCB
0200 Laser control PCB (35)
iBeam Control PCB (35i)
8000 Colorimeter unit
NOTE
• The target CPU PCB or the CPU in the affected unit will be
displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service
Manual
Laser control PCB (35) ☞ 64150
iBeam Control PCB (35i) ☞ 64151
PU control PCB ☞ 64241
PC interface PCB PC Service
Manual
Colorimeter unit ☞ 27100
46900 6/11
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46900
Error: Main
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
The CPU is reset due to power failure. There is a problem in measuring the test prints with the flatbed
scanner.
Suffix PCB
number Suffix Condition
(bit) number
4. Troubleshooting
0200 Laser control PCB (35) 0001 The space of hard disk is tight in reading the image
iBeam Control PCB (35i) data.
0002 Not occur
NOTE 0003 PC memory was insufficient during scanning.
• The target CPU PCB or the CPU in the affected unit will be
displayed in the second line of the message.
Check Point
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to 1 Restart the system.
Suffix number display. 2 For the suffix No. 0001, delete the unnecessary file,
☞ 4002 and secure free space.
46900 7/11
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46900
Error: Main
Condition Condition
Condition Condition
There is a scanning problem in measuring the test prints with the The communication error has been occurred in measuring the test
flatbed scanner. prints with the flatbed scanner.
4. Troubleshooting
0001 During the prescan, the error is informed from driver. is turned on.
0002 During the scanning, the error is informed from 2 Restart the system.
driver.
3 Reinstall the flatbed scanner driver.
0004 During the scanning, there is a problem with the
image.
Diagnosis
Check Point Failed parts Manual No.
1 Restart the system. Flatbed scanner -
2 Reinstall the flatbed scanner driver. NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Diagnosis
Wiring diagram
Failed parts Manual No.
☞ 89000
Flatbed scanner -
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46900 8/11
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46900
Error: Main
4. Troubleshooting
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
0001 QSS_SEQ.exe file has shut down forcibly.
0002 QSS_Dsp.exe file has shut down forcibly.
0004 NMC-related .exe file has shut down forcibly.
0008
0010
0020
0040 Image processing software has shut down forcibly.
0080 Media I/O transformer has shut down forcibly.
IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET
communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the
Version Check display.
☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm
the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.
• If the error above may occur while printing or during the
data process, also confirm the connection status of the
data transfer cable described in the data flow while
printing.
☞ 50700
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.
2 If the error above may occur when reading data,
confirm the image data is a readable format with
QSS.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
46900 9/11
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46900
Error: Main
Wiring diagram
No. 6921 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
PCB error.
Countermeasure message
Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from
Functions. Then turn off the circuit breaker and turn on again. If
this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
Condition
Condition
When turning on the power supply or upgrading the program
version, each CPU judged that the PCB was abnormal.
Suffix PCB
4. Troubleshooting
number
(bit)
0001 Printer control PCB
0008 Processor control PCB
0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
0100 PU control PCB
0200 Laser control PCB (35)
iBeam Control PCB (35i)
NOTE
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, refer to
Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 64140
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service
Manual
Laser control PCB (35) ☞ 64150
iBeam Control PCB (35i) ☞ 64151
PU control PCB ☞ 64241
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Wiring diagram
☞ 89000
46900 10/11
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
46900
Error: Main
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Condition
number An error occurred during the PC laser interface diagnostic check.
0001 An error of Windows about the USB flash memory is
detected using the self-diagnostic function of the Check Point
main control system.
1 Reset the power supply.
4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Diagnosis
1 Confirm whether the USB flash memory is not being
removed during reading data from the USB flash Countermeasure Manual No.
memory. PC interface PCB PC Service
2 Failure in the USB flash memory Manual
3 Reset the power supply.
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Diagnosis
Wiring diagram
Countermeasure Manual No.
Failure in the USB Flash Memory PC Service
☞ 89000
Compatible Kit Manual
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
46900 11/11
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
48350
Error: Compact Archive Unit
Error: Compact Archive Unit
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
- Reading image data is failed while printing from the - Writing data is failed while saving the image to the
compact archive unit. compact archive unit.
4. Troubleshooting
Hard disk drive PC Service Unit.
Manual
Diagnosis
NOTE
Failed parts Manual No.
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Hard disk drive PC Service
Circuit diagram Manual
☞ 89000
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Circuit diagram
☞ 89000
48350 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
48350
Error: Compact Archive Unit
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Condition
number Compact Archive Unit cannot be used at the start-up of QSS or
- Cannot communicate with the Compact Archive Unit when reading back-up data.
(TYPE2) in order to save to, or print from the
Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2). Suffix Condition
number
NOTE
0001 There is no hard disk drive available for use.
4. Troubleshooting
• This message appears only in the case of Compact Archive
Unit (TYPE2). 0002 Not occur in 35 and 35i.
0003 The hard disk drive has not been formatted.
Check Point 0004 The capacity of the hard disk drive has become below
the lower limit.
1 Check the settings for Option Registration and
Operator Selections of the Compact Archive Unit
(TYPE2). Check Point
2 If this occurs while using the QSS-Kids, check the 1 Reset Option Registration of the Compact Archive
connection between the QSS-Kids and the machine. Unit (TYPE2) and reset the power supply.
3 Initialize the Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2). Restart the machine, carry out Option Registration
again, and check.
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Hard disk drive PC Service Failed parts Manual No.
Manual Hard disk drive PC Service
Manual
NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references) NOTE
• Electrical circuit diagram(s) (references)
Circuit diagram
☞ 89000 Circuit diagram
☞ 89000
48350 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
49000
Error message: Edit
Error message: Edit
Condition Condition
Suffix Condition Suffix Condition
number number
0001 There is no msimg32.dll in Windows 2000. 0001 The image insertion information is defective when
0002 AlhpaBlend function is not supported in Windows reading an information file in the Edit mode.
2000. 0002 The letter information is defective when reading an
0003 The image information file is broken when entering information file in the Edit mode.
in image editing mode. 0003 There is an unknown information data when reading
4. Troubleshooting
0004 There is not the image information file when entering information file extend data in the Edit mode.
in image editing mode.
NOTE
0005 Making data for frame printing is failed.
• This message appears when reading an information file in the
0006 The contents of PSD file is defective when entering Edit mode.
in image editing mode.
0007 Changing the size of template image is failed when Check Point
entering in image editing mode.
0008 Changing the magnification of inserted image data is 1 Check if the information file is not broken in the
failed. template information correction screen.
0009 Reading the letter information file in the template 2 Install the option template again.
selection display is failed.
0010 Reading phrase data is failed.
0011 The contents of PSD file is defective when entering
the information file correction display.
0012 Changing the size of template image is failed when
entering the information file correction display.
0013 Opening the file is failed.
0014 Memory mapping is failed.
NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
Install the QSS software again. PC Service
Carry out the recovery. Manual
49000 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
49000
Error message: Edit
4. Troubleshooting
0004 Reading PSD file is failed.
NOTE
0005 Reading PSD image file is failed.
• This message appears when reading an image in the Edit
0006 There is not the image file to insert. mode.
0007 Reading image file to insert is failed.
0008 The layer information to read image is defective. Check Point
0009 Reading Bitmap file in the preview screen is failed. 1 Make the image data again.
0010 Reading thumbnail file in the template selection
screen is failed. Diagnosis
0011 Writing thumbnail file in the template selection
screen is failed. Countermeasure Manual No.
0012 There is not a file when receiving the template file Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
name. Install the QSS software again. PC Service
Manual
NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.
Check Point
1 Check if the corrective image data is selected.
2 Carry out the operation using another image data.
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
Install the QSS software again. PC Service
Manual
49000 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
49250
Error message: QSS-Kids
Error message: QSS-Kids
No. 9250−9311
For error corrective action, refer to QSS-
Kids Service Manual.
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Error messages not described in the QSS Service
Manual are described in the table.
Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for Corrective
action of Error message.
Error message (QSS-Kids)
Error message table
No.9250 Language version of message data is incorrect.
Order Management Software is displayed in
English.
No.9251 Version error. Confirm the version of Order
4. Troubleshooting
Management Software.
No.9252 Order Management Software was shut down
forcibly. The system will be restarted.
No.9253 QSS-Kids Main system control error. The Order
Store Folder Path was not obtained from the Order
Management Software.
No.9254 QSS-Kids Main system control error. The order
data was not found.
No.9255 QSS-Kids Main system control error. Accepted
order has been completed.
No.9256 QSS-Kids Main system control error. The order has
been completed.
No.9257 QSS-Kids Main system control error. The number
of files in the Order Store Folder and the number of
frames are not in agreement.
No.9300 The processed order could not be deleted.
No.9301 Log file could not be written.
No.9302 There is insufficient memory. Quite other
applications.
No.9303 The Folder Name for the order data could not be
changed.
No.9304 Order Data Folder could not be created.
No.9305 Recorded Data could not be created.
No.9306 Initial Setting Information File could not be saved.
No.9307 The Order Process Information Management file
could not be saved.
No.9308 Processable Order Check File could not be created.
No.9309 Processable Order Check File could not be deleted.
No.9310 Spooler Domain Check File could not be deleted.
No.9311 Spooler Domain Check File could not be created.
NOTE
• In the Error message table, the error message No. that the QSS
does not use currently may be described.
49250 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
49350
Error message: Bravo II
Error message: Bravo II
NOTE
No. 9350−9376
• In the Error message table, the error message No. that the QSS
For error corrective action, refer to Bravo does not use currently may be described.
II Service Manual.
Condition
IMPORTANT
• The Error messages not described in the QSS Service
Manual are described in the table.
Refer to the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective
action of Error message.
Error message (Bravo II)
Error message table
No.9350 The setting file could not be read. Start by default
setting.
No.9351 DLL version is incorrect.
4. Troubleshooting
No.9354 PTIF.DLL process response error.
No.9356 The selected order was not deleted.
No.9357 Failed to write to the CD.
No.9358 PTBurn system error.
No.9359 Tray Operation error. Press the Ink Cartridge
button on the Bravo.
No.9360 The ink cartridges were not found. Open the cover
of the Bravo and press the Ink Cartridge button.
Make sure the cartridges are installed.
No.9361 Bravo Internal Printer communication error. Press
the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9362 The media was not picked. Press the Ink Cartridge
button of the Bravo.
No.9363 Arm operation error. Press the Ink Cartridge button
of the Bravo.
No.9364 Arm Picker error. Press the Ink Cartridge button of
the Bravo.
No.9365 There are no user authorizations on the personal
computer. Login as Administrator, and restart the
software.
No.9366 PTBurn Internal Software error. Restart the
software.
No.9367 CD-R drive for Bravo was not found. Disconnect
all the cables from the Bravo (including power
supply). Then reconnect all the cables to the Bravo
and restart the computer.
No.9369 The Bravo Utility was not started.
No.9370 The PTBurn was not started.
No.9371 The shared folder of PTBurn could not be accessed.
No.9373 Job history information file error.
No.9374 An error has occurred when data writing was
executed on the Bravo.
No.9375 The media was not picked. Remove the media and
turn ON the power supply of the Bravo.
No.9376 An error has occurred when data writing was
executed on the Bravo.
49350 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
49350
Error message: Bravo II
4. Troubleshooting
This page is intentionally blank.
49350 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
5000
5. Operation sequence
5 Operation sequence
Paper advance operation (if the lane is selected) [3502] ...................................................................................55420
Paper rewind operation [35, 35i] .......................................................................................................................55500
Paper splicing processing operation [35, 35i] ...................................................................................................55600
Paper end processing operation [35, 35i] ..........................................................................................................55700
Fogged paper processing operation [35, 35i] ....................................................................................................55800
iBeam Tuning operation ...................................................................................................... 55900
iBeam Tuning test print operation [35i] ............................................................................................................55900
iBeam Tuning Operation [35i] ..........................................................................................................................55910
Processor paper advance operation .................................................................................... 56100
Processor paper advance operation (normal print) ............................................................................................56100
Processor paper advance operation (Setup print) ..............................................................................................56200
Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit unequipped device] .................................................................56300
Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit equipped device] .....................................................................56400
Print sorter unit operation [print sorter unit equipped device] ..........................................................................56500
Colorimeter unit operation ................................................................................................... 56600
The calibration operation of the colorimeter .....................................................................................................56600
Automatic colorimetry operation of setup print ................................................................................................56610
Judgment operation of setup print .....................................................................................................................56620
Replenishment operation ..................................................................................................... 57010
Replenishment operation sequence [35, 35i] .....................................................................................................57010
5000 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
50500
Start up/Closing down sequence
Start up/Closing down sequence
1. The program timer goes off or you press the manual sorter switch.
5. The printer control PCB turns ON the power supply of the internal personal computer.
• The power is supplied to each part of the PC to start it up.
5. Operation sequence
• The PC checks the free space on the C drive of the hard disk drive while it starts up the QSS software.
If the main software does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6900 Main control system error.
If the free space on the C drive of hard disk drive is 4 GB or less.
• ☞ No. 6506 Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s).
7. The following error occurs if each control PCB is not turned on properly after checking the communication
status between the main software and each control PCB.
50500 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
50500
Start up/Closing down sequence
Symptom Error
• If the backup data of the processor control PCB is abnormal. • ☞ No. 5538 Backup data error. Processor
• If the backup data of the printer control PCB is abnormal. • ☞ No. 6081 Backup data error. Printer
• If the backup data of the AFC/scanner control PCB is abnormal. • No.6319 Backup data error. Scanner AFC
• If the backup data could not be read into the laser control PCB from the • ☞ No. 6194 Laser Control PCB control error.
hard disk drive. (For 35)
• If the backup data could not be read into the iBeam control PCB from • ☞ No. 6183 iBeam Control PCB control error.
the hard disk drive. (For 35i)
*1. The system checks the communication status of the PCBs only when these options are registered for Option Registration.
NOTE
• If the backup data of each control PCB is abnormal, backup data is written to each control PCB from the hard disk drive after
Backup data error is displayed.
• Since the laser control and iBeam control PCBs do not maintain the backup data, they are written from the hard disk drive
everytime the power supply is turned on.
• If the iBeam control PCB has been used, backup data is written to the hard disk drive from the iBeam unit.
• After writing the backup data, the exposure engine will be controlled.
11. Checks the communication status between the software and colorimeter.
Description
If there was a communication error between the ATX motherboard and colorimeter.
5. Operation sequence
1. Displays Initializing colorimeter unit.*1
2. Initializing colorimeter unit ends, and ☞ No. 6903 Serial communication error. will appear.*1
12. Checks the communication status from the PC interface PCB to the laser control or iBeam control PCB via
LVPECL.
If there was a communication error between the PC interface PCB and laser control PCB. (for 35)
• ☞ No. 6087 Laser Control PCB system error.
• ☞ No. 6194 Laser Control PCB control error.
If there was a communication error between the PC interface PCB and iBeam control PCB. (for 35i)
• ☞ No. 6183 iBeam Control PCB control error.
• ☞ No. 6184 iBeam Control PCB system error.
13. The laser control PCB checks the conditions of the B/G laser drivers and laser unit. (for 35)
If the conditions of the B/G laser driver was abnormal.
• ☞ No. 6074 B Laser control error.
• ☞ No. 6075 G Laser control error.
If the condition of the laser unit was abnormal.
• ☞ No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error.
• ☞ No. 6076 Polygon Mirror control error.
14. Checks the communication from the iBeam control PCB to the iBeam unit. (for 35i)
If there was a communication error between the iBeam control PCB and the iBeam unit.
• ☞ No. 6182 iBeam Unit control error.
15. The system starts adjusting the LED light source temperature.
50500 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
50500
Start up/Closing down sequence
Model Description
35 The system starts adjusting the laser unit temperature.
1. Displays Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U).
2. Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U) ends, and Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) will be
displayed.*1
3. Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) ends, and Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx. ##sec
will be displayed.
35i The system waits for that the iBeam unit becomes stable.
NOTE
• Displays iBeam temperatures are being adjusted. .
17. Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx. ##sec ends, and the laser control PCB checks the
light source state of the laser unit. (for 35)
5. Operation sequence
18. The process for starting the QSS software completes.
NOTE
• After the QSS software starts up, the message Would you like to proceed to the operation mode? appears if any key is
pressed.
• The system shows the order display when the YES key is pressed.
• The system shows the display of the temperature adjustment when the NO key is pressed.
19. It displays the message The processing solution temperatures are being adjusted.
Model Description
35 Temperature adjustment of the laser unit is completed.
35i Stabilization of the iBeam unit has finished.
22. Displays LED Light Source Standby and Scanner temperature is being adjusted..
• The scanner temperature adjustment ends, and the light source update will be performed.
50500 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
50500
Start up/Closing down sequence
24. After all temperature adjustments are completed, the message Would you like to proceed to the
operation mode? appears.
26. It displays Do not vibrate the machine. Vibration affects print quality.
5. Operation sequence
50500 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
50520
ARCNET communication
ARCNET communication
35 Series:
Laser control PCB
Printer control PCB 35i Series: Processor control PCB
iBeam Control PCB
J/P1528
J/P1527
J/P1548 J/P1517
J/P1524 J/P1516
J/P1547 J/P1545
J/P1523 J/P1546 J/P674 J/P675
J/P232 J/P233
ARCNET ARCNET
5. Operation sequence
ATX MOTHER
BORD
J/P73
J/P288 J/P300
J/P74
PU control PCB (option)
PC interface PCB
J/P20 J/P21
AFC/scanner control PCB
G083162
IMPORTANT
• ARCNET communication figure appears above. You can connect the ARCNET cable to any port if IN/OUT is correct.
The actual connecting position of the ARCNET cable may be different from the above ARCNET communication figure.
For ARCNET communication error diagnosis, refer to ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.
50520 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
50700
Data flow chart
Data flow chart
Print data
Prescanning data
35 Laser unit
ATX MOTHER
BORD VIDEO
R laser R-AOM BOARD
driver
HDD
Bl
ase G-AOM
r
driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver
PC interface PCB
Laser control PCB
LVDS
35i
5. Operation sequence
LVPECL
iBeam Control PCB
iBeam unit
G084483
! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is printing
operation.
2. Process data by the PC interface PCB before processing the image with PC.
NOTE
• PC interface PCB rectifies the gap in the sub-scanning direction (pixel gap in RGB due to CCD).
IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed by DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction.
NOTE
• Image correction of actual scanning data such as color and density correction, DSA, and image rotation are performed on
PC.
50700 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
50700
Data flow chart
• Image data editing such as frame combination, front print combination and paper fitting is performed on PC.
• Prescanning data goes through the PC interface PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as the image data for PJP to be
displayed on the monitor.
• The data sent from a media drive as well as the processing method of data of coming from a film is printed via the HDD.
4. The image data goes through the laser (iBeam) control PCB and is output to the exposure engine.
5. Operation sequence
50700 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
50710
Data flow chart
Prescanning data
Saving Data
Media drive
35 Laser unit
ATX MOTHER
BORD VIDEO
R laser R-AOM BOARD
driver
HDD
Bl
ase G-AOM
r
driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver
PC interface PCB
Laser control PCB
LVDS
35i iBeam Control PCB LVPECL
5. Operation sequence
iBeam unit
! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is media writing
operation (including the Bravo).
2. Process data by the PC interface PCB before processing the image with PC.
NOTE
• PC interface PCB rectifies the gap in the sub-scanning direction (pixel gap in RGB due to CCD).
NOTE
• Image correction of actual scanning data such as color and density correction, DSA, and image rotation are performed on
PC.
• Image data editing such as frame combination, front print combination and paper fitting is performed on PC.
50710 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
50710
Data flow chart
• Prescanning data goes through the PC interface PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as the image data for PJP to be
displayed on the monitor.
4. On the PC, the color and density correction of scanning data is preformed and the image data is
written to each media.
5. Operation sequence
50710 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
50730
Data flow chart
CAU HDD
35 Laser unit
ATX MOTHER
HDD BORD VIDEO
R laser R-AOM BOARD
driver
Bl
ase G-AOM
r
driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver
PC interface PCB
Laser control PCB
LVDS
35i iBeam Control PCB LVPECL
5. Operation sequence
iBeam unit
G084485
! Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is the CAU.
Writing data to the CAU (TYPE1, 2)
NOTE
• The operations of data writing to the CAUs (TYPE1: 12 bit, TYPE2: 8 bit) are the same.
2. Process data by the PC interface PCB before processing the image with PC.
NOTE
• PC interface PCB rectifies the gap in the sub-scanning direction (pixel gap in RGB due to CCD).
IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed by DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction.
50730 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
50730
Data flow chart
NOTE
• Image correction of actual scanning data such as color and density correction, DSA, and image rotation are performed on
PC.
• Image data editing such as frame combination, front print combination and paper fitting is performed on PC.
• Prescanning data goes through the PC interface PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as the image data for PJP to be
displayed on the monitor.
• The data sent from a media drive as well as the processing method of data of coming from a film is saved to the CAU via
the HDD.
4. On the PC, the color and density correction of scanning data is preformed and the image data is saved
to the HDD of CAU.
IMPORTANT
• In case of the CAU (TYPE1), if image correction, such as color and density correction, DSA and image
rotation, is performed, the information data and the image data are saved in the HDD of the CAU. In case of
reading from the CAU, the Correction value shows the value corrected.
• The image data saved in the CAU (TYPE1) is raw data for the scanner. It is not general data. It cannot be
used unless the QSS processes the data.
• In case of the CAU (TYPE2), if image correction, such as color and density correction, DSA and image
rotation, is performed, the information data is not saved to the HDD of the CAU. In case of reading from the
CAU, all Correction value is N.
• Save the image data saved to the CAU (TYPE2) as JPEG data.
5. Operation sequence
NOTE
• In case of CAU (TYPE2), you can save the composite image made using in the Edit mode, to the CAU.
• For the details about the difference between the CAU (TYPE1) and the CAU (TYPE2), refer to Compact Archive Unit
Operator's Manual, Difference between TYPE1 and TYPE2.
Printing from the CAU (TYPES 1 and 2)
1. The image data is output to the laser (iBeam) control PCB via the HDD of the CAU → standard HDD
→ PC laser interface PCB. Image data is outputted to the laser control PCB via HDD of CAU, standard
HDD, and the PC-laser interface PCB.
50730 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55000
Paper path diagram
Paper path diagram
The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the printer by dotted lines.
35, 35i
Paper cutter unit
Arm unit 2
Correction value printing
unit
5. Operation sequence
Turn unit
G083196
The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the processor.
35, 35i
Print conveyor unit Dryer rack
Normal print
Processing tanks and processing racks
Automatic colorimetry of setup print
G083167
55000 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55100
Printer paper advance operation
Printer paper advance operation
This section explains the paper loading operation of paper magazine A or B on the dual paper magazine machine.
The single paper magazine machine uses only paper magazine A.
Paper cutter
Paper magazine B
Paper advance motor 1 (PM20)
Paper magazine A
Paper supply motor A (PM42)
5. Operation sequence
G074569
Did paper end sensor A or B detect the paper leading end? NO Error ☞ No. 6012-01
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
Error ☞ No. 6013-01
YES Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B
Did the paper loading sensor detect the paper leading end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6012-02
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
Error ☞ No. 6013-02
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B
YES
After the paper loading sensor detects the paper and then a certain time passes, paper supply motor A or B turns OFF.
Paper advance motor 1: OFF
55100 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55200
Printer paper advance operation
The paper supply operation varies depending on the paper advance length.
Reference
If the paper advance length is 384.0 mm or more, refer to ☞ Paper supply operation (advance length of 384.0 mm or more) [35, 35i].
This section explains the operations of paper advance, cut and transfer to the exposure advance unit for the advance length of 383.9 mm or
less.
5. Operation sequence
Paper supply motor A (PM42) Paper advance motor 2 (PM21)
G085791
Paper advance is started with it is loaded (the paper leading end is before the cut position).
A specified length of the paper is advanced and stopped where the paper end comes to the hold
position.
Does the paper hold sensor turn DARK? NO Error ☞ No. 6101-0001
Paper Hold Motor operation error.
YES
55200 1/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55200
Printer paper advance operation
Arm unit 1
Paper advance motor 2 (PM21) Paper supply arm motor (left or right)
Paper supply motor A (PM42)
G085792
5. Operation sequence
According to the paper advance length, the paper is advanced
to the paper cut position.
55200 2/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55200
Printer paper advance operation
Cut position
G085789
Is the paper advance length not more than 357.0 mm? NO The paper is advanced to the paper transfer position of the exposure
advance unit.
At the same time, paper advance motor 2 starts to turn.
YES Paper advance motor 2: ON (forward)/OFF
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): ON (forward)/OFF
5. Operation sequence
The paper is advanced to the paper transfer position of the exposure
advance unit.
This immediately turns Paper Advance Motor 2 until the paper rear
edge comes to the CVP printing position.
Did the zigzag correction sensors (right and left) detect arm NO Error ☞ No. 6135-0001
unit 1? Arm Unit 1 operation error.
YES
Further move the arm unit 1 by the correction value entered in the Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction of the Printer Mechanical Adjustment from the paper transfer position.
55200 3/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55200
Printer paper advance operation
5. Operation sequence
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1: ON/OFF
Paper hold motor: ON/OFF
Reposition the arm unit 1 from Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position to Paper Transfer Position.
NO Turns Paper Advance Motor 2 until the paper rear edge comes to
Is the paper advance length 357.0 mm or less?
the CVP printing position.
YES
Paper advance motor 2: ON (forward)/OFF
NO Arm unit 1 stands by at the transfer position until the rear end of
Is the paper advance length 320.0 mm or less?
paper enters to the exposure advance unit.
YES
55200 4/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55200
Printer paper advance operation
CVP unit
Paper supply arm motor (left or right)
Arm unit 1
G085793
Did the zigzag correction sensors (left and right) turn NO Error ☞ No. 6135-0002
LIGHT? Arm Unit 1 operation error.
YES
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): OFF
5. Operation sequence
After the zigzag correction sensor (left or right) turn LIGHT,
a specified amount of the arm unit is advanced and it stops at
the paper hold position.
End
55200 5/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55210
Printer paper advance operation
The paper supply operation varies depending on the paper advance length.
Reference
If the paper advance length is 383.9 mm or less, refer to ☞ Paper supply operation (advance length of 383.9 mm or less) [35, 35i].
This section explains the operations of paper advance, cut and transfer to the exposure advance unit for the paper advance length of
384.0mm or more.
5. Operation sequence
Paper supply motor A (PM42)
G085791
Paper advance is started with it is loaded (the paper leading end is before the cut position).
A specified length of the paper is advanced and stopped where the paper end comes to the hold
position.
Does the paper hold sensor turn DARK? NO Error ☞ No. 6101-0001
Paper Hold Motor operation error.
YES
55210 1/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55210
Printer paper advance operation
G085789
The paper is advanced from the paper hold position to the paper transfer position.
5. Operation sequence
Paper advance motor 1: ON (forward)
Paper advance motor 2: ON (forward)
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): ON (forward)/OFF
NOTE
• Arm unit 1, paper advance motors 1 and 2, and paper supply motor A or B operate simultaneously.
Arm unit 1 stops at the paper transfer position while the paper is being held by arm unit
1 (paper advance is continued to make a loop)
NOTE
• The advance for the loop varies depending on the paper advance length.
If the paper advance length is between 384.0 mm and 420.0 mm, the necessary advance for a loop is a few millimeters (the loop
necessary is as much amount of paper as arm unit 1 advances for adjustment.)
If the paper advance length is 420.1 mm or more, the necessary advance for a loop is approximately 30 mm (the loop is necessary in
order to keep the paper from being advanced until it is cut).
Did the zigzag correction sensors (right and left) detect arm NO Error ☞ No. 6135-0001
unit 1? Arm Unit 1 operation error.
YES
Further move the arm unit 1 by the correction value entered in the Arm Unit 1
Zigzagging Correction of the Printer Mechanical Adjustment from the paper transfer
position.
55210 2/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55210
Printer paper advance operation
Exposure advance
unit
G085794
5. Operation sequence
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1: ON/OFF
Paper hold motor: ON/OFF
Reposition the arm unit 1 from Arm Unit 1 Zigzag Correction Position to Paper Transfer Position.
55210 3/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55210
Printer paper advance operation
Exposure advance
unit
G085795
5. Operation sequence
Paper advance motor 1: OFF
Turns Paper Advance Motor 2 until the paper rear edge comes to
the CVP printing position.
Arm unit 1 stands by at the transfer position until the rear end of
paper enters to the exposure advance unit.
55210 4/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55210
Printer paper advance operation
Exposure advance
unit
Arm unit 1
G085796
5. Operation sequence
Did the zigzag correction sensors (left and right) turn NO Error ☞ No. 6135-0002
LIGHT? Arm Unit 1 operation error.
YES
Paper supply arm motors (left) (right): OFF
End
55210 5/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55300
Printer paper advance operation
Reference
If the paper advance length is between 384.0 mm and 469.9 mm, refer to ☞ Exposure advance operation (advance length of 384.0 mm
to 469.9 mm) [35, 35i].
This section explains exposure advance operation for printing with the paper advance length of 383.9 mm or less/470.0 mm or more.
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 (PM25)
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position
Paper
Arm unit 1
5. Operation sequence
Paper hold motor (M7) Exposure advance pressure change motor 2
(PM27)
G074571
55300 1/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55300
Printer paper advance operation
When the paper leading end is loaded in front of the paper cutter blade, the roller 2 and 3 of the
exposure advance unit starts driving.
At the position the arm unit 1 of the paper supply unit is moved to arm unit 1 zigzag correction
position, exposure advance starts.
At the position the paper goes out several millimeters from the roller 1, crimp the roller 1.
5. Operation sequence
Paper hold motor: ON/OFF
NOTE
• If the paper advance length is 357.1 to 383.9 mm/470.0 mm or more, the motor stops until the laser unit
or the iBeam unit completes exposure arrangement.
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position
55300 2/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55300
Printer paper advance operation
Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper leading end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6208-0001
Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit.
NOTE
• If the paper advance length is less than 357.0 mm, stop the driving of roller 1 until the laser unit or the iBeam unit completes
exposure arrangement.
Exposure advance motor 1: OFF/ON
Paper leading end position: The position a few millimeter short of roller 2
At the position the paper goes out several millimeters from the roller 2, crimp the roller 2.
5. Operation sequence
Roller 1: Pressured
Roller 2: Released pressure→Pressured
Roller 3: Released pressure
If the exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 does not change from LIGHT to DARK
Error ☞ No. 6137-0001:Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error.
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position
55300 3/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55300
Printer paper advance operation
The pressure of roller 1 is released at the position of the paper in front of the exposure
position.
Exposure starts.
At the position the paper goes out several millimeters from the roller 3, crimp the roller 3.
5. Operation sequence
Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper leading end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0002
Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit.
YES
Exposure advance motor 2: OFF
Roller 3
G074571
55300 4/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55300
Printer paper advance operation
The pressure at roller 2 is released when the paper rear end comes around the position before the exposure
start sensor.
Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper rear end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0001
Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit.
YES
Exposure advance motor 2: OFF
At the position the rear end of the paper goes out of the exposure position by
several millimeters, the exposure completes.
At the position the rear end of the paper goes out of the exposure position by several millimeters, the
pressure of roller 3 is released.
5. Operation sequence
Is there a paper to be exposed next?
1
Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper rear end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0003
Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit.
YES
Exposure advance motor 2: OFF
End
55300 5/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55310
Printer paper advance operation
Reference
If the paper advance length is 383.9 mm or less, or 470.0 mm or more, refer to ☞ Exposure advance operation (paper advance length of
383.9 mm or less/470.0 mm or more) [35, 35i].
This section explains exposure advance operation for printing with the paper advance length of 384.0 mm to 469.9 mm.
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 (PM25)
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position
Paper
Arm unit 1
5. Operation sequence
Paper hold motor (M7) Exposure advance pressure change motor 2
(PM27)
G074571
55310 1/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55310
Printer paper advance operation
When the paper leading end is loaded in front of the paper cutter blade, the roller 2 and 3 of the
exposure advance unit starts driving.
At the position the arm unit 1 of the paper supply unit is moved to arm unit 1 zigzag correction
position, exposure advance starts.
At the position the paper goes out several millimeters from the roller 1, crimp the roller 1.
5. Operation sequence
Paper hold motor: ON/OFF
NOTE
• Stands by until the exposure arrangement of the laser unit or the iBeam unit completes.
Roller 1
Exposure position
G074571
55310 2/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55310
Printer paper advance operation
YES
The driving of roller 1 is stopped during the paper cutting in front of the exposure start
sensor.
5. Operation sequence
Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper leading end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6208-0001
Paper has jammed in the Paper Supply Unit.
YES
Exposure advance motor 1: OFF
Exposure advance motor 2: OFF
Roller 1
Roller 3
Exposure position
55310 3/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55310
Printer paper advance operation
At the position the paper goes out several millimeters from the roller 2, crimp the roller
2.
Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON/OFF
Roller 1: Pressured
Roller 2: Released pressure→Pressured
Roller 3: Released pressure
If the exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 does not change from LIGHT to DARK
Error ☞ No. 6137-0001:Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error.
Exposure starts.
At the position the paper goes out several millimeters from the roller 3, crimp the roller 3.
Then, the pressure of pressure roller 1 is released.
5. Operation sequence
The driving of roller 1 is stopped in front of the roller 1.
Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper leading end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0002
Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit.
YES
Exposure advance motor 2: OFF
Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 (PM25) Roller 2 Exposure advance motor 2 (PM26)
Roller 3
G074571
55310 4/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55310
Printer paper advance operation
The pressure at roller 2 is released when the paper rear end comes around the position before the exposure
start sensor.
Did the exposure start sensor detect the paper rear end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0001
Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit.
YES
Exposure advance motor 2: OFF
At the position the rear end of the paper goes out of the exposure position
by several millimeters, the exposure completes.
At the position the rear end of the paper goes out of the exposure position by several millimeters, the
pressure of roller 3 is released.
5. Operation sequence
Process of the next paper
Is there a paper to be exposed next?
1
Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper rear end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0003
Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit.
Exposure advance motor 2: OFF
YES
End
55310 5/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55400
Printer paper advance operation
Paper advance operation (if the lane is not selected) [35, 35i]
Paper advance unit operation explains the operation of the turn unit and arm unit 2 in the paper advance unit.
When performing the lane selection and not performing it, the paper advance operation is different.
If the lane is selected, refer to ☞ Paper advance operation (if the lane is selected) [3502].
Conditions of the lane is not selected (for 3502)
Condition
The paper width is 102.1 mm or more. When the paper advance length is 420.1 mm or more
First print in an order Cleaning print (one sheet out of 50 sheets or 82 sheets depending on
the type)
First print after the sorter operates. Unexposed paper (leading edge processing paper, fogged paper,
splicing paper)
Test print for system adjustment Setup print (only when measuring color with the colorimeter)
Inserting position
Arm
5. Operation sequence
Arm unit 2 Arm
Receiving
position
Paper
Turn unit
G074572
55400 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55400
Printer paper advance operation
Turn unit
Exposure advance unit
Exposure position
Advance roller
Roller 3
Exposure end sensor
Paper advance motor 3 (PM28)
G085797
5. Operation sequence
At the position the rear end of the paper goes out of the exposure position by several
millimeters, crimp the advance roller and start driving it.
Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper rear end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0003
Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit.
Advance a specified length of paper, and stop the rear end of the paper near
the inlet of the turn unit.
55400 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55400
Printer paper advance operation
Inserting position
Arm
Arm unit 2
Arm
Paper Advance Section
Standby
position
Receiving
position Exposure position Advance roller
Paper
Turn unit
5. Operation sequence
Turn motor (PM32) Paper advance pressure change
motor (PM29)
G078385
The turn unit turns 90 degrees, and arm unit 2 moves to the receiving position from the standby position.
A specified length of paper is advanced, the advance roller stops driving and the pressure of advance roller
is released.
55400 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55400
Printer paper advance operation
Arm
Arm
Inserting
position
Arm unit 2
Paper
Exposure position
Receiving
position
Turn unit
Exposure Advance
Section Turn sensor
5. Operation sequence
Turn motor (PM32)
G074572
After the paper rear end is fed out of the turn unit, the turn unit turns 90 degrees.
End
55400 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55420
Printer paper advance operation
Paper advance unit operation explains the operation of the turn unit and arm unit 2 in the paper advance unit.
When performing the lane selection and not performing it, the paper advance operation is different.
If the lane is not selected, refer to ☞ Paper advance operation (if the lane is not selected) [35, 35i].
Conditions of the lane is selected
• If the paper width is 102 mm or less
Inserting
position
Arm
5. Operation sequence
Receiving
position
Turn unit
G074572
55420 1/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55420
Printer paper advance operation
Turn unit
Exposure advance unit
Exposure position
Advance roller
Roller 3
Exposure end sensor
Paper advance motor 3 (PM28)
G085797
5. Operation sequence
At the position the rear end of the paper goes out of the exposure position by several
millimeters, crimp the advance roller and start driving it.
Did the exposure end sensor detect the paper rear end?
NO Error ☞ No. 6209-0003
Paper has jammed in the Exposure Advance Unit.
Advance a specified length of paper, and stop the rear end of the paper near
the inlet of the turn unit.
55420 2/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55420
Printer paper advance operation
Inserting
position
Arm
Arm
Arm unit 2
Exposure position
Advance roller
Receiving
position
Paper
Turn unit
5. Operation sequence
Turn motor (PM32) Paper advance pressure change
motor (PM29)
G074572
The turn unit turns 90 degrees, and arm unit 2 moves to the receiving position from the standby position.
A specified length of paper is advanced, the advance roller stops driving and the pressure of advance roller
is released.
55420 3/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55420
Printer paper advance operation
Arm
Inserting Arm
position Lane select motor
Arm unit 2 (PM30)
Lane select
Paper
sensor (SE26)
Exposure position
Receiving
position
Turn unit
Exposure Advance
Section Turn sensor
G074572
5. Operation sequence
After arm unit 2 goes up in a specified length, while continuing going up the arm selection operation
starts.
After the paper moves to the selection position, the arm selection operation stops.
After the paper rear end is fed out of the turn unit, the turn unit turns 90 degrees.
55420 4/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55420
Printer paper advance operation
Inserting
position
Receiving
position
5. Operation sequence
G074572
After arm unit 2 goes down in a specified length, while continuing going down the arm selection operation starts.
End
55420 5/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55420
Printer paper advance operation
Inserting
position
Receiving
position
5. Operation sequence
G074572
After the paper rear end is fed out from arm unit 2, the arm
selection operation starts.
End
55420 6/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55500
Printer paper advance operation
This section explains the paper rewinding operation of paper magazine A or B on the dual paper magazine system.
The single paper magazine system is only operation of paper A.
Paper rewind conditions
• →Paper was rewound.
• After paper cutting was finished and then 30 seconds passed, the paper was automatically rewound.
• The paper end sensor is DARK when turning on the power supply.
• The error of paper jam occurred on the printer and processor.
• The magazine to be used is changed when the paper is being loaded from the magazine.
• When the paper is end
• ☞ 55700
Paper supply motor B (PM43) Paper loading sensor (SE14)
Paper end sensor B (SE41)
Paper cutter
5. Operation sequence
Paper magazine B Paper advance motor 1 (PM20)
Paper magazine A
Did the paper loading sensor turn LIGHT? NO Error ☞ No. 6014-01
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A
Error ☞ No. 6015-01
YES Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B
The paper is rewound into the magazine. Paper advance motor 1: OFF
Paper supply motor A or B: OFF
After paper end sensor A or B turns LIGHT, a specified time has passed:
Paper supply motor A or B: OFF
Paper advance motor 1: OFF
Rewinding is completed.
55500 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55600
Printer paper advance operation
This section explains the splicing detection with the loading sensor while printing.
Splice section (hole) detecting condition
Splice hole
Paper loading sensor (SE14)
Splice section
Paper cutters
Paper
advance
direction
Y X
5. Operation sequence
G074573
• X = Paper length come out the paper cutter
• Y = Paper length between the leading end of the cut-forbidden area and the cutter
! Operation outline:
! Condition 1: When detecting a splice section (hole) with the loading sensor and the dimension of the
exposure capable area is the print advance length or more (X + Y ≥ Print advance length)
1. Load the paper so that X is same as the print advance length and cut it, and then carry out the printing
normally.
2. Then load the splice section and cut it, and then feed out the splice section.
(Splice section length = Cut prohibitive area + Y mm)
! Condition 2: When detecting a splice section (hole) with the loading sensor and the dimension of the
exposure capable area is less than the print advance length (X + Y < Print advance length)
X + Y < 82.5 mm
1. Load the splice section and cut it, and then feed it to the processor.
(Splice section length = Cut prohibitive area + X + Y mm)
X+Y ≥ 82.5 mm, and the print advance length is 82.5 to 420.0 mm.
1. Cut the rear end of the exposure capable area and feed out the unexposed paper to the processor.
2. Cut the rear end of the cut-forbidden area and feed it to the processor.
X+Y ≥ 82.5 mm, and the print advance length is over 420.1 mm.
1. Cut the rear end of the exposure capable area and feed out to the processor after exposure.
55600 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55600
Printer paper advance operation
2. Cut the rear end of the cut-forbidden area and feed it to the processor.
NOTE
• It is necessary to reprint since the print is not the specified advance length.
5. Operation sequence
55600 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55700
Printer paper advance operation
5. Operation sequence
Paper magazine A Paper end sensor A (SE13)
G074575
• For paper magazine B of the dual paper magazine system, the paper end length is about min. 292 mm to max. 648 mm.
(292 + Paper advance length → maximum of 292 + 610 = 902 mm )
Approx. 292 mm
Paper magazine B
G074576
55700 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55700
Printer paper advance operation
Did paper end sensor A (or B) turn LIGHT? NO The paper processing is continued.
YES
NO YES
5. Operation sequence
Cut the paper, and advance the front end to the exposure advance
unit.
NO
Is the paper advance length 384.0 mm or more? Advance to the processor as unexposed.
UNEXPOSED is printing on the paper base.
YES
55700 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55700
Printer paper advance operation
YES
The film is ejected from the film carrier and the processing is
completed.
Did you replace the paper magazine with a new one?
NO
YES
Click YES.
5. Operation sequence
NO
Do you feed out the first piece of paper without exposing?
Select NO to exposure from the first piece of paper.
YES
55700 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55800
Printer paper advance operation
This section explains the fogged paper operation when the paper is loading (print standby) with the printer door opened.
Timing when the fogged paper is processed
• When the first print is made after the fogged paper was made
When the fogged paper is made
Paper supply section A
Y = approx. 210 mm X
Paper cutter
Rewinding position
G074577
• X = Paper length come out the paper cutter
Paper supply section B
Paper cutter
5. Operation sequence
Rewinding position
X
Y = approx. 318 mm
Exposure advance unit
Paper magazine B
G074578
• X = Paper length come out the paper cutter
! Operation outline
Condition 1: Paper leading end is at the rewinding position.
Model Operation specification
35, 35i 1. When the paper size of the magazine which is in use changes from narrow to wide: One piece of
paper is advanced by 200 mm advance.
NOTE
• For cleaning of the processing rack, carry out the work above.
2. For 35i, the two paper is advanced by 200 mm before printing the test print of iBeam Tuning.
NOTE
• If printing the test print of iBeam Tuning, the paper is advanced for the same purpose of when
the paper size changes from narrow to wide, because the test prints are printed over the
maximum paper width of normal print.
Two pieces of paper are advanced because the system advances paper in both left and right
directions against the advancing direction.
3. Other than No.1 of Condition 1: A paper is advanced by 82.5 mm advance.
55800 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55800
Printer paper advance operation
Condition 2: Paper leading end is before the paper cutter or at the position less than 2.07 in away from the
paper cutter.
Model Operation specification
35, 35i 1. Cut the paper from the paper leading end by 117 mm and feed it out. Feed out the paper of the length
of Y which is shown in the above.
NOTE
• When the paper leading end is at the position 200 mm away from the rewinding position, 234
mm (117 mm x 2) is to be advanced.
Condition 3: Paper leading end is at the position 52.5 mm away from the paper cutter.
Model Operation specification
35, 35i 1. The paper after the paper cutter is to be cut in the initial operation after the printer doors are closed.
Take the cut paper out of the printer.
Cut the paper left to be cut by 117 mm and the cut papers are fed out including the rewinding
position.
5. Operation sequence
55800 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55900
iBeam Tuning operation
iBeam Tuning operation
Arm unit 1
5. Operation sequence
Test Print
(89 mm)
Unexposed print
(200 mm)
55900 1/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55900
iBeam Tuning operation
Papers
5. Operation sequence
Paper supply motor A or B: ON (forward)
Paper advance motor 1: ON (forward)
Paper advance motor 2: ON (forward)
55900 2/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55900
iBeam Tuning operation
Paper Paper
Arm unit 1
G082077
5. Operation sequence
Moves the arm unit 1 to the direction of the exposure
advance section.
NOTE
• When sliding the paper advance roller 2, moves the arm
unit 1 to the position that the front ends of guide is not
to contact the paper with holding the paper edge.
55900 3/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55900
iBeam Tuning operation
Arm unit 1
5. Operation sequence
Paper advance roller 1
Paper advance roller 2
Front: Information of paper lane
G082074
Did the roller position sensor turn LIGHT? NO Error ☞ No. 6185-02
Roller Move Motor operation error.
YES
Roller move motor: OFF
55900 4/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55900
iBeam Tuning operation
Arm unit 1
5. Operation sequence
Paper advance roller 1
Paper advance roller 2
Front: Information of paper lane
G082074
55900 5/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55900
iBeam Tuning operation
Arm unit 1
5. Operation sequence
Paper advance roller 1
Paper advance roller 2
Front: Information of paper lane
G082074
Did the roller position sensor turn DARK? NO Error ☞ No. 6185-01
Roller Move Motor operation error.
YES
Roller move motor: OFF
End
For the unexposed print, process the next test print in same
way.
NOTE
• Operation for the unexposed prints and the test prints
are same. Only the advance length differ.
55900 6/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55910
iBeam Tuning operation
This section describes about test prints and the flatbed scanner operation for iBeam Tuning Operation.
Exposure Center
Paper advance
direction
Test print 2
(Rear)
5. Operation sequence
Test print 1
(Front)
3. Place the test print ejected from the processor to the flatbed scanner.
• Place the test print face up with the arrow up (rear side).
NOTE
• The position of test prints does not affect on the measurement.
55910 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55910
iBeam Tuning operation
Flatbed scanner
Arrow
G082692
4. Prescanning
Long Short
5. Operation sequence
Coordinate check
Measurement
Coordinate check
G082775
• Detect the test prints first.
Compare the length of two blocks in image judgment line to judge test print 1 (front) and test print 2 (rear).
Test print 1 (front) If the left block is longer than another in direction of that the paper type and date can
be read correctly. (see the illustration above)
Test print 2 (rear) If the right block is longer than another in direction of that the paper type and date
can be read correctly.
NOTE
• The blocks are detected from the center to the end of paper without image.
If the line is on the longer block, the system may recognize the line as the paper edge and judge the block as the shorter
one.
• The data on the shorter block is not used for correction.
• Confirm the test print tilt with the image check line.
Measure the test print if its tilt is less than 30 degrees.
55910 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55910
iBeam Tuning operation
• Confirm the paper type with the number of blocks at the center of paper type check line.
4 Paper Type 1
6 Paper Type 2
8 Paper Type 3
• Decides the scanning area referring to the image check line and the paper type check line.
If the two test prints are not detected or the test print in same side is detected
• No. 1932
Make sure that the Test Print is placed correctly.
If the test print tilt is 30 degrees or more
• No. 1932
Make sure that the Test Print is placed correctly.
If the paper type is different
• No. 1931
Paper type is incorrect. Confirm the Test Print.
If the space of the hard disk is run out in processing or the memory is not enough
• No. 6910
Flatbed Scanner diagnosis error.
If the error has been informed from driver software
• No. 6911
5. Operation sequence
Flatbed Scanner operation error.
If the communication error occurred in measuring
• No. 6912
Flatbed Scanner communication error.
5. Scanning
Long Short
Coordinate check
Measurement
Coordinate check
G082775
• Calculates each dot coordinate with the coordinate check line.
Measure the amount of light for each dot with the calculated coordinate.
If any dot cannot be detected with the coordinate check line
• No. 1932
55910 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
55910
iBeam Tuning operation
Long Short
Coordinate check
5. Operation sequence
Measurement
Coordinate check
G082775
• Calculates the correction value with the amount of light for each dot in the measurement part.
If the measured dots is below the specified number
• No. 1932
Make sure that the Test Print is placed correctly.
If dust is detected on the flatbed scanner.
• No.1946
Foreign matter was detected on the flatbed scanner. Remove foreign matter from the flatbed scanner glass surface or test
print and measure again.
55910 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56100
Processor paper advance operation
Processor paper advance operation
This section explains the operation from entering of normal print paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit. It is a
precondition that the temperature adjustment of the processing solution is completed.
Paper advance operation of setup print varies normal print operation.
1. Transmit the paper advance signal from the printer to the processor before loading paper, the processor is
in the conditions below.
• Dryer fan: ON
• Dryer heater: ON
• Processor drive motor: ON
• If the temperature of the dryer section has not reached 50 degree C, the paper loading is paused.
3. The paper rear end passed through the exposure end sensor of the printer.
Position A
5. Operation sequence
Exposure end sensor
Normal Print
Setup print
G083167
4. When the paper leading edge passes position A in the above figure, the process signal is transmitted to
the processor by the printer.
5. The paper leading edge passes through the print sensor in the dryer rack.
If the print sensor fails to detect the paper consecutive six times, the next message is displayed.
• ☞ No. 5535
Paper has jammed in the processor section.
56100 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56100
Processor paper advance operation
G084586
IMPORTANT
• When performing the lane selection with the paper advance unit and not performing it, the detection status of the
print sensor is different.
• When performing the lane selection with the paper advance unit, the print sensor (left) or the print sensor (right)
detects paper.
When performing the lane selection with the paper advance unit (3502)
3 5
5. Operation sequence
1
2 4 6
Dryer rack
Print sensor (right)
G078449
• When the lane selection with the paper advance unit is not performed, the paper is detected only with the print
sensor (right). The print sensor (left) is not used.
For 3501 and 3501i, the print sensor (left) is not equipped since the lane is not selected.
When not performing the lane selection with the paper advance unit (3501, 3501i, 3502)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Dryer rack
56100 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56100
Processor paper advance operation
Reference
☞ Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit unequipped device]
☞ Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit equipped device]
NOTE
• After the fixed time has passed since the last print was ejected to the print conveyor unit;
Processor drive motor: OFF
Dryer fan: OFF
Dryer heater: OFF
5. Operation sequence
56100 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56200
Processor paper advance operation
This section explains the operation that entering of setup print paper into the processor and ejecting from the colorimeter unit. It is a
precondition that the temperature adjustment of the processing solution is completed.
Normal print paper advance operation varies setup operation.
NOTE
• Print to measure color with the colorimeter will be explained.
The following prints that do not measure color with colorimeter unit are same as normal print operation.
• iBeam Tuning print (35i only)
• iBeam engine check print (35i only)
• Monitor setup print
• Black Balance Adjustment (manual) print
1. Transmit the paper advance signal from the printer to the processor before loading paper, the processor is
in the conditions below.
• Dryer fan: ON
• Dryer heater: ON
• Processor drive motor: ON
• If the temperature of the dryer section has not reached 50 degree C, the paper loading is paused.
5. Operation sequence
3. The paper rear end passed through the exposure end sensor of the printer.
Position A
Normal Print
Setup print
G085799
4. When the paper leading edge passes position A in the above figure, the process signal is transmitted to
the processor by the printer.
56200 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56200
Processor paper advance operation
Print sensor
5. Operation sequence
•
Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error.
If the paper is detected in the print sensor before print was detected in the paper sensor 1
• ☞ No. 5552-0004
Dryer Lane Select Guide operation error.
If there are something like fogged parts in the previous process, the selection guide is switched to the colorimeter unit after they are
ejected from the processor.
7. The prints are advanced to the colorimeter unit, and the prints are ejected after measured.
• For the details of setup print color measuring operation, refer to the following.
☞ 56610
NOTE
• After the fixed time has passed since the last print was inputted to the colorimeter unit.
• Processor drive motor: OFF
• Dryer fan: OFF
• Dryer heater: OFF
56200 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56300
Processor paper advance operation
The print conveyer unit operation varies with or without print sorter unit.
Reference
☞ Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit equipped device]
This section explains the progress from the paper goes through the dryer section to the print conveyor unit is operated.
2. Detects the paper leading end of the first order with the print sensor.
3. The conveyor belt starts to operate (movement direction differs according to the paper size).
• Conveyor motor: ON (regular/reverse rotation)
When the following two conditions are fulfilled, the print conveyor moves.
Condition 1: The print sensor detects the paper leading edge of the next order.
Condition 2: A fixed time has passed after the sensor detects the rear edge of the paper of the previous order.
NOTE
• When the condition 2 is not fulfilled, the print conveyor waits for a specified time before it starts to work.
5. Operation sequence
Paper advance direction
Dryer rack
56300 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56300
Processor paper advance operation
Paper with the paper width from 82.5 mm to 152 mm The print conveyor moves 130 mm each to the print receiving 1
or less × the paper advance length from 82.5 mm to 305 box by each order. (Rotation in regular direction) *1
mm When the paper width is under 130 mm
Dryer rack
5. Operation sequence
Dryer rack
Paper with the paper width from 82.5 mm to 152 mm Move to the receiving tray on the back side (Reverse rotation) 2
or less × the paper advance length over 305 mm to 420
mm or less
Paper with the paper width over 152 mm to 210 mm or
less × the paper advance length from 82.5 mm to 420
mm or less
Feed Leading Edge
Fogged paper
Spliced paper
Paper with the paper width over 152 mm to 210 mm or The print conveyor is not moved (collecting on the print 3
less × the paper advance length from 82.5 mm to 420.1 conveyor) *2
mm or less
*1. If the print width is 130 mm or more, it is collected to overlap the next order. It is possible to collect until 3-order specification.
*2. If the print sensor detects the print rear end with the advance length 420.1 mm or more, ☞ No. 0519Remove the prints from the
Print Conveyor Unit. displays with the following conditions.
The advance length of the next print is under 420 mm
The next print is not processed
The next print is the first print in an order
20 paper is collected on the print conveyor with the advance length over 420.1 mm.
56300 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56300
Processor paper advance operation
5. Operation sequence
Receiving tray
G084533
56300 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56300
Processor paper advance operation
G084586
5. Operation sequence
56300 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56400
Processor paper advance operation
The print conveyer unit operation varies with or without print sorter unit.
Reference
☞ Print conveyor unit operation [print sorter unit unequipped device]
This section explains the progress from the paper goes through the dryer section to the print conveyor unit is operated.
5. Operation sequence
Print sensor (left)
G080228
IMPORTANT
• For 3501 and 3501i, the print sensor (left) is not equipped since the lane is not selected.
In case of a control strip:
• Conveyor motor: does not operate
4. The conveyor belt starts to operate (movement direction differs according to the paper size).
• Conveyor motor: ON (regular/reverse rotation)
Condition: When a specific time passes after ☞ 2 The print sensor detects the paper trailing edge.
Condition The direction of the conveyor motor
operation
Paper with the paper width from 82.5 mm to 152 mm or less × the paper advance Rotating in regular direction (Print sorter
length from 82.5 mm to 305 mm unit)
Paper with the paper width from 82.5 mm to 152 mm or less × the paper advance Reverse rotation (the receiving tray on
length over 305 mm to 420 mm or less the back side)
Paper with the paper width over 152 mm to 210 mm or less × the paper advance
length from 82.5 mm to 420 mm or less
Feed Leading Edge
Fogged paper
56400 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56400
Processor paper advance operation
NOTE
• Printer judges the direction of conveyor motor rotation and instruction is send to the processor.
Receiving tray
Reverse rotation
Rotation in
regular direction
5. Operation sequence
Print conveyor
G084534
5. The conveyer belt operates. (The operating direction differs depending on the detection status of the print
sorter unit print full sensor.)
NOTE
• The description of Rotation in regular direction may be varied according to the print size to Reverse rotation by print size.
When the print full sensor is LIGHT
• Conveyor motor: ON (regular rotation)
When the print full sensor turns DARK in a specified time, and changes to LIGHT before the next order is
ejecting
• ☞ No. 0505Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. occurs.
• Conveyor motor: ON (regular rotation)
When the print full sensor is LIGHT for a specified time
• ☞ No. 0505Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. occurs.
Condition The direction of the conveyor motor
operation
The order that is ejected from the dryer rack when the messages is appeared Rotating in regular direction (Print sorter
unit)
The order that is ejected to the next time Reverse rotation (the receiving tray on
the back side) *1
*1. Though the print full sensor is turned to LIGHT while ejecting, all print of that order is ejected to the receiving tray on the back side.
6. Paper is ejected to the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit or the receiving tray on the back side.
56400 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56400
Processor paper advance operation
5. Operation sequence
56400 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56500
Processor paper advance operation
This section explains the operation until the print receiving tray starts to move, after paper is ejected to the print sorter unit.
1. The last piece of paper of an order is ejected to the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit.
5. Operation sequence
Sorter home sensor: SE31
G084532
56500 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56500
Processor paper advance operation
IMPORTANT
• For 3501 and 3501i, the print sensor (left) is not equipped since the lane is not selected.
5. Operation sequence
3. Print receiving tray operation stops.
• Sorter motor: OFF (stops)
Condition: The sorter home sensor turns DARK.
When the sorter home sensor does not turn DARK within a specified time:
• No.5534-02
Print sorter unit operation error
4. The print full sensor of the print sorter unit turns DARK.
• When the print full sensor turns DARK in a specified time, the message ☞ No. 0505Remove the prints from the Print
Sorter Unit. appears.
• The print sorter unit is not activated until attention message is canceled.
• The print conveyor operation varies according to the detected status of the print full sensor. ☞ Print conveyor unit
operation [print sorter unit equipped device]
G084535
56500 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56500
Processor paper advance operation
! Condition that affects the operation of print receiving tray which changes depending
on the paper size and number of prints and so on
IMPORTANT
• The number of prints that one print receiving tray can keep on it is limited. Therefore, prints may be received by more
than one tray even the prints are within the same order.
Basic paper size The number of prints that one print receiving tray can keep on
it
Paper width Advance length 12-order specification 10-order specification
From 82.5 mm to 102 mm or From 82.5 mm to 305 mm or 50 prints 82 prints*1
less less
More than 102 mm to 152 mm or From 82.5 mm to 254 mm or 50 prints 82 prints*1
less less
More than 254 mm to 305 mm or 50 prints 50 prints
less
*1. If there is a print with paper width of more than 102 mm to 152 mm or less × the advance length of more than 254 mm to 305 mm or less is
on the same print receiving tray, the number of prints that the tray can keep is 50.
If a print with paper width of more than 102 mm to 152 mm or less × the advance length of more than 254 mm to 305 mm or less is ejected
on the print receiving tray after 50 or more prints with the basic paper size are ejected, the print receiving tray moves immediately and the
following prints are received by the next tray.
5. Operation sequence
56500 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56600
Colorimeter unit operation
Colorimeter unit operation
Colorimeter
Calibration plate
Pressure solenoid
G084566
5. Operation sequence
1. Release the pressure of the measuring position, start to move Black of the calibration plate to the
measuring position.
• Pressure solenoid: ON
• Paper advance motor: ON (forward)
2. After the calibration plate detects the paper sensor 2, it moves for a specified length and stops at the
measuring position of Black.
3. Pressure the Black of the calibration plate, and measure the density.
• Pressure solenoid: OFF/ON
56600 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56600
Colorimeter unit operation
Measuring
position
Calibration plate
Paper sensor 1
Paper sensor 2
Pressure solenoid
G084567
4. Move the calibration plate for a specified length and stop at the measuring position White of the calibration
plate.
5. Operation sequence
Calibration Plate advance error.
5. Pressure the White of the calibration plate, and measure the density.
• Pressure solenoid: OFF/ON
Pressure solenoid
G084568
7. After the paper sensor 1 detects that the calibration plate passed, moves for a specified length, the
calibration plate stops at the standby position.
56600 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56600
Colorimeter unit operation
9. Judge and register the result of the calibration plate, calibrate the colorimeter.
For details of the judgment, refer to ☞ Judgment operation of setup print.
5. Operation sequence
56600 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56610
Colorimeter unit operation
This section explains the colorimetry of the setup print in the colorimeter unit.
NOTE
• When attention messages or error messages appear after failed to measure the setup print, the setup print is ejected without registering
the result.
• When the measurement would be failed and the attention message ☞ No. 1029 appears, you can measure the setup print again if
inputted to the colorimeter unit manually.
Remeasurement inlet
Colorimeter Paper
Measuring
position
5. Operation sequence
Drive switching lever
Paper sensor 2 Paper sensor 1
Pressure solenoid
G084569
2. Detect the paper leading end in paper sensor 1, and release the pressure of the measurement position.
• Paper sensor 1: LIGHT to DARK
• Pressure solenoid: ON
When paper sensor 1 does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 5535
Paper has jammed in the processor section.
3. After detected the paper leading end in paper sensor 1, wait for a specified time and start to advance the
paper.
56610 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56610
Colorimeter unit operation
Measuring
position
Pressure solenoid
G084569
4. After detected the paper leading end in paper sensor 2, advance a specified length of paper and stop.
• Paper sensor 2: LIGHT to DARK
• Paper advance motor: ON (forward)/OFF
When paper sensor 2 does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 6551-0001
Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit.
5. Pressure the paper at the measuring position, and measure the density.
5. Operation sequence
• Pressure solenoid: OFF/ON
7. Repeat from Step 5 to Step 6 for reaching to the final measurement position, and measure the density of
each step.
8. When the density measurement of each step is completed, release the pressure of the measurement
position and eject the paper.
• Pressure solenoid: ON
• Paper advance motor: ON (forward)
56610 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56610
Colorimeter unit operation
Measuring
position
Pressure solenoid
G084569
9. After detected the paper rear end in paper sensor 2, advance a specified length of paper and stop.
• Paper sensor 1: DARK to LIGHT to DARK
• Paper sensor 2: DARK to LIGHT
• Paper advance motor: ON (forward)/OFF
When paper sensor 2 turns LIGHT
• ☞ No. 6551-0003
Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit.
5. Operation sequence
NOTE
• Since the paper rear end is taken off from the drive switching lever while advancing paper, the drive mode is switched from
paper advance drive to the calibration drive, and the calibration plate is moved from the standby position to the measurement
position. Paper sensor 1 turns DARK in the calibrating plate, however it is not supervised on the software.
Calibration plate
Measuring
position
Pressure solenoid
G084569
NOTE
• Since the calibration plate is stopped at the standby position though pull out the ejected paper, the oneway clutch is equipped
in the advance roller on the exit side.
56610 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56610
Colorimeter unit operation
5. Operation sequence
56610 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56620
Colorimeter unit operation
This section describes the judgment operation to measure the setup print at the daily setup.
NOTE
• When the daily setup is automatically performed after the startup of the program timer, the measurement is stopped to eject the paper
when attention messages or error messages appear.
• When the daily setup is performed from the Menu or Start Up Checks, all the papers are ejected after the measurement even though
attention messages or error messages appear.
NO
Attention message ☞ No. 1555
5. Operation sequence
Measurement value difference of between Black and White
of the calibration plate is above the specified value. The calibration plate data is out of range.
YES YES
A
Measurement of print density
YES
YES NO
All three colors of Y, M and C have the similar tendency. Error ☞ No. 6203-0001
Setup error.
YES
56620 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56620
Colorimeter unit operation
NO A
Dmax is above 0.9.
YES NO
Stores Dmax data for 15 days. Attention message ☞ No. 1029-0002
The measurement failed. Measure it again.
YES
NO
Dmax data is sequentially changing daily. Attention message ☞ No. 1029-0003
The measurement failed. Measure it again.
YES
NO
Dmax is below 3.8.
5. Operation sequence
NO
YES
Stores Dmax data for 15 days. Error ☞ No. 6203-0002
Setup error.
YES
YES NO
YES NO
All three colors of Y, M and C have the similar tendency. Error ☞ No. 6203-0004
Setup error.
YES
56620 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
56620
Colorimeter unit operation
NO
The correction value is below 3 key of the previous value.
NO
YES
All three colors of Y, M and C have the similar tendency. Error ☞ No. 6203-0005
Setup error.
YES
NO
Attention message ☞ No. 1029-0005
Requires plus correction. (Print density has been
The measurement failed. Measure it again.
decreased.)
YES
5. Operation sequence
YES NO
All three colors of Y, M and C have the similar tendency. Error ☞ No. 6203-0006
Setup error.
YES
NO
Attention message ☞ No. 1029-0006
Requires plus correction. (Print density has been
The measurement failed. Measure it again.
decreased.)
YES
56620 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
57010
Replenishment operation
Replenishment operation
1. Create Replenishment Solution or Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open) has been
performed.
5. Operation sequence
4. The replenisher cartridge is set.
• Replenisher cartridge set sensor: ON
When the replenisher cartridge is set
• Shift to Step 5.
If the replenisher cartridge is not set
• ☞ No. 0902[F] Install the replenisher cartridge.
57010 1/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
57010
Replenishment operation
10. The replenishment solution level sensor (lower) detects the replenishment solution.
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If some replenishment solution level sensors (lower) are not on
• ☞ No. 5908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge.
If all replenishment solution level sensors (lower) are not on
• ☞ No. 0905[F] Install the new replenisher cartridge.
5. Operation sequence
• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump: OFF → ON
12. Open and clean the P1R cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, close it.
• P1R cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
13. Open and clean the P2RA cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, close it.
• P2RA cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
• P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is not on
• ☞ No. 5910[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
NOTE
• No error occurs at Manual Open or Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open).
14. Open the P2RB cartridge flushing valve, and clean for a certain period of time, close the valve.
• P2RB cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
• P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is not on
• ☞ No. 5911[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
NOTE
• No error occurs at Manual Open or Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open).
15. Open the P1R agitation solenoid valve, agitate P1R replenishment solution for a certain period of time,
and close the valve.
57010 2/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
57010
Replenishment operation
17. P1R/P2RA/P2RB (upper) replenishment solution level sensors detect all replenishment solution
• If creating the replenishment solution with the replenishment tank completely empty, the replenishment solution is not filled
up until P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turn
on.
Therefore, only for Manual Open and Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open), no error occurs even if P2RA
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor do not turn on.
18. The replenish cartridge moves to the cap cleaning position (upper position).
• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: ON → OFF
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): DARK → LIGHT
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT
• ☞ No. 5900[F] −0007Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK
5. Operation sequence
• ☞ No. 5900[F] −0008Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
20. Open and clean the P1R cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, close it.
• P1R cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
21. Open and clean the P2RA cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, close it.
• P2RA cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
22. Open the P2RB cartridge flushing valve, and clean for a certain period of time, close the valve.
• P2RB cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
24. The replenishment cartridge moves from the cap cleaning position (upper position) to the lower position to
discharge washing water.
57010 3/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
57010
Replenishment operation
25. The replenisher cartridge is moved from the lower position to the upper position.
• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: ON → OFF
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): DARK → LIGHT
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT
• ☞ No. 5900[F] −0013Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK
• ☞ No. 5900[F] −0014Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
26. End
5. Operation sequence
57010 4/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
57010
Replenishment operation
5. Operation sequence
57010 5/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
6000
6. Electrical parts
6 Electrical parts
Dryer section, conveyor section and order classification section (positions of electrical parts) [35, 35i] ........63510
Conveyor unit/Colorimeter unit (positions of electrical parts) [35, 35i] ...........................................................63520
Description of PCB (printer section) .................................................................................... 64110
Keyboard PCB (J391193) [35, 35i] ...................................................................................................................64110
Printer control PCB (J391183) [35, 35i] ...........................................................................................................64140
Laser control PCB (J391318)[35] ......................................................................................................................64150
iBeam Control PCB (J391180) [35i] .................................................................................................................64151
Dual paper magazine PCB (J391184) [35, 35i] .................................................................................................64190
B laser driver and G laser driver [35] ................................................................................................................64210
AOM driver [35] ................................................................................................................................................64230
CVP PCB (J391182) [35, 35i] ...........................................................................................................................64240
PU Control PCB (J391321) [35, 35i] ................................................................................................................64241
Power supply (printer section, processor section) [35, 35i] ................................................. 64250
Power supply (Printer/Processor section) [35, 35i] ...........................................................................................64250
Description of PCB (processor section) ............................................................................... 66200
Processor control PCB (J391329) [35, 35i] ......................................................................................................66200
Processor relay PCB (J391339, J391186) [35, 35i] ...........................................................................................66220
Tablet replenishment driver PCB (J306328) [J] [35] ........................................................................................66500
SM I/O PCB (J391191) [SM] [35, 35i] .............................................................................................................66600
F replenishment I/O PCB (J391322) [F] [35, 35i] .............................................................................................66700
Cables ................................................................................................................................. 68100
Precautions for handling the cable [35, 35i] ......................................................................................................68100
When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper) [35, 35i] .......................................................68550
6000 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
60100
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts
! Explanation
• The PCB and the parts No. used in the PCB installed on QSS differs depending on the type.
• The corrective actions after replacing the PCBs may differ depending on system model though the parts No. of PCB is the same in
the list. Be sure to confirm the explanation of each PCB when replacing the parts.
NOTE
• $ is used and − is unused.
• (J# # # # # #) in the list stands for that the part is no more available.
! Control PCB
Name Part No. Manual No. 3 3 Remarks
5 5
i
Printer control PCB J391183 ☞ 64140 $ $
Laser control PCB J391187 ☞ 64150 $ −
iBeam Control PCB J391180 ☞ 64151 − $
Processor control PCB J391329 ☞ 66200 $ $ Equipped with the control function of
(J391181) the colorimeter.
PU control PCB J391321 ☞ 64241 $ $ Option
6. Electrical parts
PC interface PCB J391179 − $ $ The PC Service Manual explains PCB.
B-AOM driver I124032 ☞ 64230 $ − Each PCB must be replaced depending
G-AOM driver (I124020) $ − on the laser unit type.
For details, refer to ☞ 61450.
R-AOM driver $ −
B laser driver J391160 ☞ 64210 $ −
G laser driver $ −
B laser driver J391231 $ −
G laser driver $ −
Keyboard PCB J391193 ☞ 64110 $ $ Option
Processor relay PCB J391339 ☞ 66220 $ $
(J391186)
CVP PCB J391182 ☞ 64240 $ $ Option
Dual paper magazine PCB J391184 ☞ 64190 $ $
Transistor PCB J490339 − $ $
SM I/O PCB J391191 ☞ 66600 $ $ [SM] specification only
Tablet replenishment driver PCB J306328 ☞ 66500 $ $ [J] specification only
F replenishment I/O PCB J391322 ☞ 66700 $ $ [F] specification only
Temperature and humidity sensor I096003 ☞ 63311 $ $
60100 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
60100
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts
! Exposure engine
Name Part No. Manual No. 3 3 Remarks
5 5
i
Laser unit (Type ###) − ☞ 61450 $ − When replacing laser unit, pay attention
to the combination of the laser unit and B
and G laser drivers.
iBeam unit Z025627 − − $
(Z024775)
6. Electrical parts
60100 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
61000
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
! Layout diagram
The external view of the machine differs depending on the model.
35i 35
13 12 8 9 10
7 14
11
15
6
16
6. Electrical parts
Printer door side
5 3 4 2 1
G077195
IMPORTANT
• The keyboard switch PCB, PU control PCB and PC interface PCB are described in the PC Service Manual.
Refer to the PC Service Manual.
NOTE
• Applicable models are indicated with $ and inapplicable models are indicated with −.
61000 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
61000
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
Printer section
No. Name Symbol Model Manual No. Remarks
35 35i
1 Printer control PCB $ $ ☞ 64140 *1
17
6. Electrical parts
*1. To check these electrical parts, PCB cover 1, 2, and the guide need to be removed. ☞ 20020
*2. To check these electrical parts, the PC control unit needs to be opened or the PC control unit cover needs to be removed. ☞ 21170☞ 21180
NOTE
• For details of the parts No. for each PCB, refer to ☞ 60100.
G084478
61000 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
61000
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
*1. To check these electrical parts, the table cover needs to be removed. ☞ 20020
6. Electrical parts
61000 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
61050
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
9 10
6. Electrical parts
6 1 12
5 7
11
G083169
NOTE
• Applicable models are indicated with $ and inapplicable models are indicated with −.
61050 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
61050
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
*1. To check these electrical parts, PCB cover 1, 2, and the guide need to be removed. ☞ 20020
*2. To check these electrical parts, the PC cover needs to be removed. ☞ 20020
1 2
6. Electrical parts
3
G083189
*1. To check these electrical parts, the printer rear cover needs to be removed. ☞ 20020
61050 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
61200
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
! Layout diagram
Paper supply unit A
17
16
12 14
7
2 9
5
6
11
6. Electrical parts
13 10 15
G083185
61200 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
61200
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
6. Electrical parts
61200 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
61300
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) differ between 35 and 35i.
Reference
☞ Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35i]
! Layout diagram
4 7 10
6. Electrical parts
2 9 3 8
6
5
G083183
*1. To check these electrical parts, the exposure advance needs to be removed.
☞ 25810
61300 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
61310
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) differ between 35 and 35i.
Reference
☞ Exposure advance section (position and description of electrical parts) [35]
! Layout diagram
1 4
6. Electrical parts
8 2
7 10 9
G084444
61310 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
61310
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
6. Electrical parts
61310 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
61400
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
! Layout diagram
9
3
3
7
4
6 6
5 5 1
8
6. Electrical parts
2
2
G084447
*1. When one of the interlock switches (printer doors 1 and 2) is off, not in operation.
61400 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
61450
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
Laser unit (Type ###) Laser unit (# #) #-Laser driver #-AOM driver
Type EeR (Z025651) eR Z025532 B J391160 B I124032
Label: first five digits No. G G (I124020)*1
03065
Serial No.: the first three
digits B10
Type FfR (Z025652) fR Z025534 B J391160 B I124032
Label: first five digits No. G J391231 G (I124020)*1
03045
Serial No.: the first three
digits B11
Type Ff (Z025660) f Z025661 B J391160 B I124032
Label: first five digits No. G J391231 G (I124020)*1
03000 R
Type BbR (Z025653) bR Z025601 B J391231 B I124032
Label: first five digits No. G G (I124020)*1
03075
Serial No.: the first three
digits B12
*1. (I# # # # # #) in the table stands for that the part is no more available.
• The laser unit (type ###) contains a laser unit and the B and G laser drivers as a set, but not the AOM driver.
• For replacing and adjusting the position of the laser unit, refer to ☞ 26710.
6. Electrical parts
• There are two ways to identify the type of the laser unit which is equipped as described below.
1. It can be identified by the version of the LASER on the System Version Check display.
☞ 35500
2. It can be identified by the label placed on the laser unit.
B-AOM driver
G-AOM driver
R-AOM driver
03000
IMPORTANT
• When replacing laser unit, pay attention to the combination of the laser unit and B and G laser drivers.
61450 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
61450
Position of electrical parts (printer section)
We recommend that you replace a laser unit with the same type of laser unit. However, depending on our stock
conditions, there may be situations when we cannot obtain the same type or have a different type in stock. In those
cases, pay attention to the combination of the laser unit and B and G laser drivers, and then replace the laser unit.
Example) When replacing the laser unit (fR) with the laser unit (f).
Composition of parts before replacement Composition of parts after replacement
Laser unit (Type fR) → Replacing → Laser unit (Type f)
B laser driver (J391160) → No need for → B laser driver (J391160)
G laser driver (J391231) → replacement → G laser driver (J391231)
B-AOM driver (I124020) → → B-AOM driver (I124020)
G-AOM driver (I124020) → → G-AOM driver (I124020)
- Addition → R-AOM driver (I124020)
• If you need to add the R-AOM driver like the above example, prepare the two cables listed below.
J/P1503 J/P1641
Laser unit
R-AOM
1
J/P1544 J/P1643
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
6 6
7 7
6. Electrical parts
Cables
G085835
! Layout diagram
Laser unit
G084482
Laser unit
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Laser unit heater H5 Go to ☞ 37300 for ON/OFF controlling of
the laser unit heater.
61450 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63200
PCB position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
PCB position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of PCBs) [SM] [35, 35i] ☞ Processor section (positions of PCBs) [J] [35]
! Layout diagram
8
2
6. Electrical parts
[F] specification
4 1
G083182
Processor section
No. Name Symbol Manual No. Remarks
1 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
2 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
3 Processor power supply PS1 ☞ 64250
4 Transistor PCB Cooling water solenoid valve
(option)
5 F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66700 F specification only
NOTE
• For details of the parts No. for each PCB, refer to ☞ 60100.
63200 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63200
PCB position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
1
G070039
SM replenishment unit
No. Name Symbol Manual No. Remarks
1 SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
NOTE
• For details of the parts No. for each PCB, refer to ☞ 60100.
6. Electrical parts
1
G083231
63200 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63290
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of electrical ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical
parts) [SM] parts) [J] parts) [F]
! Layout diagram
The appearance of the system varies depending on the Process Specification.
13
14
1 to 12
15 to 20
21
6. Electrical parts
22
23 to 25 36
29 to 35 26 to 28
G083192
63290 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63290
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
6. Electrical parts
specification.
23 CD replenisher pump RP1 There is no [J] specification.*1
24 BF replenisher pump RP2 There is no [SM] specification, or the
mounting position is wrong.
25 STB replenisher pump RP3
Refer to ☞ 63300*1
26 CD replenishment solution level sensor LSE1
27 BF replenishment solution level sensor LSE2
28 STB replenishment solution level sensor LSE3
29 CD-W refilling water pump *3 P9
*3
30 BF-W refilling water pump P10
31 STB1-W refilling water pump *3 P11
*3
32 STB2-W refilling water pump P12
33 STB3-W refilling water pump *3 P13
34 STB4-W refilling water pump *3 P14
35 Cleaning pump 1 *3 P15
*3
36 Refilling water tank level sensor LSE4
*1. It is different from [N] specification for other specifications.
*2. For details about processor section fan operation specification, refer to ☞ 63321.
*3. 35i is optional.
63290 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63290
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
! Layout diagram
1 2 3
15 14 13
4
5
6
7
10
9
11
12
16 17 18
6. Electrical parts
G083191
NOTE
• Processor sections (back side) are all same for [N], [SM] and [J] specifications.
Processor section (back face)
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Interlock switch (dryer cover) LS1
2 Tank cooling fan 2 FAN5 Exhaust*1
3 Drive motor M11 If replaced, carry out Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33600
4 Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 NFB1
5 Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 NFB2
6 Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 NFB3
7 Minute Meter CO Option
8 Terminal strip 2 TA2
9 Terminal strip 1 TA1
10 Processor control box cooling fan FAN29 Exhaust*1
11 Tank cooling fan 3 FAN6 Exhaust*1
12 Tank cooling fan 4 FAN7 Exhaust*1
13 CD effluent float switch FS7
14 BF effluent float switch FS8
15 STB effluent float switch FS9
16 STB cooling water solenoid valve MV3
17 BF cooling water solenoid valve MV2
18 CD cooling water solenoid valve MV1
*1. For details about processor section fan operation specification, refer to ☞ 63321.
63290 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63300
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] [SM] [J]
29
24 6
4 28
27
6. Electrical parts
19
12
18
10
17
20
9 16
14
15 11
8 7
G070041
SM replenishment unit
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 CD-A replenisher pump sensor SE32
2 CD-B replenisher pump sensor SE33
3 CD-C replenisher pump sensor SE34
4 BF-A replenisher pump sensor SE35
5 BF-B replenisher pump sensor SE36
6 STB replenisher pump sensor SE37
7 CD-A replenishment solution sensor SE38
8 CD-B replenishment solution sensor SE39
9 CD-C replenishment solution sensor SE40
10 STB replenishment solution sensor SE41
63300 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63300
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
6. Electrical parts
63300 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63310
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] [SM] [J]
1 to 3
5 6
6. Electrical parts
4
G085887
63310 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63310
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
11 10
7 8 9
18
19 3 20
1
5
2
6
6. Electrical parts
14 17
15 4 12 16
G085848
63310 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63311
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
Reference
☞ Processor section (positions of electrical ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical ☞ Processor section (positions of electrical
parts) [N] [SM] [J] parts) [SM] parts) [J]
! Layout diagram
14 13
15 to 20
22
23 to 26 21
27
28
6. Electrical parts
1 to 12
G085855
63311 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63311
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
6. Electrical parts
63311 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63311
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
! Layout diagram
2 1
14 13 12
3
33 27
7
10
34
11
4
5 35
28
6 29
30
8
11
25 24 23 22
17 16 15
6. Electrical parts
26
31
32
18 19 20 21
G085884
63311 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63311
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
6. Electrical parts
35 Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) SE62
*1. For details about processor section fan operation specification, refer to ☞ 63321.
*2. For details about # # # replenishment solution level sensors, refer to the following image.
For the replacement of the replenishment solution level sensor, refer to ☞ 27930.
# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor # # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor
G085885
*3. After replacing each electrical part, refer to Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) ☞ 63312.
63311 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63312
Electrical parts position (Processor section) [35, 35i]
6. Electrical parts
P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor*3
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor*3
Replenishment cartridge opening motor Replacing • If necessary, perform Replenishment cartridge ☞ 4600
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor installation section troubleshooting flow.
(Upper)
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Lower)
*1. P1R, P2RA, P2RB and P1R cartridge flushing valves are to be replaced as a set.
*2. P1, P2 and P3 cartridge flushing valves are to be replaced as a set.
*3. # # #(upper) replenishment solution level sensor and # # #(lower) replenishment solution level sensor are to be replaced as a set.
63312 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63321
Processor (fan operation specification) (35, 35i)
Processor (fan operation specification) (35, 35i)
NOTE
• All the fans above except the exhaust fan are OFF while the program timer activates.
6. Electrical parts
63321 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63510
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section)
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section)
! Layout diagram
13
12
10
11
6 7 1 2
8 3
6. Electrical parts
9
G084416
NOTE
• For the dryer section and order classification section, [N], [SM], [J] and [F] specifications are the same.
For positions of interlock switch (dryer cover), refer to ☞ 63290.
Dryer section, order classification section
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Processor condition lamp
2 Sorter Motor DM4
3 Sorter Home Sensor SE31
4 Manual Sorter Switch (Manual replenishment switch) SW1
5 Print Full Sensor SE32
63510 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63510
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section)
6. Electrical parts
63510 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
63520
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section)
! Layout diagram
6. Electrical parts
1
2
G083227
*1. To check these electrical parts, the colorimeter unit needs to be removed.
☞ 27100
63520 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64110
Description of PCB (printer section)
Description of PCB (printer section)
J171
J179 J178
G083171
! Function
• Connects the operation keyboard.
! 1. Position
Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 61000
6. Electrical parts
• None
! Unused connector
• None
64110 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64140
Description of PCB (printer section)
LED1
P208 P229 P209 P206 P211 P212 P222 TP7
TP1
P207
P226
TP12
P210
LED4
TP4 TP9
P225
TP16
P202
F37
LED3 TP3
F36
TP15 P213
P224 F33 TP5
6. Electrical parts
G083170
! Function
• Controls each electrical part of the paper advance unit, exposure advance unit, and paper supply unit A.
• Communicates with the laser control PCB (35).
• Communicates with the iBeam Control PCB (35i).
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.
• Turns the power supply ON/OFF with the interlock switch (printer doors 1 and 2).
• Controls the buzzer and counter.
• Supplies power to the counter, printer power supply cooling fan, inner cooling fan and the printer control box cooling fan.
• Supplies power (5V, 24V, 36V) to the dual paper magazine PCB.
! 1. Position
Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 61000
IMPORTANT
• Details of the precautions for the optical fiber cables, refer to ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual how to
use tool.
64140 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64140
Description of PCB (printer section)
! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P200 Controls the dual paper magazine unit.
P202 35: Unused 35i: Used (Roller Position Sensor)
P204 Paper magazine code sensor B
P220 Unused
P228 Unused
P229 35: Unused 35i: Used (Roller Move Motor)
P234 Unused
6. Electrical parts
! Component parts table
LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+5 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED2 DC+24 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED3 IL24 V input check ON when power is supplied.
LED4 IL36 V input check ON when power is supplied.
NOTE
• There are other types of TP for the printer control PCB than described above, but they are not used for service.
Fuse No. Rating Purpose
F32 T2.0 A/125 V DC24 V power supply protection
F33 T3.15 A/125 V IL24 V − 1 power supply protection
F34 T3.15 A/125 V IL24 V − 2 power supply protection
F35 T3.15 A/125 V IL24 V − 3 power supply protection
64140 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64140
Description of PCB (printer section)
6. Electrical parts
64140 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64150
Description of PCB (printer section)
TP404 P1508
P1516 P1515
P1517
P1521 P1501 P1502 P1503
P1527 TP408
P1528 TP851 TP852 P1551
TP452 TP451 TP409
P1523 CN2 CN3
P1524 TP403
P1545 P1541
P1546
P1547
P1534
P1548
TP405
P1513
6. Electrical parts
G083172
! Function
• Controls the laser unit.
• Receives the image data from the PC interface PCB.
• Controls correction of image data.
• Communicates with the printer control PCB.
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.
• Controls the interlocks of B-AOM driver, G-AOM driver and R-AOM driver.
• Controls laser unit heater, laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2 and laser control box cooling fans 1 and 2.
• Relays the control signal of the polygon mirror driver and the R laser.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
! 2. Precautions for replacement
IMPORTANT
• Details of the precautions for the optical fiber cables, refer to ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual how to
use tool.
64150 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64150
Description of PCB (printer section)
! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
CN2, CN3 Unused
P1509 Connects to the laser operation record PCB.
P1510 Unused
P1521 Unused
• Although test pins except TP402 are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.
• TP351, 352, 416 and 418 cannot be measured with a voltmeter.
6. Electrical parts
TP301 DC+1 V voltage When the normal value (+1 V) is not detected: R laser temperature
measurement • Failure in the laser control PCB control standard
voltage check
• Disconnection or short-circuit of thermosensor
Replace the laser unit for the thermosensor failure.
TP351,TP352 Unused
TP401 Measures DC+5 V from When the normal value (+5 V) is not detected: ARCNET
the laser power supply. • Failure in the cable connection between the laser communication
power supply and laser control PCB.
• Failure in the laser power supply and laser control
PCB.
TP402 to TP405 Ground Ground for confirmation of 5 V power supply
TP406 DC+3.3 V voltage FPGA, memory, CPU power supply
measurement
TP407 Ground Ground for TP406
TP408 DC+1.5 V voltage FPGA power supply
measurement
TP409 Ground Ground for TP408
64150 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64150
Description of PCB (printer section)
6. Electrical parts
TP851 DC+5 V voltage There is a failure in the laser control power supply if the Unable to output an
measurement normal value (+5 V) is not detected. image from the laser
TP852 Ground Ground for TP851 control PCB properly.
64150 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64151
Description of PCB (printer section)
TP7
LED4
TP13
CN3
P181
TP4
TP5
TP3
P1522
TP6
P1513 TP1 TP2
TP8 TP9
P1516
P1517
P1527
P1528
P1523
P1524
P1545
P1546
P1547
P1548
P1520 P1509 P1510
G083175
6. Electrical parts
! Function
• Controls the iBeam unit.
• Receives the image data from the PC-laser interface PCB.
• Controls correction of image data.
• Communicates with the printer control PCB.
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
! 2. Precautions for replacement
IMPORTANT
• Details of the precautions for the optical fiber cables, refer to ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual how to
use tool.
64151 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64151
Description of PCB (printer section)
! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P1509, P1510, P181, Unused
CN3
• Though test pins except TP9 are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.
• TP1/2/12 cannot be measured with a voltmeter.
6. Electrical parts
TP8 to TP10 Ground
TP11 Measures DC+5 V−3 V from the When the normal value (+5 V) is not ARCNET communication
iBeam power supply. detected:
• Failure in the cable connection
between the iBeam power supply and
iBeam control PCB.
• Failure of the iBeam power supply and
iBeam control PCB
TP12 Unused
TP13 DC+12 V voltage measurement There is a failure in the iBeam control PCB The iBeam unit does not
if the normal value (+12 V) is not detected. operate.
For confirming of the
standard voltage of the
inner temperature
adjustment sensor.
TP14, TP15 Ground
64151 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64190
Description of PCB (printer section)
P277
P279
G083177
! Function
• Drive function of the paper supply motor B
• Relays the sensor output signal of the paper end sensor 3 and the printer door 3 sensor.
6. Electrical parts
! 1. Position
Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 61000
! Unused connector
• None
64190 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64210
Description of PCB (printer section)
6. Electrical parts
Unused
G085831
! Function
• Controls B laser and G laser.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• Install the B/G laser driver depending on the laser unit type.
For details, refer to ☞ 61450.
! Unused connector
PCB Name Connector No. Purpose
B laser driver P1656 Unused
G laser driver P1666 Unused
64210 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64230
Description of PCB (printer section)
G058738
! Function
• Converts the image data to the signal that controls the AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.
6. Electrical parts
• Controls AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.
! 1. Position
☞ 61000
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• The AOM drivers are compatible for each other and can be used together.
! Unused connector
• None
64230 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64230
Description of PCB (printer section)
6. Electrical parts
64230 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64240
Description of PCB (printer section)
G066110
! Function
• Controls the correction value printing unit.
! 1. Position
6. Electrical parts
Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 61000
! Unused connector
• None
IMPORTANT
• Although sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.
64240 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64240
Description of PCB (printer section)
6. Electrical parts
64240 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64241
Description of PCB (printer section)
P299
P300
G068417
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Controls the pricing unit.
! 1. Position
Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 61000
IMPORTANT
• Details of the precautions for the optical fiber cables, refer to ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual how to
use tool.
! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P301 Pricing unit keyboard connection
64241 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64241
Description of PCB (printer section)
6. Electrical parts
8 OFF Unused
64241 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64250
Power supply (printer section, processor section) [35, 35i]
Power supply (printer section, processor section) [35, 35i]
PS1
PS3 PS10 PS12
VR
VR
6. Electrical parts
PS19 PS17 PS19 PS17
G083176
! Function
Compatible Symbo Name Parts Function
model l No.
35 PS3 Printer power supply 1 I038404 Supplies power to the printer control PCB. DC+5 V
35i PS10 Printer power supply 2 I038405 Supplies power to the printer control PCB. DC+24 V
PS12 Printer power supply 3 I038406 Supplies power to the printer control PCB and DC+36 V
the CVP PCB.
35 PS17 Printer power supply 4 I038405 Supplies the power to the printer control PCB, DC+24 V
laser control PCB and PU control PCB.
35i I038403 Supplies the power to the printer control PCB,
iBeam control PCB and PU control PCB.
35 PS16 Laser power supply I038408 Supplies power to the laser control PCB, B laser DC+5 V
driver and G laser driver.
35i PS19 iBeam power supply I038404 Supplies the power to the iBeam control PCB DC+5 V
and the printhead module.
64250 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
64250
Power supply (printer section, processor section) [35, 35i]
IMPORTANT
• Each power supply is equipped with the overvoltage and overheat protection functions. If these functions are
operated, turn off the circuit breaker of the system and wait for a while, then turn on again. If the overheat protection
function is operated, check if each cooling fan is in operation.
! 1. Position
Model Reference
35, 35i ☞ 61000
6. Electrical parts
! Unused connector
Only CN4 unused which is for Laser power supply 2 (PS16).
64250 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
66200
Description of PCB (processor section)
Description of PCB (processor section)
LED5
TP12
LED9
P672
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Controls each electrical part of the processor section.
• Controls the colorimeter unit.
• Relays the communication between the colorimeter and PC.
• Communicates with the PC.
• The difference between processor control PCBs (J391181) and (J391329) is that processor control PCB (J391329) is the PCB that
(P707) connector is added to processor control PCB (J391181). (For the F specification)
• The processor control PCB (J391181) cannot be used with the F specification.
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• Backup the system data.
☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.
• Check the jumper connector.
IMPORTANT
• Details of the precautions for the optical fiber cables, refer to ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual how
•
to use tool.
66200 1/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
66200
Description of PCB (processor section)
☞ 35600
• Read the system data.
☞ 35400
• Correct the front end advance length and the error by the colorimeter unit adjustment.
☞ 35100
! 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
• ☞ 4203
! 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse
• ☞ 4252
! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P671 Unused
P672 [N] specification: unused
[SM] specification: connecting to SM I/O PCB
6. Electrical parts
[J] specification: unused
[F] specification: connecting to F replenishment driver PCB
P686
P689 For chilling unit Option
P690 Unused
P691 Print sorter unit Option
P693 Print sorter unit Option
P695 Unused
P697 Unused
P698 For cooling water unit Option
P699 Hour meter Option
P700, P701 Unused
P707 [N] [SM] [J] specification: unused
IMPORTANT
• Although sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.
66200 2/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
66200
Description of PCB (processor section)
6. Electrical parts
Cleaning
pump
LED1 ON
LED2 OFF
LED3 OFF
66200 3/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
66200
Description of PCB (processor section)
6. Electrical parts
66200 4/4
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
66220
Description of PCB (processor section)
LED10 LED12
P651
LED8
X7
LED9
X1 X3 X4
TP3 P647
X2
FL1 FL2 FL3 FL4
P641
P645
6. Electrical parts
TA3 L1 P640
P653
G083174
! Function
• Changes the power supply specifications.
• Supplies power to each unit.
Dryer heater, processing solution heater, dryer fan, drive motor and printer section
• Protects the power surge.
• Supplies the power of AC 200 V line.
• The electrical parts mounted on the processor relay PCB (J391339) and (J391186) are all the same and compatible.
• Even if the circuit breaker of the machine is turned off, voltage is applied to terminal TA3 on processor relay PCB. If
processor relay PCB is to be replaced, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the main power supply.
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• Wire the terminal strip TA3 according to the voltage specification of the main body.
• P655 connector is connected according to the voltage used.
66220 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
66220
Description of PCB (processor section)
! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P647 Unused The starter jumper is connected at forced startup.
6. Electrical parts
LED9 Relay X2 operation check (printer main relay)
LED10 Relay X8 operation check (dryer cover)
LED11 Relay X5 operation check (processor top cover)
LED12 Relay X3, X4 operation check (dryer safety thermostat)
LED13 TR7 operation check (dryer fan)
LED14 DC24 V power supply check ON when power is supplied.
66220 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
66500
Description of PCB (processor section)
G050714
! Function
• Supplies the power to each sensor of the tablet replenishment section and relays the input signal.
• Lights LEDs, drives motors and relays output signals on the tablet replenishment section
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None
6. Electrical parts
! 3. Adjustment after replacement
• None
! Unused connector
• None
66500 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
66600
Description of PCB (processor section)
Unused
G070013
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Supplies the power to each sensor of the SM replenishment section and relays the input signal.
• Drives each replenisher pump and water supply pump of the SM replenishment section and relays the output signal.
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None
! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P606 Unused
66600 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
66600
Description of PCB (processor section)
6. Electrical parts
VR1 CD−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR2 CD−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR3 CD−C replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR4 STB replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR5 BF−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR6 BF−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
66600 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
66700
Description of PCB (processor section)
P600
TP5 TP3
LED3
P599
! Function
6. Electrical parts
• Drives motor, each solenoid valve, replenisher pump and water supply pump of the F replenishment section, and relays the output
signal.
• Detects the solution level of the replenishment tank and controls the interlock switch (replenisher section door).
! 1. Position
☞ 63200
! 2. Precautions for replacement
• None
! Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P608, P609 Unused
66700 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
66700
Description of PCB (processor section)
6. Electrical parts
66700 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
68100
Cables
Cables
IMPORTANT
• For details of precautions for using optical fiber cable, refer to how to use tool and The Factor List of the ARCNET
Communication Errors in ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual.
! PCBs and unit to which the LVDS cable has been connected
PCB Name Manual No. Precautions when handling the LVDS cable
Scanner unit - Do not bend the LVDS cable by R20 mm or less.
PC interface PCB PC Service Manual Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least R50 mm.
LVDS cable
6. Electrical parts
! PCBs which connect the LVPECL cable
PCB Name Manual No. Precautions when handling the LVPECL cable
PC interface PCB PC Service Manual Do not bend the LVPECL cable by R25.4 mm or less.
Laser control PCB (35) ☞ 64150 Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least R50 mm.
iBeam Control PCB (35i) ☞ 64151
LVPECL cable
R25.4mm
68100 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
68550
Cables
When the power is not supplied (How to use the starter jumper) [35, 35i]
! Function
• You can supply power forcibly using the starter jumper when 200 V to 240 V is not supplied during operation.
! Status
• Power supply (200 V to 240 V) is not supplied during operation.
• When the program timer is activated or temperature is being increased, pressing the manual sorter switch for two seconds or
longer does not supply the power (from 200 V to 240 V ).
6. Electrical parts
Processor relay PCB Processor relay PCB
G083184
68550 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
68550
Cables
! Diagnosis
No problem.
ON OFF
Repair or
replace Check if the connector is connected incorrectly, or
cables are disconnected.
J/P641 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P431 (relay) ↔
J/P432 (relay)
There is a
problem. Check the Processor relay PCB.
No problem.
6. Electrical parts
No problem.
Turn off the power supply and attach the starter jumper on the connector (P647) of the
processor relay PCB. Make the processor relay PCB between 200 V and 240 V turn
ON forcibly.
OFF
68550 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
68550
Cables
6. Electrical parts
68550 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
7000
7000 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70010
Setup for service personnel
Setup for service personnel
For stand-alone printer, scanner and AFC-related specifications are not necessary.
! Procedures
1. No. 1319: Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted. may appear onscreen when
the machine is turned on.
If the attention message shown above appears onscreen, scanner-related data will be initialized after the system is restarted.
For details, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
• For the Stand Alone Printer at installation, No.6901: ARCNET communication error. may occur when turned ON.
Press and hold Ctrl and Alt key, and press D key. Then, change the setting of Attached Scanner in Machine Specification to Not
in use via Machine Specification in Debug mode.
☞ 37540
2. When registering or updating the light source at the installation, the messages No. 6331: Line
scanning communication error. or No. 6900: Main control system error. may appear.
When the error above occurs, release the error and upgrade the system using CD so as not to display this error message.
70010 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70010
Setup for service personnel
70010 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70010
Setup for service personnel
13. Install the driver software referring to the operator's manual provided with the flatbed scanner. (35i)
14. Check the processor settings for [N], [SM], [J] and [F] specifications.
70010 3/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70021
Setup for service personnel
For stand-alone printer, scanner and AFC-related specifications are not necessary.
! Procedures
Line A
A
Line B
G074514
70021 1/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70021
Setup for service personnel
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure advance adjustment is carried out by magazine A or B, it is complete.
• Carry out exposure center correction for each paper magazine A and B.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance Adjustment 1
Rear end
G082086
(1) Check the Paper Front End to 0 mm (0 inch)-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
IMPORTANT
• When Exposure Advance Adjustment 2 is carried out by magazine A or B, it is complete.
70021 2/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70021
Setup for service personnel
A
Exposure Image Correction: 254 mm
G084436
Go to Exposure Position Adjustment → F: Functions → Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazines A/B) using the
paper with the maximum width that is in use and confirm the three points above. If they are out of the standard, adjust them.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification correction, exposure position adjustment, exposure magnification fine
adjustment are carried out for any one of magazine A, B, it is complete.
• Make a test print with the paper of 152 mm or more.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position Adjustment
70021 3/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70021
Setup for service personnel
Center line
G084434
7. Initial Setup
Follow the instructions on the Initial Setup display. When two or three paper types are to be used, carry out Paper
Specification Registration/Setup for each paper on the Paper Specification Registration/Setup display.
Bringing up the display
Extension: 2260 → Setup → Initial Setup
70021 4/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70021
Setup for service personnel
(1) Set the print channel to print from Each media or Flatbed Scanner.
IMPORTANT
• If color correction is necessary when printing from each media or the flatbed scanner, correct the
balance value (C, H, P) of each print channel. So, it is necessary to set each print channel for each
media and each flatbed scanner.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Print Channel
11. Checking the print color and density [Master DataReference Slope, Scanner SlopeDX Slope]
(1) Make each print of [N (normal), U (under) and O (over)] from the 240 negative•positive, 120 negative•positive,
and 110 negative•positive, which are frequently used at the shop.
(2) If color or density correction is necessary, correct them in Scanner Slope Correction (Negative).
70021 5/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70021
Setup for service personnel
(1) If DSA correction is necessary after making prints of [N (normal), U (under) and O (over)] from the
negative•positive (135, 240, 120, and 110), set TYPE 1, 2 and 3 of each DSA via Master Data.
NOTE
• DSA correction can be set for each print channel.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Master Data → DSA
16. DSA setting [Each media, flatbed scanner and Net Order]
(1) If DSA correction is necessary when printing from each media, the flatbed scanner, or Net Order, set TYPE 1, 2
and 3 of each DSA via Master Data.
NOTE
• DSA correction can be set for each print channel.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Master Data → DSA
70021 6/6
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70040
Setup for service personnel
The English messages are displayed on the monitor on the system which are to be shipped outside Japan.
It is necessary to configure the Regional Options and install the translated message data so that the messages in the local language are
displayed and text in that language can be input.
Change the setting according to the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
• Prepare the following data in advance.
• Translated message file (Save the data to a floppy disk.)
• Translated HELP files (Save the data to a CD-R or a CD-R/W.)
Bring up the Windows display when setting each item such as the dictionary function relating to the Windows system.
Switch the display according to the following procedure.
1. Bring up the Close Down Checks display.
Bringing up the display
On the Order Display, click F. → Menu → Extension → Close Down Checks
Close Down Checks display
S0009-00-UM02
2. Click F: Functions.
The F: Functions display appears.
F: Functions display
Build the translated local language's message file in the system in advance. Carry out the operation according to the following
procedure.
1. Insert the floppy disk in which the message data is saved into the floppy disk drive.
2. Double-click Setup.exe in the floppy disk.
Installation starts.
70040 1/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70040
Setup for service personnel
3. Click Next.
Example: InstallShield Wizard
G050657
4. Click Finish.
Example: InstallShield Wizard
G050660
1. Insert the CD-ROM in which the HELP file is saved into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the Setup.exe file in the CD-R or the CD-R/W.
Installation starts.
70040 2/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70040
Setup for service personnel
3. Click Next.
Example: InstallShield Wizard
G056142
4. Click Finish.
Example: InstallShield Wizard
G050628
70040 3/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70040
Setup for service personnel
G050683
The Regional Options display appears.
3. Click the General tab (index) and set the region (country) and language.
(1) Select the appropriate language and check the box in Language settings for the system.
Example: Regional Options display
G050662
70040 4/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70040
Setup for service personnel
G050612
4. Click the Input Locales tab (index) and set the dictionary function.
(1) Click Add.
Example: Regional Options display
G050666
70040 5/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70040
Setup for service personnel
G050666
G050663
5. Click Apply.
Example: Regional Options display
G050663
70040 6/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70040
Setup for service personnel
6. Click OK.
Example: Regional Options display
G050663
7. Insert the Windows 2000 Professional CD-R or CD-R/W into the CD-ROM drive and click OK.
Example: InstallShield Wizard
G050664
The file copy starts. After the copy, you are prompted to restart the system.
8. Click No.
Example: InstallShield Wizard
G050667
G050604
G050605
70040 7/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70040
Setup for service personnel
S3066-00-SM00
S3066-00-SM00
70040 8/8
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70050
Setup for service personnel
70050 1/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70050
Setup for service personnel
70050 2/2
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70051
Setup for service personnel
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output
amount [ Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting ].
• Refer to ☞ 33590.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting
70051 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70060
Setup for service personnel
Adjustment check for scanners S-4 and that for S1-II are different.
• For S1-II, refer to ☞ Scanner section adjustment check [S1-II].
2. Check the light axis and swing and tilt of the scanner unit.
Check that Light Axis Adjustment and Swing and Tilt Adjustment are in right positions.
IMPORTANT
• When you do not have the 135/240 AFC, use the 120 AFC and 110 AFC for checking.
*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Light Axis Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the above priority.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Light Axis Adjustment.
Priority*1 Attached film carrier Value when checking the swing and tilt
adjustment
1 135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2 51/54 step
2 120 AFC 51/54 step
3 110 AFC 46/54 step
*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the priority
above.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.
70060 1/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70060
Setup for service personnel
70060 2/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70060
Setup for service personnel
Adjustment check for scanners S-4 and that for S1-II are different.
• For S-4, refer to ☞ Scanner section adjustment check [S-4].
2. Checking the swing and tilt, light axis and lane stop position of scanner unit
Check that swing and tilt, light axis and lane stop position are in proper positions.
70060 3/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70060
Setup for service personnel
70060 4/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
70060
Setup for service personnel
70060 5/5
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
8000
8. Appendix
8 Appendix
8000 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
80310
Service personnel tool list
Service personnel tool list
NOTE
• For details about service personnel tools related to film carrier like scanner adjustment chart, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
(Processor section) [N] [SM] [J] [F]
Tool Part No. Explanation
Colorimeter height adjustment jig A066490-01 Used to adjust the height of measuring point of the colorimeter.
Service personnel floppy disk F000472-01 Used to enter the service personnel password.
Head adjusting jig A037410-01 Used to adjust the printing pressure of the CVP.
Socket wrench unit (13 mm) Z022421-01 This tool (socket wrench) is used to replace the laser unit. (35
series)
Positioning pin A063588-01 Used to position when replacing the laser unit. Two pins are
necessary. (35 Series)
Used to position the iBeam unit mount. Two pins are necessary.
(35i Series)
Loupe H099047-00 Used to adjust the exposure position.
H099039-00 (no
longer available)
Grounding resistance measurement cable unit W407756-01 Used to check the grounding resistance between input section and
printer section or processor section.
Optical fiber cable pushing bar A073143-01 Used to pull out the optical fiber cable.
For using Optical fiber cable pushing bar, refer to ARCNET
Communication Diagnosis Manualhow to use tool.
Noritsu-eNET system program unit Z019675-01 Used for remote service.
Fiber cutter L003100-00 Used to cut the end of ARCNET cable when it is abnormal there.
For using fiber cutter, refer to the ARCNET Communication
Diagnosis Manual, How to Use the Tools.
Aspirator H103007-00 Used to suck out the dust in the connector on the PCB connected to
the ARCNET cable.
For using aspirator, refer to the ARCNET Communication
Diagnosis Manual, How to Use the Tools.
8. Appendix
replenisher pump. (compatible with the conventional SM machines)
Probe replacing jig A053235-01 Used when replacing the probe. (compatible with the conventional
SM machines)
80310 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list
Operation keyboard correspondence list
Operation keyboard have same functions as some keys on the full keyboard.
Operation keyboard
8. Appendix
G050097
81010 1/1
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
89000
Table of wiring diagrams
Table of wiring diagrams
8. Appendix
LPP 2-6 Around laser unit (type FfR) J310175
LPP 2-6 Around laser unit (type EeR) J310290
LPP 2-6 Around laser unit (type BbR) J310291
IPP/LPP 2-7 Correction value print unit J310159
IPP/LPP 2-8 Around pricing unit J310160
IPP/LPP 3-1 Frame section J310161
IPP 3-2 Interlock circuit J310162
LPP 3-2 Interlock circuit J310177
IPP/LPP 3-3 Paper supply unit J310163
IPP 3-4 Exposure advance unit J310164
LPP 3-4 Exposure advance unit J310264
IPP/LPP 3-5 Paper advance unit J310165
IPP/LPP 3-6 Dual paper magazine unit J310166
IPP 3-7 Around printhead module J310167
LPP 3-7 Laser unit (1) J310178
LPP 3-8 Laser unit (2) J310179
LPP 3-9 Laser unit (3) (Type FfR) J310180
89000 1/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
89000
Table of wiring diagrams
8. Appendix
IPP/LPP 5-14 SM replenisher section (3) [SM] J310137
IPP/LPP 5-15 SM replenisher section (4) [SM] J310138
IPP/LPP 5-16 Tablet replenishment section (1) [J] J310256
IPP/LPP 5-17 Tablet replenishment section (2) [J] J310257
IPP/LPP 5-18 Replenisher section (1) [F] J310267
IPP/LPP 5-19 Replenisher section (2) [F] J310268
IPP/LPP 5-20 Replenisher section (3) [F] J310269
IPP/LPP 5-22 Cooling water plumbing unit J310139
IPP/LPP 5-23 Around colorimeter unit J310140
! Accessories
Block No. Item Diagram No.
KIDS 1-1 Keyboard Expansion Kit J404678
BRAVO II 1-1 BRAVO II J404680
89000 2/3
Distributed by: www.minilablaser.com
89000
Table of wiring diagrams
8. Appendix
89000 3/3